[go: up one dir, main page]

CN111684801A - Bidirectional intra prediction method and device - Google Patents

Bidirectional intra prediction method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN111684801A
CN111684801A CN201880086865.0A CN201880086865A CN111684801A CN 111684801 A CN111684801 A CN 111684801A CN 201880086865 A CN201880086865 A CN 201880086865A CN 111684801 A CN111684801 A CN 111684801A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
intra prediction
block
target block
mode
pixel
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN201880086865.0A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
高玄硕
姜晶媛
林成昶
李镇浩
李河贤
全东山
崔海哲
金晖容
白雅兰
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute ETRI
Industry Academic Cooperation Foundation of Hanbat National University
Original Assignee
Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute ETRI
Industry Academic Cooperation Foundation of Hanbat National University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=66845645&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=CN111684801(A) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute ETRI, Industry Academic Cooperation Foundation of Hanbat National University filed Critical Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute ETRI
Priority claimed from PCT/KR2018/014847 external-priority patent/WO2019107927A1/en
Publication of CN111684801A publication Critical patent/CN111684801A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/593Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving spatial prediction techniques
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/103Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
    • H04N19/105Selection of the reference unit for prediction within a chosen coding or prediction mode, e.g. adaptive choice of position and number of pixels used for prediction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/103Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
    • H04N19/11Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode among a plurality of spatial predictive coding modes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/157Assigned coding mode, i.e. the coding mode being predefined or preselected to be further used for selection of another element or parameter
    • H04N19/159Prediction type, e.g. intra-frame, inter-frame or bidirectional frame prediction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/182Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being a pixel
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/184Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being bits, e.g. of the compressed video stream

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

A video decoding method and apparatus and a video encoding method and apparatus are disclosed. The encoding and decoding of the target block are performed using intra prediction. The intra prediction is bidirectional intra prediction and is intra prediction using the remaining mode. In bidirectional intra prediction, a prediction value of a target pixel in a target block is determined based on reference pixels in two directions according to bidirectional intra prediction. In the intra prediction using the remaining modes, the remaining modes are the remaining intra prediction modes except for the MPMs in the MPM list.

Description

双向帧内预测方法和设备Bidirectional intra prediction method and device

技术领域technical field

以下实施例总体上涉及一种视频解码方法和设备以及视频编码方法和设备,并且更具体地,涉及一种使用双向帧内预测的视频解码方法和设备以及视频编码方法和设备。The following embodiments generally relate to a video decoding method and apparatus and a video encoding method and apparatus, and more particularly, to a video decoding method and apparatus and a video encoding method and apparatus using bidirectional intra prediction.

背景技术Background technique

随着信息与通信行业的持续发展,支持高清晰度(HD)分辨率的广播服务已经在全世界普及。通过这种普及,大量用户已经习惯了高分辨率和高清晰度图像和/或视频。With the continuous development of the information and communication industry, broadcasting services supporting high definition (HD) resolution have become widespread throughout the world. Through this popularity, a large number of users have become accustomed to high-resolution and high-definition images and/or videos.

为了满足用户对高清晰度的需求,大量机构已加速了对下一代成像装置的开发。除了高清TV(HDTV)和全高清(FHD)TV之外,用户对UHD TV的兴趣也已增加,其中,UHD TV的分辨率是全高清(FHD)TV的分辨率的四倍以上。随着其兴趣的增加,不断地需要针对具有更高分辨率和更高清晰度的图像的图像编码/解码技术。In order to meet users' demands for high definition, a large number of institutions have accelerated the development of next-generation imaging devices. In addition to high definition TV (HDTV) and full high definition (FHD) TV, user interest in UHD TV has also increased, wherein the resolution of UHD TV is more than four times that of full high definition (FHD) TV. As its interest increases, there is a constant need for image encoding/decoding techniques for images with higher resolution and higher definition.

图像编码/解码设备和方法可使用帧间预测技术、帧内预测技术、熵编码技术等,以便对高分辨率和高清晰度图像执行编码/解码。帧间预测技术可以是用于使用时间上在前的画面和/或时间上在后的画面对目标画面中包括的像素的值进行预测的技术。帧内预测技术可以是用于使用关于目标画面中的像素的信息对目标画面中包括的像素的值进行预测的技术。熵编码技术可以是用于将短码字分配给频繁出现的符号并且将长码字分配给很少出现的符号的技术。The image encoding/decoding apparatus and method may use an inter-frame prediction technique, an intra-frame prediction technique, an entropy encoding technique, etc., in order to perform encoding/decoding on high-resolution and high-definition images. The inter prediction technique may be a technique for predicting values of pixels included in a target picture using a temporally preceding picture and/or a temporally succeeding picture. The intra prediction technique may be a technique for predicting values of pixels included in a target picture using information about pixels in the target picture. Entropy coding techniques may be techniques for assigning short codewords to frequently occurring symbols and long codewords to infrequently occurring symbols.

在帧内预测中,已经开发了各种详细技术,并且由于对这些详细技术的应用,可提高预测的精度和效率。In intra prediction, various detailed techniques have been developed, and due to the application of these detailed techniques, the accuracy and efficiency of prediction can be improved.

发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

技术问题technical problem

实施例旨在提供一种使用双向帧内预测的编码设备和方法以及解码设备和方法。Embodiments aim to provide an encoding apparatus and method and a decoding apparatus and method using bidirectional intra prediction.

实施例旨在提供一种使用剩余模式的编码设备和方法以及解码设备和方法。The embodiments aim to provide an encoding apparatus and method and a decoding apparatus and method using the residual mode.

技术方案Technical solutions

根据一方面,提供了一种解码方法,包括:确定将被应用于目标块的解码的帧内预测模式;并且执行使用所确定的帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测,其中,所述帧内预测模式是双向帧内预测模式,并且其中,所述帧内预测是双向帧内预测。According to an aspect, there is provided a decoding method comprising: determining an intra prediction mode to be applied to decoding of a target block; and performing intra prediction for the target block using the determined intra prediction mode, wherein the The intra prediction mode is a bidirectional intra prediction mode, and wherein the intra prediction is bidirectional intra prediction.

可基于位于目标块的指定方向上的邻近块中的像素的可用性来确定双向帧内预测模式。The bidirectional intra prediction mode may be determined based on the availability of pixels in neighboring blocks located in the specified direction of the target block.

可基于目标块的邻近块的预测模式来确定双向帧内预测模式。The bidirectional intra prediction mode may be determined based on prediction modes of neighboring blocks of the target block.

双向帧内预测的两个方向可以是两个相反的直线方向。The two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be two opposite linear directions.

可在目标块的指定方向上生成虚拟邻近像素,并且可使用所述虚拟邻近像素针对目标块执行双向帧内预测。Virtual neighboring pixels may be generated in a specified direction of the target block, and bidirectional intra prediction may be performed for the target block using the virtual neighboring pixels.

指定方向可以是右方向和下方向中的一个或更多个。The specified direction may be one or more of a right direction and a downward direction.

可使用位于双向帧内预测的两个方向上的邻近块中的像素来推导针对目标块中的目标像素的预测值。A predicted value for a target pixel in a target block may be derived using pixels in adjacent blocks in both directions of bidirectional intra prediction.

可使用根据位于双向帧内预测的两个方向上的邻近块中的各个像素与目标块中的目标像素之间的距离的权重来推导针对目标像素的预测值。The predicted value for the target pixel may be derived using a weight according to the distance between each pixel in the adjacent block and the target pixel in the target block located in both directions of the bidirectional intra prediction.

可使用针对双向帧内预测的两个方向的权重来推导针对目标块中的目标像素的预测值。A prediction value for a target pixel in a target block may be derived using weights for both directions of bidirectional intra prediction.

可使用单向/双向分类指示符和帧内预测模式指示符来确定针对目标块的所述双向帧内预测模式是否将被使用。A unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator and an intra prediction mode indicator may be used to determine whether the bidirectional intra prediction mode for the target block is to be used.

可基于由两个帧内预测模式指示符指示的两个方向来确定双向帧内预测的两个方向。The two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be determined based on the two directions indicated by the two intra prediction mode indicators.

单个帧内预测模式指示符可指示单向帧内预测的方向和双向帧内预测的方向中的一个。A single intra prediction mode indicator may indicate one of the direction of unidirectional intra prediction and the direction of bidirectional intra prediction.

可根据与由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向对应的方向上的参考像素的可用性来选择单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的一个。One of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction may be selected according to the availability of reference pixels in a direction corresponding to the direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator.

可确定单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被用于整个目标块。It may be determined which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction will be used for the entire target block.

可确定单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被用于目标块中的像素中的每一个。It may be determined which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction will be used for each of the pixels in the target block.

对于双向帧内预测的第一方向和第二方向,当第一方向上的参考像素或第二方向上的参考像素不可用时,可使用填充来生成不可用参考像素的值。For the first and second directions of bidirectional intra prediction, when either the reference pixel in the first direction or the reference pixel in the second direction is unavailable, padding may be used to generate the value of the unavailable reference pixel.

可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的参考像素中的至少一个来确定针对目标块中的目标像素的预测值。The prediction value for the target pixel in the target block may be determined using at least one of the reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

可将权重应用于参考像素中的每一个。A weight can be applied to each of the reference pixels.

剩余模式指示符可指示多个剩余模式中的将被用于目标块的帧内预测的剩余模式。The remaining mode indicator may indicate a remaining mode to be used for intra prediction of the target block among the plurality of remaining modes.

所述多个剩余模式可以是除了在最可能模式(MPM)列表中存在的MPM之外的剩余帧内预测模式。The plurality of remaining modes may be remaining intra-prediction modes other than the MPM present in the most probable mode (MPM) list.

可基于多个不同列表来确定帧内预测模式。The intra prediction mode may be determined based on a number of different lists.

根据另一方面,提供了一种编码方法,包括:确定将被应用于目标块的解码的帧内预测模式;并且执行使用所确定的帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测,其中,所述帧内预测模式是双向帧内预测模式,并且其中,所述帧内预测是双向帧内预测。According to another aspect, there is provided an encoding method comprising: determining an intra prediction mode to be applied to decoding of a target block; and performing intra prediction for the target block using the determined intra prediction mode, wherein, The intra prediction mode is a bidirectional intra prediction mode, and wherein the intra prediction is bidirectional intra prediction.

根据另一方面,提供了一种存储用于图像解码的比特流的计算机可读存储介质,所述比特流包括关于经过编码的目标块的信息,其中,将被应用于目标块的解码的帧内预测模式被确定,并且其中,使用关于经过编码的目标块的信息和所确定的帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测被执行。According to another aspect, there is provided a computer-readable storage medium storing a bitstream for image decoding, the bitstream including information about an encoded target block, wherein the decoded frame to be applied to the target block An intra-prediction mode is determined, and wherein, intra-prediction for the target block using the information on the encoded target block and the determined intra-prediction mode is performed.

有益效果beneficial effect

提供了一种使用双向帧内预测的编码设备和方法以及解码设备和方法。An encoding apparatus and method and a decoding apparatus and method using bidirectional intra prediction are provided.

提供了一种使用剩余模式的编码设备和方法以及解码设备和方法。Provided are an encoding apparatus and method using a residual mode and a decoding apparatus and method.

附图说明Description of drawings

图1是示出被应用了本公开的编码设备的实施例的配置的框图;1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an embodiment of an encoding apparatus to which the present disclosure is applied;

图2是示出被应用了本公开的解码设备的实施例的配置的框图;2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an embodiment of a decoding apparatus to which the present disclosure is applied;

图3是示意性地示出当图像被编码和解码时图像的分区结构的示图;3 is a diagram schematically showing a partition structure of an image when the image is encoded and decoded;

图4是示出编码单元(CU)能够包括的预测单元(PU)的形式的示图;4 is a diagram illustrating a form of a prediction unit (PU) that a coding unit (CU) can include;

图5是示出能够被包括在CU中的变换单元(TU)的形式的示图;5 is a diagram illustrating the form of a transform unit (TU) that can be included in a CU;

图6示出根据示例的块的划分;Figure 6 shows the division of blocks according to an example;

图7是用于解释帧内预测过程的实施例的示图;7 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of an intra prediction process;

图8是用于解释帧内预测过程中使用的参考样点的位置的示图;8 is a diagram for explaining the positions of reference samples used in the intra prediction process;

图9是用于解释帧间预测过程的实施例的示图;9 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of an inter prediction process;

图10示出根据实施例的空间候选;Figure 10 illustrates a spatial candidate according to an embodiment;

图11示出根据实施例的将空间候选的运动信息添加到合并列表的顺序;11 illustrates the order of adding motion information of spatial candidates to a merge list, according to an embodiment;

图12示出根据示例的变换和量化处理;Figure 12 illustrates transform and quantization processing according to an example;

图13示出根据示例的对角线扫描;Figure 13 shows a diagonal scan according to an example;

图14示出根据示例的水平扫描;Figure 14 shows a horizontal scan according to an example;

图15示出根据示例的垂直扫描;Figure 15 shows vertical scanning according to an example;

图16是根据实施例的编码设备的配置图;16 is a configuration diagram of an encoding apparatus according to an embodiment;

图17是根据实施例的解码设备的配置图;17 is a configuration diagram of a decoding apparatus according to an embodiment;

图18是根据实施例的双向帧内预测方法的流程图;18 is a flowchart of a bidirectional intra prediction method according to an embodiment;

图19示出根据示例的单向帧内预测模式;19 illustrates a unidirectional intra prediction mode according to an example;

图20示出根据示例的双向帧内预测模式;20 illustrates a bidirectional intra prediction mode according to an example;

图21示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素的双向帧内预测模式;21 illustrates a bidirectional intra prediction mode using virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example;

图22示出根据示例的从帧内预测模式指示符的方向推导和选择双向帧内预测;22 illustrates the derivation and selection of bidirectional intra prediction from the direction of an intra prediction mode indicator, according to an example;

图23示出根据示例的虚拟邻近像素的生成;23 illustrates the generation of virtual neighboring pixels according to an example;

图24示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素来生成附加虚拟邻近像素;24 illustrates the use of virtual neighboring pixels to generate additional virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example;

图25示出根据示例的右下虚拟邻近像素和中间虚拟邻近像素的生成;25 illustrates the generation of lower right virtual neighbors and middle virtual neighbors, according to an example;

图26示出根据示例的双向帧内预测;26 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction according to an example;

图27示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素的双向帧内预测;27 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example;

图28示出根据示例的使用邻近像素与目标像素之间的距离的双向帧内预测;28 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using distances between neighboring pixels and target pixels, according to an example;

图29示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素与目标像素之间的距离的双向帧内预测;29 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using distances between virtual neighboring pixels and target pixels, according to an example;

图30示出根据实施例的使用剩余模式来确定帧内预测模式;30 illustrates the use of residual modes to determine intra-prediction modes, according to an embodiment;

图31示出根据实施例的在确定MPM是否被使用以及使用剩余模式来确定帧内预测模式之后推导MPM;31 illustrates deriving MPM after determining whether MPM is used and using remaining modes to determine intra prediction mode, according to an embodiment;

图32示出根据示例的用于推导MPM候选的块;32 illustrates blocks for deriving MPM candidates, according to an example;

图33示出根据示例的剩余模式指示符的二值化;33 illustrates binarization of residual mode indicators according to an example;

图34是根据实施例的目标块预测方法和比特流生成方法的流程图;以及34 is a flowchart of a target block prediction method and a bitstream generation method according to an embodiment; and

图35是根据实施例的使用比特流的目标块预测方法的流程图。FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a target block prediction method using a bitstream according to an embodiment.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

本发明可被各种改变,并且可具有各种实施例,下面将参照附图详细地描述特定实施例。然而,应理解,这些实施例不意图将本发明限制为特定的公开形式,它们包括本发明的精神和范围内所包括的所有变化、等同形式或修改形式。The present invention may be variously modified and may have various embodiments, and specific embodiments will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood, however, that these examples are not intended to limit the invention to the particular disclosed forms, and that they include all changes, equivalents, or modifications included within the spirit and scope of the invention.

将参照示出特定实施例的附图对以下示例性实施例进行详细描述。描述这些实施例,使得本公开所属技术领域的普通技术人员能够容易地实践这些实施例。应注意,各种实施例彼此不同,但不需要彼此互斥。例如,在此描述的特定形状、结构和特性可在不脱离与一个实施例相关的多个实施例的精神和范围的情况下被实现为其它实施例。此外,应理解,在不脱离实施例的精神和范围的情况下,能够改变在每个公开的实施例中的各个组件的位置或布置。因此,所附的详细描述并非旨在限制本公开的范围,并且示例性实施例的范围仅由所附的权利要求及其等同物(只要它们被适当地描述)限定。The following exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings that illustrate specific embodiments. These embodiments are described so that those of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure pertains can easily practice the embodiments. It should be noted that the various embodiments differ from each other, but need not be mutually exclusive. For example, the specific shapes, structures, and characteristics described herein can be implemented in other embodiments without departing from the spirit and scope of the various embodiments associated with one embodiment. Furthermore, it is to be understood that the location or arrangement of the various components in each disclosed embodiment can be changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the embodiments. Therefore, the appended detailed description is not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure, and the scope of the exemplary embodiments is limited only by the appended claims and their equivalents, so long as they are properly described.

在附图中,相似的参考标号被用于在各个方面指定相同或相似的功能。附图中的组件的形状、尺寸等可被夸大以使得描述清楚。In the drawings, like reference numerals are used to designate the same or similar functions in various respects. The shapes, sizes, etc. of components in the drawings may be exaggerated for clarity of description.

诸如“第一”和“第二”的术语可用于描述各种组件,但是组件不受所述术语限制。所述术语仅用于将一个组件与另一个组件区分开。例如,在不脱离本说明书的范围的情况下,第一组件可被称为第二组件。类似地,第二组件可被称为第一组件。术语“和/或”可包括多个相关描述项的组合或者多个相关描述项中的任意一个。Terms such as "first" and "second" may be used to describe various components, but the components are not limited by the terms. The terms are only used to distinguish one component from another. For example, a first component could be termed a second component without departing from the scope of this specification. Similarly, the second component may be referred to as the first component. The term "and/or" can include a combination of multiple associated descriptive items or any one of the multiple associated descriptive items.

将理解的是,当组件被称为“连接”或“结合”到另一组件时,两个组件可彼此直接连接或结合,或者在两个组件之间可存在中间组件。将理解的是,当组件被称为“直接连接或结合”时,在两个组件之间不存在中间组件。It will be understood that when a component is referred to as being "connected" or "coupled" to another component, the two components can be directly connected or coupled to each other or intervening components may be present between the two components. It will be understood that when components are referred to as being "directly connected or coupled," there are no intervening components between the two components.

此外,在实施例中描述的组件被独立地示出以表示不同的特征功能,但是这并不意味着每个组件由一个单独的硬件或软件形成。也就是说,为了方便描述,多个组件被单独地布置和包括。例如,多个组件中的至少两个组件可被集成为单个组件。相反,一个组件可被划分为多个组件。只要不脱离本说明书的本质,多个组件被集成的实施例或一些组件被分离的实施例被包括在本说明书的范围中。Furthermore, the components described in the embodiments are shown independently to represent different feature functions, but this does not mean that each component is formed by a separate piece of hardware or software. That is, for convenience of description, a plurality of components are individually arranged and included. For example, at least two of the plurality of components may be integrated into a single component. Conversely, a component can be divided into multiple components. Embodiments in which a plurality of components are integrated or embodiments in which some components are separated are included in the scope of the present specification as long as they do not depart from the essence of the present specification.

此外,应注意,在示例性实施例中,描述组件“包括”特定组件的表述意指另外的组件可被包括在示例性实施例的实践或技术精神的范围内,但是不排除存在除了所述特定组件之外的组件。Furthermore, it should be noted that, in an exemplary embodiment, the expression describing that a component "includes" a particular component means that additional components may be included within the scope of the practical or technical spirit of the exemplary embodiment, but does not preclude the existence of Components other than a specific component.

在本说明书中使用的术语仅用于描述特定实施例,并不意图限制本发明。单数表述包括复数表述,除非在上下文中具体指出相反的描述。在本说明书中,应理解,诸如“包括”或“具有”的术语仅意图指示存在特征、数字、步骤、操作、组件、部件或它们的组合,而不意图排除将存在或添加一个或更多个其它特征、数字、步骤、操作、组件、部件或它们的组合的可能。The terms used in this specification are used to describe specific embodiments only, and are not intended to limit the present invention. Singular expressions include plural expressions unless the context specifically indicates the contrary. In this specification, it should be understood that terms such as "comprising" or "having" are only intended to indicate the presence of features, numbers, steps, operations, components, parts or combinations thereof, and are not intended to preclude the presence or addition of one or more the possibility of other features, numbers, steps, operations, components, parts or combinations thereof.

下面将参照附图来详细描述实施例,使得实施例所属技术领域的普通技术人员能够容易地实践实施例。在实施例的以下描述中,被视为使本说明书的要点模糊的公知功能或配置的详细描述将被省略。此外,相同的参考标号在整个附图中用于指定相同的组件,并且将省略对相同组件的重复描述。The embodiments will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings so that those skilled in the art to which the embodiments pertain can easily practice the embodiments. In the following description of the embodiments, detailed descriptions of well-known functions or configurations that are considered to obscure the gist of the present specification will be omitted. Also, the same reference numerals are used throughout the drawings to designate the same components, and repeated descriptions of the same components will be omitted.

在下文中,“图像”可表示构成视频的单个画面,或者可表示视频本身。例如,“对图像的编码和/或解码”可表示“对视频的编码和/或解码”,并且也可表示“对构成视频的多个图像中的任意一个图像的编码和/或解码”。Hereinafter, "image" may refer to a single picture that constitutes a video, or may refer to the video itself. For example, "encoding and/or decoding an image" may mean "encoding and/or decoding a video", and may also mean "encoding and/or decoding any one of a plurality of images constituting a video".

在下文中,术语“视频”和“运动画面”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the terms "video" and "moving picture" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,目标图像可以是作为将被编码的目标的编码目标图像和/或作为将被解码的目标的解码目标图像。此外,目标图像可以是被输入到编码设备的输入图像或者被输入到解码设备的输入图像。Hereinafter, the target image may be an encoding target image that is a target to be encoded and/or a decoding target image that is a target to be decoded. Also, the target image may be an input image input to an encoding device or an input image input to a decoding device.

在下文中,术语“图像”、“画面”、“帧”和“屏幕”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the terms "image", "picture", "frame" and "screen" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,目标块可以是编码目标块(即,将被编码的目标)和/或解码目标块(即,将被解码的目标)。此外,目标块可以是当前块,即,当前将被编码和/或解码的目标。这里,术语“目标块”和“当前块”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the target block may be an encoding target block (ie, a target to be encoded) and/or a decoding target block (ie, a target to be decoded). Furthermore, the target block may be the current block, ie the target currently to be encoded and/or decoded. Here, the terms "target block" and "current block" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,术语“块”和“单元”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。可选地,“块”可表示特定单元。Hereinafter, the terms "block" and "unit" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other. Alternatively, a "block" may refer to a specific unit.

在下文中,术语“区域”和“区段”可彼此互换使用。In the following, the terms "region" and "section" are used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,特定信号可以是指示特定块的信号。例如,原始信号可以是指示目标块的信号。预测信号可以是指示预测块的信号。残差信号可以是指示残差块的信号。Hereinafter, the specific signal may be a signal indicating a specific block. For example, the original signal may be a signal indicating the target block. The prediction signal may be a signal indicating a prediction block. The residual signal may be a signal indicative of a residual block.

在以下的实施例中,特定的信息、数据、标志、元素和属性可具有它们各自的值。与所述信息、数据、标志、元素和属性中的每一个对应的值“0”可指示逻辑假或第一预定义值。换句话说,值“0”、假、逻辑假和第一预定义值可彼此互换使用。与所述信息、数据、标志、元素和属性中的每一个对应的值“1”可指示逻辑真或第二预定义值。换句话说,值“1”、真、逻辑真和第二预定义值可彼此互换使用。In the following embodiments, certain information, data, flags, elements and attributes may have their respective values. A value of "0" corresponding to each of the information, data, flags, elements and attributes may indicate a logical false or a first predefined value. In other words, the value "0", false, logical false and the first predefined value can be used interchangeably with each other. A value of "1" corresponding to each of the information, data, flags, elements and attributes may indicate logical true or a second predefined value. In other words, the value "1", true, logical true and the second predefined value can be used interchangeably with each other.

当诸如i或j的变量被用于指示行、列或索引时,值i可以是整数0或大于0的整数,或者可以是整数1或大于1的整数。换句话说,在实施例中,行、列和索引中的每一个可从0开始计数,或者可以从1开始计数。When a variable such as i or j is used to indicate a row, column, or index, the value i may be an integer of 0 or greater, or an integer of 1 or greater. In other words, in an embodiment, each of the row, column, and index may be counted from 0, or may be counted from 1.

下面,将描述将在实施例中使用的术语。Hereinafter, terms to be used in the embodiments will be described.

编码器:编码器表示用于执行编码的装置。Encoder: An encoder represents a device for performing encoding.

解码器:解码器表示用于执行解码的装置。Decoder: A decoder represents a device for performing decoding.

单元:“单元”可表示图像编码和解码的单元。术语“单元”和“块”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Unit: A "unit" may represent a unit of image encoding and decoding. The terms "unit" and "block" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

–“单元”可以是M×N样点阵列。M和N可分别是正整数。术语“单元”通常可表示二维(2D)样点阵列。– A "cell" can be an array of MxN samples. M and N may each be a positive integer. The term "cell" may generally refer to a two-dimensional (2D) array of samples.

–在图像的编码和解码过程中,“单元”可以是通过对一个图像进行分区而生成的区域。换句话说,“单元”可以是在一个图像中指定的区域。单个图像可被分区为多个单元。可选地,一个图像可被分区为子部分,并且单元可表示在对分区出的子部分执行编码或解码时每个分区出的子部分。– During the encoding and decoding of images, a "unit" can be an area generated by partitioning an image. In other words, a "cell" can be a designated area in an image. A single image can be partitioned into multiple cells. Alternatively, a picture may be partitioned into sub-portions, and a unit may represent each partitioned sub-portion when encoding or decoding is performed on the partitioned sub-portions.

–在图像的编码和解码过程中,可根据单元的类型对每个单元执行预定义的处理。– During the encoding and decoding of images, pre-defined processing can be performed on each cell according to the cell type.

–根据功能,单元类型可被分类为宏单元、编码单元(CU)、预测单元(PU)、残差单元、变换单元(TU)等。可选地,根据功能,单元可表示块、宏块、编码树单元、编码树块、编码单元、编码块、预测单元、预测块、残差单元、残差块、变换单元、变换块等。- Unit types can be classified into macrounits, coding units (CUs), prediction units (PUs), residual units, transform units (TUs), etc., according to function. Alternatively, depending on the function, a unit may represent a block, a macroblock, a coding tree unit, a coding tree block, a coding unit, a coding block, a prediction unit, a prediction block, a residual unit, a residual block, a transform unit, a transform block, or the like.

–术语“单元”可表示包括亮度(luma)分量块、与亮度分量块对应的色度(chroma)分量块、以及用于各个块的语法元素的信息使得单元被指定为与块区分开。- The term "unit" may denote information including a luma component block, a chroma component block corresponding to the luma component block, and syntax elements for each block such that the unit is designated as distinct from the block.

–单元的尺寸和形状可被不同地实现。此外,单元可具有各种尺寸和形状中的任意一种。具体地,单元的形状不仅可包括正方形,还可以包括可以以二维(2D)表示的几何形状(诸如,矩形、梯形、三角形和五边形)。- The size and shape of the cells can be implemented differently. Furthermore, the cells may have any of a variety of sizes and shapes. Specifically, the shape of the cells may include not only squares, but also geometrical shapes (such as rectangles, trapezoids, triangles, and pentagons) that can be represented in two dimensions (2D).

–此外,单元信息可包括单元的类型、单元的尺寸、单元的深度、单元的编码顺序和单元的解码顺序等中的一个或更多个。例如,单元的类型可指示CU、PU、残差单元和TU中的一个。- Further, the unit information may include one or more of the type of the unit, the size of the unit, the depth of the unit, the encoding order of the unit, the decoding order of the unit, and the like. For example, the type of unit may indicate one of CU, PU, residual unit, and TU.

–一个单元可被分区为子单元,每个子单元具有比相关单元的尺寸更小的尺寸。- A unit may be partitioned into subunits, each subunit having a smaller size than the size of the associated unit.

–深度:深度可表示单元被分区的程度。此外,单元深度可指示当以树结构表示单元时对应单元存在的等级。– Depth: Depth may represent the extent to which the cell is partitioned. Furthermore, the cell depth may indicate the level at which the corresponding cell exists when the cell is represented in a tree structure.

–单元分区信息可包括指示单元的深度的深度。深度可指示单元被分区的次数和/或单元被分区的程度。- The cell partition information may include a depth indicating the depth of the cell. The depth may indicate the number of times the cell is partitioned and/or the degree to which the cell is partitioned.

–在树结构中,可认为根节点的深度最小并且叶节点的深度最大。– In a tree structure, it can be considered that the depth of the root node is the smallest and the depth of the leaf nodes is the largest.

–单个单元可被分层分区为多个子单元,同时所述单个单元具有基于树结构的深度信息。换句话说,单元和通过对该单元进行分区而生成的子单元可分别对应于节点和该节点的子节点。每个被分区出的子单元可具有单元深度。由于深度指示单元被分区的次数和/或单元被分区的程度,因此子单元的分区信息可包括关于所述子单元的尺寸的信息。- A single unit can be hierarchically partitioned into multiple sub-units, while the single unit has depth information based on a tree structure. In other words, a unit and subunits generated by partitioning the unit may correspond to a node and a child node of the node, respectively. Each partitioned subunit may have a unit depth. Since the depth indicates the number of times the unit is partitioned and/or the degree to which the unit is partitioned, the partition information of a sub-unit may include information about the size of the sub-unit.

–在树结构中,顶部节点可对应于进行分区之前的初始节点。顶部节点可被称为“根节点”。此外,根节点可具有最小深度值。这里,顶部节点的深度可为等级“0”。– In a tree structure, the top node may correspond to the initial node before partitioning. The top node may be referred to as the "root node". Also, the root node may have a minimum depth value. Here, the depth of the top node may be level "0".

–深度为等级“1”的节点可表示在初始单元被分区一次时所生成的单元。深度为等级“2”的节点可表示在初始单元被分区两次时所生成的单元。- Nodes with a depth of level "1" may represent cells that were generated when the initial cell was partitioned once. Nodes with a depth of level "2" may represent cells that were generated when the original cell was partitioned twice.

–深度为等级“n”的叶节点可表示在初始单元被分区n次时所生成的单元。- A leaf node with a depth of level "n" may represent a cell generated when the original cell is partitioned n times.

–叶节点可以是不能被进一步分区的底部节点。叶节点的深度可以是最大等级。例如,针对最大等级的预定义值可以是3。– Leaf nodes can be bottom nodes that cannot be further partitioned. The depth of a leaf node can be a maximum level. For example, the predefined value for the maximum level may be 3.

–QT深度可表示针对四分区的深度。BT深度可表示针对二分区的深度。TT深度可表示针对三分区的深度。-QT depth may represent the depth for the quad partition. The BT depth may represent the depth for two partitions. TT depth may represent the depth for three partitions.

–样点:样点可以是构成块的基本单元。可用从根据比特深度(Bd)的0到2Bd-1的值来表示样点。– Sample: A sample can be the basic unit that makes up a block. A sample can be represented by a value from 0 to 2 Bd -1 according to the bit depth (Bd).

–样点可以是像素或像素值。– Samples can be pixels or pixel values.

–在下文中,术语“像素”和“样点”可被用于具有相同含义,并且可彼此互换使用。- In the following, the terms "pixel" and "sample" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

编码树单元(CTU):CTU可由单个亮度分量(Y)编码树块和与亮度分量编码树块相关的两个色度分量(Cb,Cr)编码树块构成。此外,CTU可表示包括上述块以及用于每个块的语法元素的信息。Coding Tree Unit (CTU): A CTU may consist of a single luma component (Y) coding tree block and two chroma component (Cb, Cr) coding tree blocks associated with the luma component coding tree block. Also, the CTU may represent information including the above-described blocks and syntax elements for each block.

–可使用一个或更多个分区方法(诸如四叉树(QT)、二叉树(BT)和三叉树(TT))对每个编码树单元(CTU)进行分区,以便配置子单元,诸如编码单元、预测单元和变换单元。– Each coding tree unit (CTU) may be partitioned using one or more partitioning methods, such as quad-tree (QT), binary-tree (BT), and ternary-tree (TT), in order to configure subunits, such as coding units , prediction unit and transform unit.

–“CTU”可被用作指定在图像解码和编码处理中(如在对输入图像进行分区的情况下)作为处理单元的像素块的术语。- "CTU" may be used as a term to designate a block of pixels that is a processing unit in image decoding and encoding processes, such as in the case of partitioning an input image.

编码树块(CTB):“CTB”可被用作指定Y编码树块、Cb编码树块和Cr编码树块中的任意一个的术语。Coding Tree Block (CTB): "CTB" may be used as a term to designate any one of a Y coding tree block, a Cb coding tree block, and a Cr coding tree block.

邻近块:邻近块(或邻近的块)可表示与目标块相邻的块。邻近块可表示重建邻近块。Neighboring Blocks: Neighboring blocks (or neighboring blocks) may represent blocks that are adjacent to the target block. Neighboring blocks may represent reconstructed neighboring blocks.

在下文中,术语“邻近块”和“邻近块”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换地使用。Hereinafter, the terms "adjacent block" and "adjacent block" may be used to have the same meaning, and may be used interchangeably with each other.

空间邻近块:空间邻近块可以是在空间上与目标块相邻的块。邻近块可包括空间邻近块。Spatial Neighboring Block: A spatially neighboring block may be a block that is spatially adjacent to the target block. The adjacent blocks may include spatially adjacent blocks.

–目标块和空间邻近块可被包括在目标画面中。- The target block and spatially adjacent blocks may be included in the target picture.

–空间邻近块可表示边界与目标块接触的块或者位置距目标块预定距离内的块。- A spatially adjacent block may represent a block whose boundary is in contact with the target block or a block located within a predetermined distance from the target block.

–空间邻近块可表示与目标块的顶点相邻的块。这里,与目标块的顶点相邻的块可表示与水平相邻于目标块的邻近块垂直相邻的块或者与垂直相邻于目标块的邻近块水平相邻的块。- A spatially adjacent block may represent a block adjacent to a vertex of the target block. Here, the block adjacent to the vertex of the target block may represent a block that is vertically adjacent to a neighboring block that is horizontally adjacent to the target block or a block that is horizontally adjacent to a neighboring block that is vertically adjacent to the target block.

时间邻近块:时间邻近块可以是在时间上与目标块相邻的块。邻近块可包括时间邻近块。Temporal Neighboring Block: A temporally neighboring block may be a block that is temporally adjacent to the target block. The adjacent blocks may include temporally adjacent blocks.

–时间邻近块可包括同位块(col块)。- Temporally adjacent blocks may include co-located blocks (col blocks).

–col块可以是先前重建的同位画面(col画面)中的块。col块在col画面中的位置可与目标块在目标画面中的位置对应。可选地,col块在col画面中的位置可等于目标块在目标画面中的位置。col画面可以是参考画面列表中包括的画面。The -col block may be a block in a previously reconstructed co-located picture (col picture). The position of the col block in the col picture may correspond to the position of the target block in the target picture. Alternatively, the position of the col block in the col picture may be equal to the position of the target block in the target picture. The col picture may be a picture included in the reference picture list.

–时间邻近块可以是在时间上与目标块的空间邻近块相邻的块。- A temporally adjacent block may be a block that is temporally adjacent to a spatially adjacent block of the target block.

预测单元:预测单元可以是用于预测(诸如帧间预测、帧内预测、帧间补偿、帧内补偿和运动补偿)的基本单元。Prediction unit: A prediction unit may be a basic unit for prediction such as inter prediction, intra prediction, inter compensation, intra compensation and motion compensation.

–单个预测单元可被划分为具有更小尺寸的多个分区或者子预测单元。所述多个分区也可以是在执行预测或补偿时的基本单元。通过对预测单元进行划分所生成的分区也可以是预测单元。- A single prediction unit may be divided into multiple partitions or sub-prediction units of smaller size. The plurality of partitions may also be basic units when performing prediction or compensation. A partition generated by dividing a prediction unit may also be a prediction unit.

预测单元分区:预测单元分区可以是预测单元被划分为的形状。Prediction unit partition: A prediction unit partition may be the shape into which the prediction unit is divided.

重建的邻近单元:重建的邻近单元可以是在目标单元周围已经被解码和重建的单元。Reconstructed Neighbors: Reconstructed neighbors may be units that have been decoded and reconstructed around the target unit.

–重建的邻近单元可以是在空间上与目标单元相邻或者在时间上与目标单元相邻的单元。- The reconstructed neighbor cells may be cells that are spatially adjacent to the target cell or temporally adjacent to the target cell.

–重建的空间邻近单元可以是在目标画面中包括的已经通过编码和/或解码被重建的单元。- A reconstructed spatially adjacent unit may be a unit included in the target picture that has been reconstructed by encoding and/or decoding.

–重建的时间邻近单元可以是在参考图像中包括的已经通过编码和/或解码被重建的单元。重建的时间邻近单元在参考图像中的位置可以与目标单元在目标画面中的位置相同,或者可以与目标单元在目标画面中的位置对应。- A reconstructed temporally adjacent unit may be a unit included in the reference picture that has been reconstructed by encoding and/or decoding. The position of the reconstructed temporally adjacent unit in the reference image may be the same as the position of the target unit in the target picture, or may correspond to the position of the target unit in the target picture.

参数集:参数集可以是比特流的结构中的头信息。例如,参数集可包括视频参数集、顺序参数集、画面参数集、自适应参数集等。Parameter set: The parameter set can be header information in the structure of the bitstream. For example, parameter sets may include video parameter sets, sequential parameter sets, picture parameter sets, adaptive parameter sets, and the like.

此外,参数集可包括条带头信息和并行块头信息。Also, the parameter set may include slice header information and parallel block header information.

率失真优化:编码设备可使用率失真优化以便通过利用以下项的组合来提供高编码效率:编码单元(CU)的尺寸、预测模式、预测单元(PU)的尺寸、运动信息和变换单元(TU)的尺寸。Rate-distortion optimization: An encoding device may use rate-distortion optimization in order to provide high encoding efficiency by utilizing a combination of: coding unit (CU) size, prediction mode, prediction unit (PU) size, motion information, and transform unit (TU) )size of.

–率失真优化方案可计算各个组合的率失真代价以从这些组合中选择最优组合。可使用以下方程式1来计算率失真代价。通常,可将使率失真代价最小化的组合选为在率失真优化方案下的最优组合。- The rate-distortion optimization scheme can calculate the rate-distortion cost of each combination to select the optimal combination from these combinations. The rate-distortion penalty can be calculated using Equation 1 below. In general, the combination that minimizes the rate-distortion penalty can be selected as the optimal combination under the rate-distortion optimization scheme.

[方程式1][Equation 1]

D+λ*RD+λ*R

–D可表示失真。D可以是在变换单元中的原始变换系数与重建的变换系数之间的差值的平方的平均值(即,均方误差)。-D for distortion. D may be the average of the squares of the differences between the original transform coefficients and the reconstructed transform coefficients in the transform unit (ie, the mean squared error).

–R可表示所述率,其可使用相关上下文信息来表示比特率。-R may represent the rate, which may use relevant context information to represent the bit rate.

–λ表示拉格朗日乘数。R不仅可包括编码参数信息(诸如预测模式、运动信息和编码块标志),还可包括由于对变换系数进行编码而生成的比特。–λ represents the Lagrange multiplier. R may include not only encoding parameter information such as prediction mode, motion information, and encoding block flags, but also bits generated as a result of encoding transform coefficients.

–编码设备可执行诸如帧间预测和/或帧内预测、变换、量化、熵编码、逆量化(反量化)和逆变换的过程,以便计算精确的D和R。这些过程会大大增加编码设备的复杂度。- The encoding device may perform processes such as inter prediction and/or intra prediction, transform, quantization, entropy coding, inverse quantization (inverse quantization) and inverse transform in order to calculate exact D and R. These processes can greatly increase the complexity of the encoding device.

–比特流:比特流可表示包括编码图像信息的比特的流。- Bitstream: A bitstream may represent a stream of bits comprising encoded image information.

–参数集:参数集可以是比特流的结构中的头信息。- Parameter set: The parameter set may be header information in the structure of the bitstream.

参数集可包括视频参数集、顺序参数集、画面参数集和自适应参数集中的至少一个。此外,参数集可包括关于条带头的信息和关于并行块头的信息。The parameter set may include at least one of a video parameter set, an order parameter set, a picture parameter set, and an adaptive parameter set. Furthermore, the parameter set may include information on slice headers and information on parallel block headers.

解析:解析可以是通过对比特流执行熵解码而做出的对语法元素的值的决定。可选地,术语“解析”可表示这种熵解码本身。Parsing: Parsing may be a decision on the value of a syntax element made by performing entropy decoding on the bitstream. Alternatively, the term "parse" may refer to this entropy decoding itself.

符号:符号可以是编码目标单元和/或解码目标单元的语法元素、编码参数和变换系数中的至少一个。此外,符号可以是熵编码的目标或熵解码的结果。Symbol: A symbol may be at least one of a syntax element, an encoding parameter, and a transform coefficient of the encoding target unit and/or the decoding target unit. Furthermore, the symbols can be the target of entropy encoding or the result of entropy decoding.

参考画面:参考画面可以是被单元参考以便执行帧间预测或运动补偿的图像。可选地,参考画面可以是包括被目标单元参考以便执行帧间预测或运动补偿的参考单元的图像。Reference picture: A reference picture may be an image that is referenced by a unit in order to perform inter prediction or motion compensation. Alternatively, the reference picture may be a picture including a reference unit that is referenced by the target unit in order to perform inter prediction or motion compensation.

在下文中,术语“参考画面”和“参考图像”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the terms "reference picture" and "reference image" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

参考画面列表:参考画面列表可以是包括被用于帧间预测或运动补偿的一个或更多个参考图像的列表。Reference picture list: The reference picture list may be a list including one or more reference pictures used for inter prediction or motion compensation.

–参考画面列表的类型可包括合并的列表(LC)、列表0(L0)、列表1(L1)、列表2(L3)、列表3(L3)等。- Types of reference picture lists may include merged list (LC), list 0 (L0), list 1 (L1), list 2 (L3), list 3 (L3), etc.

–对于帧间预测,可使用一个或更多个参考画面列表。- For inter prediction, one or more reference picture lists may be used.

帧间预测指示符:帧间预测指示符可指示针对目标单元的帧间预测方向。帧间预测可以是单向预测和双向预测之一。可选地,帧间预测指示符可表示用于生成目标单元的预测单元的参考图像的数量。可选地,帧间预测指示符可表示用于目标单元的帧间预测或运动补偿的预测块的数量。Inter prediction indicator: The inter prediction indicator may indicate the inter prediction direction for the target unit. Inter prediction may be one of unidirectional prediction and bidirectional prediction. Alternatively, the inter prediction indicator may represent the number of reference pictures used to generate the prediction unit of the target unit. Alternatively, the inter prediction indicator may represent the number of prediction blocks used for inter prediction or motion compensation of the target unit.

参考画面索引:参考画面索引可以是指示在参考画面列表中的特定参考图像的索引。Reference picture index: The reference picture index may be an index indicating a specific reference picture in the reference picture list.

运动矢量(MV):运动矢量可以是用于帧间预测或运动补偿的2D矢量。运动矢量可表示目标图像与参考图像之间的偏移。Motion Vector (MV): A motion vector can be a 2D vector used for inter prediction or motion compensation. The motion vector can represent the offset between the target image and the reference image.

–例如,可以以诸如(mvx,mvy)的形式来表示MV。mvx可指示水平分量,mvy可指示垂直分量。- For example, the MV can be represented in a form such as (mv x , mv y ). mv x may indicate the horizontal component and mv y may indicate the vertical component.

–搜索范围:搜索范围可以是在帧间预测期间执行针对MV的搜索的2D区域。例如,搜索范围的尺寸可以是M×N。M和N可分别是正整数。- Search range: The search range may be the 2D area where the search for the MV is performed during inter prediction. For example, the size of the search range may be MxN. M and N may each be a positive integer.

运动矢量候选:运动矢量候选可以是在运动矢量被预测时作为预测候选的块或者作为预测候选的块的运动矢量。Motion vector candidate: A motion vector candidate may be a block that is a prediction candidate when the motion vector is predicted or a motion vector of a block that is a prediction candidate.

–运动矢量候选可被包括在运动矢量候选列表中。- Motion vector candidates may be included in the motion vector candidate list.

运动矢量候选列表:运动矢量候选列表可以是使用一个或更多个运动矢量候选配置的列表。Motion Vector Candidate List: A motion vector candidate list may be a list configured using one or more motion vector candidates.

运动矢量候选索引:运动矢量候选索引可以是用于指示运动矢量候选列表中的运动矢量候选的指示符。可选地,运动矢量候选索引可以是运动矢量预测因子的索引。Motion Vector Candidate Index: The motion vector candidate index may be an indicator for indicating a motion vector candidate in the motion vector candidate list. Alternatively, the motion vector candidate index may be an index of a motion vector predictor.

运动信息:运动信息可以是包括参考画面列表、参考图像、运动矢量候选、运动矢量候选索引、合并候选和合并索引中的至少一个以及运动矢量、参考画面索引和帧间预测指示符的信息。Motion information: The motion information may be information including at least one of a reference picture list, a reference picture, a motion vector candidate, a motion vector candidate index, a merge candidate, and a merge index, and a motion vector, a reference picture index, and an inter prediction indicator.

合并候选列表:合并候选列表可以是使用合并候选配置的列表。Merge candidate list: The merge candidate list may be a list using the merge candidate configuration.

合并候选:合并候选可以是空间合并候选、时间合并候选、组合合并候选、组合双预测合并候选、零合并候选等。合并候选可包括运动信息,诸如预测类型信息、用于每个列表的参考画面索引以及运动矢量。Merging candidate: The merging candidate may be a spatial merging candidate, a temporal merging candidate, a combined merging candidate, a combined bi-predictive merging candidate, a zero merging candidate, and the like. Merge candidates may include motion information, such as prediction type information, reference picture indices for each list, and motion vectors.

合并索引:合并索引可以是用于指示合并候选列表中的合并候选的指示符。Merge Index: The merge index may be an indicator for indicating a merge candidate in the merge candidate list.

–合并索引可指示在空间上与目标单元相邻的重建单元和在时间上与目标单元相邻的重建单元之间的用于推导合并候选的重建单元。- The merge index may indicate a reconstruction unit for deriving a merge candidate between a reconstruction unit that is spatially adjacent to the target unit and a reconstruction unit that is temporally adjacent to the target unit.

–合并索引可指示合并候选的多条运动信息中的至少一条。- The merge index may indicate at least one of multiple pieces of motion information of a merge candidate.

变换单元:变换单元可以是残差信号编码和/或残差信号解码(诸如变换、逆变换、量化、反量化、变换系数编码和变换系数解码)的基本单元。单个变换单元可被分区为具有更小尺寸的多个变换单元。Transform unit: A transform unit may be a basic unit for residual signal encoding and/or residual signal decoding, such as transform, inverse transform, quantization, inverse quantization, transform coefficient encoding, and transform coefficient decoding. A single transform unit may be partitioned into multiple transform units with smaller sizes.

缩放:缩放可表示将因子乘以变换系数等级的过程。Scaling: Scaling can refer to the process of multiplying a factor by a transform coefficient level.

–作为对变换系数等级进行缩放的结果,可生成变换系数。缩放也可被称为“反量化”。- Transform coefficients may be generated as a result of scaling transform coefficient levels. Scaling may also be referred to as "inverse quantization".

量化参数(QP):量化参数可以是用于在量化中生成用于变换系数的变换系数等级的值。可选地,量化参数也可以是用于在反量化中通过对变换系数等级进行缩放来生成变换系数的值。可选地,量化参数可以是被映射到量化步长的值。Quantization parameter (QP): A quantization parameter may be a value used to generate transform coefficient levels for transform coefficients in quantization. Optionally, the quantization parameter may also be a value used to generate transform coefficients by scaling transform coefficient levels in inverse quantization. Alternatively, the quantization parameter may be a value mapped to a quantization step size.

变量增量(Delta)量化参数:变量增量量化参数是目标单元的量化参数与预测出的量化参数之间的差值。Delta quantization parameter: The delta quantization parameter is the difference between the quantization parameter of the target unit and the predicted quantization parameter.

扫描:扫描可表示对单元、块或矩阵中的系数顺序进行排列的方法。例如,用于按照一维(1D)阵列的形式对2D阵列进行排列的方法可被称为“扫描”。可选地,用于按照2D阵列的形式对1D阵列进行排列的方法也可被称为“扫描”或“逆扫描”。Scanning: Scanning can represent a method of arranging the order of coefficients in a cell, block, or matrix. For example, a method for arranging a 2D array in the form of a one-dimensional (1D) array may be referred to as "scanning". Alternatively, the method for arranging a 1D array in the form of a 2D array may also be referred to as "scanning" or "inverse scanning".

变换系数:变换系数可以是在编码设备执行变换时生成的系数值。可选地,变换系数可以是在解码设备执行熵解码和反量化中的至少一个时生成的系数值。Transform coefficients: Transform coefficients may be coefficient values generated when an encoding device performs transform. Alternatively, the transform coefficients may be coefficient values generated when the decoding apparatus performs at least one of entropy decoding and inverse quantization.

–通过将量化应用于变换系数或残差信号而生成的量化的等级或量化的变换系数等级也可被包括在术语“变换系数”的含义中。- Quantized levels or quantized transform coefficient levels generated by applying quantization to transform coefficients or residual signals may also be included in the meaning of the term "transform coefficients".

量化的等级:量化的等级可以是在编码设备对变换系数或残差信号执行量化时生成的值。可选地,量化的等级可以是在解码设备执行反量化时作为反量化的目标的值。Level of quantization: The level of quantization may be a value generated when an encoding apparatus performs quantization on a transform coefficient or residual signal. Alternatively, the level of quantization may be a value that is a target of inverse quantization when the decoding apparatus performs inverse quantization.

–作为变换和量化的结果的量化的变换系数等级也可被包括在量化的等级的含义中。- Quantized transform coefficient levels that are the result of transform and quantization may also be included in the meaning of quantized levels.

非零变换系数:非零变换系数可以是具有除了0之外的值的变换系数,或者可以是具有除了0之外的值的变换系数等级。可选地,非零变换系数可以是值的幅度不为0的变换系数,或者可以是值的幅度不为0的变换系数等级。Non-zero transform coefficients: Non-zero transform coefficients may be transform coefficients having values other than zero, or may be transform coefficient levels having values other than zero. Alternatively, the non-zero transform coefficients may be transform coefficients whose magnitudes are not zero, or may be transform coefficient levels whose magnitudes are not zero.

量化矩阵:量化矩阵可以是在量化过程或反量化过程中使用以便提高图像的主观图像质量或客观图像质量的矩阵。量化矩阵也可被称为“缩放列表”。Quantization matrix: A quantization matrix can be a matrix used in the quantization process or inverse quantization process in order to improve the subjective image quality or objective image quality of an image. The quantization matrix may also be referred to as a "scale list".

量化矩阵系数:量化矩阵系数可以是量化矩阵中的每个元素。量化矩阵系数也可被称为“矩阵系数”。Quantization matrix coefficients: The quantization matrix coefficients can be each element in the quantization matrix. The quantization matrix coefficients may also be referred to as "matrix coefficients".

默认矩阵:默认矩阵可以是被编码设备和解码设备预先定义的量化矩阵。Default matrix: The default matrix can be a quantization matrix pre-defined by the encoding device and the decoding device.

非默认矩阵:非默认矩阵可以是未被编码设备和解码设备预先定义的量化矩阵。非默认矩阵可以由编码设备用信号传送给解码设备。Non-default matrix: The non-default matrix may be a quantization matrix that is not predefined by the encoding device and the decoding device. The non-default matrix may be signaled by the encoding device to the decoding device.

最可能模式(MPM):MPM可表示高概率被用于针对目标块的帧内预测的帧内预测模式。Most Probable Mode (MPM): MPM may represent an intra prediction mode that is used for intra prediction for a target block with a high probability.

编码设备和解码设备可基于与目标块相关的编码参数以及与目标块相关的对象的属性来确定一个或更多个MPM。The encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus may determine one or more MPMs based on encoding parameters related to the target block and attributes of objects related to the target block.

编码设备和解码设备可基于参考块的帧内预测模式来确定一个或更多个MPM。参考块可包括多个参考块。多个参考块可包括与目标块的左侧相邻的空间邻近块和与目标块的上方相邻的空间邻近块。换句话说,根据哪些帧内预测模式已经被用于参考块,可确定一个或更多个不同的MPM。The encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus may determine one or more MPMs based on the intra prediction mode of the reference block. A reference block may include multiple reference blocks. The plurality of reference blocks may include a spatially adjacent block adjacent to the left of the target block and a spatially adjacent block adjacent to the upper side of the target block. In other words, one or more different MPMs may be determined depending on which intra prediction modes have been used for the reference block.

可在编码设备和解码设备两者中以相同的方式确定一个或更多个MPM。也就是说,编码设备和解码设备可共享包括一个或更多个MPM的相同的MPM列表。One or more MPMs may be determined in the same manner in both the encoding device and the decoding device. That is, the encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus may share the same MPM list including one or more MPMs.

MPM列表:MPM列表可以是包括一个或更多个MPM的列表。可预先定义MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM的数量。MPM list: An MPM list can be a list that includes one or more MPMs. The number of one or more MPMs in the MPM list may be predefined.

MPM指示符:MPM指示符可指示MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM之中的将被用于针对目标块的帧内预测的MPM。例如,MPM指示符可以是用于MPM列表的索引。MPM indicator: The MPM indicator may indicate an MPM among one or more MPMs in the MPM list to be used for intra prediction for the target block. For example, the MPM indicator may be an index for the MPM list.

由于在编码设备和解码设备两者中以相同的方式确定MPM列表,因此可不需要将MPM列表本身从编码设备发送到解码设备。Since the MPM list is determined in the same way in both the encoding device and the decoding device, it may not be necessary to send the MPM list itself from the encoding device to the decoding device.

MPM指示符可从编码设备被用信号发送到解码设备。由于MPM指示符被用信号发送,因此解码设备可确定MPM列表中的MPM之中的将被用于针对目标块的帧内预测的MPM。The MPM indicator may be signaled from the encoding device to the decoding device. Since the MPM indicator is signaled, the decoding apparatus may determine the MPM to be used for intra prediction for the target block among the MPMs in the MPM list.

MPM使用指示符:MPM使用指示符可指示MPM使用模式是否将被用于针对目标块的预测。MPM使用模式可以是使用MPM列表来确定将被用于针对目标块的帧内预测的MPM的模式。MPM usage indicator: The MPM usage indicator may indicate whether the MPM usage mode is to be used for prediction for the target block. The MPM usage mode may be a mode in which the MPM to be used for intra prediction for the target block is determined using the MPM list.

MPM使用指示符可从编码设备被用信号发送到解码设备。The MPM usage indicator may be signaled from the encoding device to the decoding device.

信令:“信令”可表示信息从编码设备被发送到解码设备。可选地,信令可表示信息被包括在比特流或存储介质中。由编码设备用信号发送的信息可被解码设备使用。Signaling: "Signaling" may mean that information is sent from an encoding device to a decoding device. Alternatively, the signaling may indicate that the information is included in the bitstream or storage medium. The information signaled by the encoding device can be used by the decoding device.

图1是示出被应用了本公开的编码设备的实施例的配置的框图。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an embodiment of an encoding apparatus to which the present disclosure is applied.

编码设备100可以是编码器、视频编码设备或图像编码设备。视频可包括一个或更多个图像(画面)。编码设备100可顺序地对视频的一个或更多个图像进行编码。The encoding device 100 may be an encoder, a video encoding device, or an image encoding device. A video may include one or more images (pictures). The encoding apparatus 100 may sequentially encode one or more pictures of the video.

参照图1,编码设备100包括帧间预测单元110、帧内预测单元120、切换器115、减法器125、变换单元130、量化单元140、熵编码单元150、反量化(逆量化)单元160、逆变换单元170、加法器175、滤波器单元180和参考画面缓冲器190。1, the encoding apparatus 100 includes an inter prediction unit 110, an intra prediction unit 120, a switch 115, a subtractor 125, a transform unit 130, a quantization unit 140, an entropy encoding unit 150, an inverse quantization (inverse quantization) unit 160, Inverse transform unit 170 , adder 175 , filter unit 180 and reference picture buffer 190 .

编码设备100可使用帧内模式和/或帧间模式对目标图像执行编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may perform encoding on the target image using the intra mode and/or the inter mode.

此外,编码设备100可通过对目标图像进行编码来生成包括关于编码的信息的比特流,并且可输出生成的比特流。生成的比特流可被存储在计算机可读存储介质中,并且可通过无线/有线传输介质被流传输。Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may generate a bitstream including information on encoding by encoding the target image, and may output the generated bitstream. The generated bitstream can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, and can be streamed over a wireless/wired transmission medium.

当帧内模式被用作预测模式时,切换器115可切换到帧内模式。当帧间模式被用作预测模式时,切换器115可切换到帧间模式。When the intra mode is used as the prediction mode, the switch 115 may switch to the intra mode. When the inter mode is used as the prediction mode, the switcher 115 may switch to the inter mode.

编码设备100可生成目标块的预测块。此外,在已生成了预测块之后,编码设备100可对目标块与预测块之间的残差进行编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may generate a prediction block of the target block. Also, after the prediction block has been generated, the encoding apparatus 100 may encode the residual between the target block and the prediction block.

当预测模式是帧内模式时,帧内预测单元120可将在目标块周围的先前被编码/解码的邻近块的像素用作参考样点。帧内预测单元120可使用所述参考样点对目标块执行空间预测,并且可经由空间预测针对目标块生成预测样点。When the prediction mode is the intra mode, the intra prediction unit 120 may use the pixels of the previously encoded/decoded neighboring blocks around the target block as reference samples. Intra-prediction unit 120 may perform spatial prediction on the target block using the reference samples, and may generate prediction samples for the target block via spatial prediction.

帧间预测单元110可包括运动预测单元和运动补偿单元。The inter prediction unit 110 may include a motion prediction unit and a motion compensation unit.

当预测模式是帧间模式时,运动预测单元可在运动预测过程中在参考图像中搜索与目标块最匹配的区域,并且可基于找到的区域针对目标块和找到的区域推导出运动矢量。When the prediction mode is inter mode, the motion prediction unit may search a reference image for a region that best matches the target block in the motion prediction process, and may derive a motion vector for the target block and the found region based on the found region.

参考图像可被存储在参考画面缓冲器190中。更具体地讲,当参考图像的编码和/或解码已被处理时,参考图像可被存储在参考画面缓冲器190中。Reference images may be stored in the reference picture buffer 190 . More specifically, the reference picture may be stored in the reference picture buffer 190 when encoding and/or decoding of the reference picture has been processed.

运动补偿单元可通过使用运动矢量执行运动补偿来生成针对目标块的预测块。这里,运动矢量可以是用于帧间预测的二维(2D)矢量。此外,运动矢量可表示目标图像与参考图像之间的偏移。The motion compensation unit may generate a prediction block for the target block by performing motion compensation using the motion vector. Here, the motion vector may be a two-dimensional (2D) vector used for inter prediction. Furthermore, the motion vector may represent the offset between the target image and the reference image.

当运动矢量具有除了整数之外的值时,运动预测单元和运动补偿单元可通过将插值滤波器应用于参考图像的部分区域来生成预测块。为了执行帧间预测或运动补偿,可确定跳过模式、合并模式、高级运动矢量预测(AMVP)模式和当前画面参考模式中的哪一种模式对应于用于基于CU对CU中包括的PU的运动进行预测并对该运动进行补偿的方法,并且可根据该模式执行帧间预测或运动补偿。When the motion vector has a value other than an integer, the motion prediction unit and the motion compensation unit may generate a prediction block by applying an interpolation filter to a partial region of the reference image. In order to perform inter prediction or motion compensation, it may be determined which of skip mode, merge mode, advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, and current picture reference mode corresponds to a CU-based PU for PUs included in the CU A method of predicting and compensating for motion, and inter-prediction or motion compensation may be performed according to this mode.

减法器125可生成残差块,其中,残差块是目标块与预测块之间的差。残差块也可被称为“残差信号”。Subtractor 125 may generate a residual block, where the residual block is the difference between the target block and the prediction block. The residual block may also be referred to as a "residual signal".

残差信号可以是原始信号与预测信号之间的差。可选地,残差信号可以是通过对原始信号与预测信号之间的差进行变换或量化而生成的信号或者通过对该差进行变换和量化而生成的信号。残差块可以是针对块单元的残差信号。The residual signal may be the difference between the original signal and the predicted signal. Alternatively, the residual signal may be a signal generated by transforming or quantizing the difference between the original signal and the predicted signal or a signal generated by transforming and quantizing the difference. The residual block may be a residual signal for block units.

变换单元130可通过对残差块进行变换来生成变换系数,并且可输出生成的变换系数。这里,变换系数可以是通过对残差块进行变换而生成的系数值。The transform unit 130 may generate transform coefficients by transforming the residual block, and may output the generated transform coefficients. Here, the transform coefficients may be coefficient values generated by transforming the residual block.

变换单元130可在执行变换时使用多个预定义的变换方法中的一个。Transform unit 130 may use one of a number of predefined transform methods when performing the transform.

多个预定义的变换方法可包括离散余弦变换(DCT)、离散正弦变换(DST)、Karhunen-Loeve变换(KLT)等。A number of predefined transform methods may include discrete cosine transform (DCT), discrete sine transform (DST), Karhunen-Loeve transform (KLT), and the like.

可根据针对目标块和/或邻近块的编码参数中的至少一个来确定用于对残差块进行变换的变换方法。例如,可基于针对PU的帧间预测模式、针对PU的帧内预测模式、TU的尺寸以及TU的形状中的至少一个来确定变换方法。可选地,指示变换方法的变换信息可从编码设备100被用信号发送到解码设备200。A transform method for transforming the residual block may be determined according to at least one of encoding parameters for the target block and/or neighboring blocks. For example, the transform method may be determined based on at least one of the inter prediction mode for the PU, the intra prediction mode for the PU, the size of the TU, and the shape of the TU. Alternatively, transform information indicating the transform method may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 .

当使用变换跳过模式时,变换单元130可省略对残差块进行变换的操作。When transform skip mode is used, transform unit 130 may omit transforming the residual block.

通过对变换系数实施量化,可生成量化的变换系数等级或者量化的等级。在下文中,在实施例中,量化的变换系数等级和量化的等级中的每一个也可被称为“变换系数”。By quantizing the transform coefficients, a quantized transform coefficient level or a quantized level can be generated. Hereinafter, in an embodiment, each of the quantized transform coefficient level and the quantized level may also be referred to as a "transform coefficient".

量化单元140可通过根据量化参数对变换系数进行量化来生成量化的变换系数等级或量化的等级。量化单元140可输出生成的量化的变换系数等级或量化的等级。在这种情况下,量化单元140可使用量化矩阵对变换系数进行量化。The quantization unit 140 may generate a quantized transform coefficient level or a quantized level by quantizing the transform coefficient according to the quantization parameter. The quantization unit 140 may output the generated quantized transform coefficient level or quantized level. In this case, the quantization unit 140 may quantize the transform coefficients using a quantization matrix.

熵编码单元150可通过基于由量化单元140计算出的值和/或在编码过程中计算出的编码参数值执行基于概率分布的熵编码来生成比特流。熵编码单元150可输出生成的比特流。The entropy encoding unit 150 may generate a bitstream by performing probability distribution-based entropy encoding based on values calculated by the quantization unit 140 and/or encoding parameter values calculated during encoding. The entropy encoding unit 150 may output the generated bitstream.

熵编码单元150可对关于图像的像素的信息以及对图像进行解码所需的信息执行熵编码。例如,对图像进行解码所需的信息可包括语法元素等。The entropy encoding unit 150 may perform entropy encoding on information about pixels of the image and information required to decode the image. For example, information required to decode an image may include syntax elements and the like.

当应用熵编码时,可将更少的比特分配给更频繁出现的符号,并且可将更多的比特分配给很少出现的符号。由于通过该分配来表示符号,因此可减少用于将被编码的目标符号的比特串的大小。因此,通过熵编码可提高视频编码的压缩性能。When entropy coding is applied, fewer bits can be allocated to more frequently occurring symbols, and more bits can be allocated to infrequently occurring symbols. Since the symbols are represented by this allocation, the size of the bit string for the target symbol to be encoded can be reduced. Therefore, the compression performance of video coding can be improved by entropy coding.

此外,为了进行熵编码,熵编码单元150可使用诸如指数哥伦布、上下文自适应可变长度编码(CAVLC)或上下文自适应二进制算术编码(CABAC)的编码方法。例如,熵编码单元150可使用可变长度编码/码(VLC)表来执行熵编码。例如,熵编码单元150可推导出用于目标符号的二值化方法。此外,熵编码单元150可推导出用于目标符号/二进制位的概率模型。熵编码单元150可使用推导出的二值化方法、概率模型和上下文模型来执行算术编码。Also, for entropy encoding, the entropy encoding unit 150 may use an encoding method such as Exponential Golomb, Context Adaptive Variable Length Coding (CAVLC), or Context Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding (CABAC). For example, the entropy encoding unit 150 may perform entropy encoding using a variable length coding/code (VLC) table. For example, entropy encoding unit 150 may derive a binarization method for the target symbol. Additionally, entropy encoding unit 150 may derive a probability model for the target symbol/bin. The entropy encoding unit 150 may perform arithmetic encoding using the derived binarization method, probability model, and context model.

熵编码单元150可通过变换系数扫描方法将2D块形式的系数变换为1D矢量形式,以便对量化的变换系数等级进行编码。The entropy encoding unit 150 may transform coefficients in a 2D block form into a 1D vector form through a transform coefficient scanning method in order to encode the quantized transform coefficient levels.

编码参数可以是编码和/或解码所需的信息。编码参数可包括由编码设备100编码且从编码设备100发送到解码设备的信息,并且还可包括可在编码或解码过程中推导的信息。例如,发送到解码设备的信息可包括语法元素。Encoding parameters may be information required for encoding and/or decoding. The encoding parameters may include information encoded by the encoding apparatus 100 and transmitted from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus, and may also include information that may be derived during encoding or decoding. For example, the information sent to the decoding device may include syntax elements.

编码参数不仅可包括由编码设备编码并由编码设备用信号传送到解码设备的诸如语法元素的信息(或标志或索引),还可包括在编码或解码处理中推导出的信息。此外,编码参数可包括对图像进行编码或解码所需的信息。例如,编码参数可包括以下项中的至少一个值、以下项的组合或统计:单元/块的尺寸、单元/块的深度、单元/块的分区信息、单元/块的分区结构、指示单元/块是否以四叉树结构被分区的信息、指示单元/块是否以二叉树结构被分区的信息、二叉树结构的分区方向(水平方向或垂直方向)、二叉树结构的分区形式(对称分区或非对称分区)、指示单元/块是否以三叉树结构被分区的信息、三叉树结构的分区方向(水平方向或垂直方向)、预测方案(帧内预测或帧间预测)、帧内预测模式/方向、参考样点滤波方法、预测块滤波方法、预测块边界滤波方法、用于滤波的滤波器抽头、用于滤波的滤波器系数、帧间预测模式、运动信息、运动矢量、参考画面索引、帧间预测方向、帧间预测指示符、参考画面列表、参考图像、运动矢量预测因子、运动矢量预测候选、运动矢量候选列表、指示合并模式是否被使用的信息、合并候选、合并候选列表、指示跳过模式是否被使用的信息、插值滤波器的类型、插值滤波器的抽头、插值滤波器的滤波器系数、运动矢量的大小、运动矢量表示的精确度、变换类型、变换大小、指示首次变换是否被使用的信息、指示附加(二次)变换是否被使用的信息、首次变换索引、二次变换索引、指示残差信号存在或不存在的信息、编码块样式、编码块标志、量化参数、量化矩阵、关于环路内滤波器的信息、指示环路内滤波器是否被应用的信息、环路内滤波器的系数、环路内滤波器的抽头、环路内滤波器的形状/形式、指示去块滤波器是否被应用的信息、去块滤波器的系数、去块滤波器的抽头、去块滤波器强度、去块滤波器的形状/形式、指示自适应样点偏移是否被应用的信息、自适应样点偏移的值、自适应样点偏移的类别、自适应样点偏移的类型、指示自适应环路滤波器是否被应用的信息、自适应环路滤波器的系数、自适应环路滤波器的抽头、自适应环路滤波器的形状/形式、二值化/反二值化方法、上下文模型、上下文模型决定方法、上下文模型更新方法、指示常规模式是否被执行的信息、指示旁路(bypass)模式是否被执行的信息、上下文二进制位、旁路二进制位、变换系数、变换系数等级、变换系数等级扫描方法、图像显示/输出顺序、条带识别信息、条带类型、条带分区信息、并行块识别信息、并行块类型、并行块分区信息、画面类型、比特深度、关于亮度信号的信息和关于色度信号的信息。预测方案可表示帧内预测模式和帧间预测模式中的一个预测模式。Encoding parameters may include not only information such as syntax elements (or flags or indices) encoded by the encoding device and signaled by the encoding device to the decoding device, but also information derived in the encoding or decoding process. Furthermore, the encoding parameters may include information required to encode or decode the image. For example, the coding parameters may include at least one of the following values, a combination or statistics of: size of unit/block, depth of unit/block, partition information of unit/block, partition structure of unit/block, indicating unit/block Information whether the block is partitioned in a quad-tree structure, information indicating whether the unit/block is partitioned in a binary tree structure, the partition direction (horizontal direction or vertical direction) of the binary tree structure, the partition form of the binary tree structure (symmetric partition or asymmetric partition) ), information indicating whether the unit/block is partitioned in a ternary tree structure, the partition direction of the ternary tree structure (horizontal direction or vertical direction), prediction scheme (intra prediction or inter prediction), intra prediction mode/direction, reference Sample filtering method, predictive block filtering method, predictive block boundary filtering method, filter taps for filtering, filter coefficients for filtering, inter prediction mode, motion information, motion vector, reference picture index, inter prediction direction, inter prediction indicator, reference picture list, reference picture, motion vector predictor, motion vector prediction candidate, motion vector candidate list, information indicating whether merge mode is used, merge candidate, merge candidate list, indicating skip mode Information about whether it is used, the type of interpolation filter, the taps of the interpolation filter, the filter coefficients of the interpolation filter, the size of the motion vector, the accuracy of the motion vector representation, the transform type, the transform size, indicating whether the first transform is used or not information, information indicating whether the additional (secondary) transform is used, first transform index, second transform index, information indicating the presence or absence of residual signal, coding block style, coding block flag, quantization parameter, quantization matrix, Information about the in-loop filter, information indicating whether the in-loop filter is applied, coefficients of the in-loop filter, taps of the in-loop filter, shape/form of the in-loop filter, indicating deblocking information whether the filter is applied, coefficients of the deblocking filter, taps of the deblocking filter, deblocking filter strength, shape/form of the deblocking filter, information indicating whether adaptive sample offset is applied, value of adaptive sample offset, type of adaptive sample offset, type of adaptive sample offset, information indicating whether adaptive loop filter is applied, coefficients of adaptive loop filter, self Taps of adaptive loop filter, shape/form of adaptive loop filter, binarization/de-binarization method, context model, context model decision method, context model update method, information indicating whether the normal mode is executed or not , information indicating whether bypass mode is executed, context bin, bypass bin, transform coefficient, transform coefficient level, transform coefficient level scanning method, image display/output order, slice identification information, slice type , slice partition information, parallel block identification information, parallel block type, parallel block partition information, picture type, bit depth, information on luminance signals, and information on chrominance signals. The prediction scheme may represent one of an intra prediction mode and an inter prediction mode.

残差信号可表示原始信号与预测信号之间的差。可选地,残差信号可以是对原始信号与预测信号之间的差进行变换而生成的信号。可选地,残差信号可以是对原始信号与预测信号之间的差进行变换和量化而生成的信号。残差块可以是针对块的残差信号。The residual signal may represent the difference between the original signal and the predicted signal. Alternatively, the residual signal may be a signal generated by transforming the difference between the original signal and the predicted signal. Alternatively, the residual signal may be a signal generated by transforming and quantizing the difference between the original signal and the predicted signal. The residual block may be a residual signal for the block.

这里,用信号传送标志或索引可表示编码设备100将通过对标志或索引执行熵编码而生成的熵编码的标志或熵编码的索引包括在比特流中,并且可表示解码设备200通过对从比特流提取的熵编码的标志或熵编码的索引执行熵解码来获取标志或索引。Here, signaling the flag or index may mean that the encoding apparatus 100 includes an entropy-coded flag or an entropy-coded index generated by performing entropy encoding on the flag or index in the bitstream, and may mean that the decoding apparatus 200 performs entropy coding by the decoding apparatus 200 The entropy-coded flag or entropy-coded index extracted from the stream performs entropy decoding to obtain the flag or index.

由于编码设备100经由帧间预测执行编码,因此编码的目标图像可被用作用于将被后续处理的另外的图像的参考图像。因此,编码设备100可对编码的目标图像进行重建或解码,并将重建或解码的图像作为参考图像存储在参考画面缓冲器190中。对于解码,可进行对编码的目标图像的反量化和逆变换。Since the encoding apparatus 100 performs encoding via inter prediction, the encoded target image can be used as a reference image for another image to be subsequently processed. Accordingly, the encoding apparatus 100 may reconstruct or decode the encoded target image, and store the reconstructed or decoded image in the reference picture buffer 190 as a reference image. For decoding, inverse quantization and inverse transformation of the encoded target image may be performed.

量化的等级可由反量化单元160进行反量化,并且可由逆变换单元170进行逆变换。可由加法器175将已被反量化和/或逆变换的系数与预测块相加。将反量化和/或逆变换的系数和预测块相加,然后可生成重建块。这里,反量化和/或逆变换的系数可表示被执行了反量化和逆变换中的一个或更多个的系数,并且也可以表示重建的残差块。The quantized levels may be inverse quantized by the inverse quantization unit 160 and inversely transformed by the inverse transform unit 170 . The coefficients that have been inverse quantized and/or inverse transformed may be added to the prediction block by an adder 175 . The inverse-quantized and/or inverse-transformed coefficients and the prediction block are added, and then the reconstructed block can be generated. Here, the inversely quantized and/or inversely transformed coefficients may represent coefficients on which one or more of inverse quantization and inverse transformations are performed, and may also represent a reconstructed residual block.

重建块可通过滤波器单元180进行滤波。滤波器单元180可将去块滤波器、样点自适应偏移(SAO)滤波器和自适应环路滤波器(ALF)中的一个或更多个滤波器应用于重建块或重建画面。滤波器单元180也可被称为“环路滤波器”。The reconstructed block may be filtered by filter unit 180 . Filter unit 180 may apply one or more of a deblocking filter, a sample adaptive offset (SAO) filter, and an adaptive loop filter (ALF) to the reconstructed block or reconstructed picture. Filter unit 180 may also be referred to as a "loop filter".

去块滤波器可消除在块之间的边界处出现的块失真。为了确定是否应用去块滤波器,可决定被包括在块中并且包括确定是否对目标块应用去块滤波器所基于的像素的列或行的数量。A deblocking filter removes block distortions that occur at boundaries between blocks. In order to determine whether to apply the deblocking filter, a decision may be made on the number of columns or rows of pixels that are included in the block and include the determination of whether to apply the deblocking filter to the target block.

当去块滤波器被应用于目标块时,所应用的滤波器可根据所需要的去块滤波的强度而不同。换句话说,在不同的滤波器中,可将考虑去块滤波的强度而决定的滤波器应用于目标块。当去块滤波器被应用于目标块时,可根据所需的去块滤波的强度将与强滤波器和弱滤波器中的任意一个对应的滤波器应用于目标块。When a deblocking filter is applied to a target block, the applied filter may vary according to the required strength of deblocking filtering. In other words, among different filters, a filter decided in consideration of the strength of deblocking filtering may be applied to the target block. When the deblocking filter is applied to the target block, a filter corresponding to any one of the strong filter and the weak filter may be applied to the target block according to the required strength of the deblocking filter.

此外,当对目标块执行垂直滤波和水平滤波时,可并行地进行水平滤波和垂直滤波。Also, when vertical filtering and horizontal filtering are performed on the target block, horizontal filtering and vertical filtering may be performed in parallel.

SAO可将适当的偏移与像素值相加以便对编码误差进行补偿。SAO可基于像素对被应用去块的图像执行校正,其中,该校正使用原始图像与被应用去块的图像之间的差的偏移。为了执行针对图像的偏移校正,可使用用于将图像中包括的像素划分为特定数量的区域、在划分出的区域之中确定将被应用偏移的区域并将偏移应用于所确定的区域的方法,并且也可使用用于考虑每个像素的边缘信息来应用偏移的方法。SAO can add the appropriate offset to the pixel value to compensate for encoding errors. SAO may perform a correction on the image to which deblocking is applied on a pixel-by-pixel basis, where the correction uses the offset of the difference between the original image and the image to which deblocking is applied. In order to perform offset correction for an image, a method for dividing pixels included in the image into a certain number of areas, determining an area to which offset is to be applied among the divided areas, and applying the offset to the determined area may be used. area method, and a method for applying offsets that takes into account edge information for each pixel may also be used.

ALF可基于通过将重建图像与原始图像进行比较而获得的值来执行滤波。在图像中包括的像素已被划分为预定数量的群组之后,可确定将被应用于每个群组的滤波器,并且可针对各个群组不同地执行滤波。对于亮度信号,可针对每个CU用信号发送与是否应用自适应环路滤波器相关的信息。将被应用于各个块的ALF的形状和滤波器系数可针对各个块而不同。可选地,不管块的特征如何,具有固定形式的ALF可被应用于所述块。The ALF may perform filtering based on values obtained by comparing the reconstructed image with the original image. After the pixels included in the image have been divided into a predetermined number of groups, a filter to be applied to each group may be determined, and filtering may be performed differently for each group. For luma signals, information on whether to apply an adaptive loop filter may be signaled for each CU. The shape and filter coefficients of the ALF to be applied to each block may be different for each block. Alternatively, ALF with a fixed form can be applied to the block regardless of the characteristics of the block.

通过滤波器单元180滤波的重建块或重建图像可被存储在参考画面缓冲器190中。通过滤波器单元180滤波的重建块可以是参考画面的一部分。换句话说,参考画面可以是由通过滤波器单元180滤波的重建块构成的重建画面。存储的参考画面随后可被用于帧间预测。The reconstructed blocks or reconstructed images filtered by the filter unit 180 may be stored in the reference picture buffer 190 . The reconstructed block filtered by the filter unit 180 may be part of the reference picture. In other words, the reference picture may be a reconstructed picture composed of reconstructed blocks filtered by the filter unit 180 . The stored reference pictures can then be used for inter prediction.

图2是示出被应用了本公开的解码设备的实施例的配置的框图。FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an embodiment of a decoding apparatus to which the present disclosure is applied.

解码设备200可以是解码器、视频解码设备或图像解码设备。The decoding device 200 may be a decoder, a video decoding device, or an image decoding device.

参照图2,解码设备200可包括熵解码单元210、反量化(逆量化)单元220、逆变换单元230、帧内预测单元240、帧间预测单元250、切换器245、加法器255、滤波器单元260和参考画面缓冲器270。2, the decoding apparatus 200 may include an entropy decoding unit 210, an inverse quantization (inverse quantization) unit 220, an inverse transform unit 230, an intra prediction unit 240, an inter prediction unit 250, a switch 245, an adder 255, a filter unit 260 and reference picture buffer 270.

解码设备200可接收从编码设备100输出的比特流。解码设备200可接收存储在计算机可读存储介质中的比特流,并且可接收通过有线/无线传输介质流传输的比特流。The decoding apparatus 200 may receive the bit stream output from the encoding apparatus 100 . The decoding apparatus 200 may receive a bitstream stored in a computer-readable storage medium, and may receive a bitstream streamed through a wired/wireless transmission medium.

解码设备200可在帧内模式和/或帧间模式下对比特流执行解码。此外,解码设备200可经由解码来生成重建图像或解码图像,并且可输出重建图像或解码图像。The decoding apparatus 200 may perform decoding on the bitstream in the intra mode and/or the inter mode. Also, the decoding apparatus 200 may generate a reconstructed image or a decoded image through decoding, and may output the reconstructed image or the decoded image.

例如,可通过切换器245来执行基于用于进行解码的预测模式而切换到帧内模式或帧间模式的操作。当用于解码的预测模式是帧内模式时,切换器245可被操作以切换到帧内模式。当用于解码的预测模式是帧间模式时,切换器245可被操作以切换到帧间模式。For example, the operation of switching to the intra mode or the inter mode based on the prediction mode used for decoding may be performed by the switch 245 . When the prediction mode for decoding is the intra mode, the switch 245 may be operated to switch to the intra mode. When the prediction mode for decoding is the inter mode, the switch 245 may be operated to switch to the inter mode.

解码设备200可通过对输入的比特流进行解码来获取重建的残差块,并且可生成预测块。当重建的残差块和预测块被获取时,解码设备200可通过将重建的残差块与预测块相加来生成作为被解码的目标的重建块。The decoding apparatus 200 may obtain a reconstructed residual block by decoding an input bitstream, and may generate a prediction block. When the reconstructed residual block and the prediction block are acquired, the decoding apparatus 200 may generate a reconstructed block that is a target of decoding by adding the reconstructed residual block and the prediction block.

熵解码单元210可通过基于比特流的概率分布对比特流执行熵解码来生成符号。生成的符号可包括量化的变换系数等级格式符号。这里,熵解码方法可与以上描述的熵编码方法相似。也就是说,熵解码方法可以是以上描述的熵编码方法的逆过程。The entropy decoding unit 210 may generate symbols by performing entropy decoding on the bitstream based on a probability distribution of the bitstream. The generated symbols may include quantized transform coefficient level format symbols. Here, the entropy decoding method may be similar to the entropy encoding method described above. That is, the entropy decoding method may be an inverse process of the entropy encoding method described above.

熵解码单元210可通过变换系数扫描方法将具有一维(1D)矢量形式的系数改变为2D块形状,以便对量化的变换系数等级进行解码。The entropy decoding unit 210 may change coefficients in the form of a one-dimensional (1D) vector into a 2D block shape through a transform coefficient scanning method in order to decode the quantized transform coefficient levels.

例如,可通过使用右上对角线扫描对块系数进行扫描来将块的系数改变为2D块形状。可选地,可根据对应块的尺寸和/或帧内预测模式来确定右上对角线扫描、垂直扫描和水平扫描中的哪一个将被使用。For example, the coefficients of the block can be changed to a 2D block shape by scanning the block coefficients using an upper right diagonal scan. Alternatively, which of the upper right diagonal scan, vertical scan and horizontal scan will be used may be determined according to the size of the corresponding block and/or the intra prediction mode.

量化的系数可由反量化单元220进行反量化。反量化单元220可通过对量化的系数执行反量化来生成反量化的系数。此外,反量化的系数可由逆变换单元230进行逆变换。逆变换单元230可通过对反量化的系数执行逆变换来生成重建的残差块。作为对量化的系数执行反量化和逆变换的结果,可生成重建的残差块。这里,当生成重建的残差块时,反量化单元220可将量化矩阵应用于量化的系数。The quantized coefficients may be inverse quantized by the inverse quantization unit 220 . The inverse quantization unit 220 may generate inverse quantized coefficients by performing inverse quantization on the quantized coefficients. In addition, the inversely quantized coefficients may be inversely transformed by the inverse transform unit 230 . The inverse transform unit 230 may generate a reconstructed residual block by performing an inverse transform on the inversely quantized coefficients. As a result of performing inverse quantization and inverse transform on the quantized coefficients, a reconstructed residual block may be generated. Here, when generating the reconstructed residual block, the inverse quantization unit 220 may apply a quantization matrix to the quantized coefficients.

当使用帧内模式时,帧内预测单元240可通过执行空间预测来生成预测块,其中,所述空间预测使用在目标块周围的先前被解码的邻近块的像素值。When using the intra mode, the intra prediction unit 240 may generate a prediction block by performing spatial prediction using pixel values of previously decoded neighboring blocks around the target block.

帧间预测单元250可包括运动补偿单元。可选地,帧间预测单元250可被指定为“运动补偿单元”。Inter prediction unit 250 may include a motion compensation unit. Alternatively, the inter prediction unit 250 may be designated as a "motion compensation unit".

当使用帧间模式时,运动补偿单元250可通过执行运动补偿来生成预测块,其中,所述运动补偿使用运动矢量和被存储在参考画面缓冲器270中的参考图像。When the inter mode is used, the motion compensation unit 250 may generate a prediction block by performing motion compensation using motion vectors and reference images stored in the reference picture buffer 270 .

运动补偿单元可在运动矢量具有除了整数之外的值时将插值滤波器应用于参考图像的部分区域,并且可使用被应用了插值滤波器的参考图像来生成预测块。为了执行运动补偿,运动补偿单元可基于CU确定跳过模式、合并模式、高级运动矢量预测(AMVP)模式和当前画面参考模式中的哪一种模式对应于用于CU中包括的PU的运动补偿方法,并且可根据所确定的模式来执行运动补偿。The motion compensation unit may apply an interpolation filter to a partial region of the reference image when the motion vector has a value other than an integer, and may generate a prediction block using the reference image to which the interpolation filter is applied. To perform motion compensation, the motion compensation unit may determine, on a CU basis, which of skip mode, merge mode, advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, and current picture reference mode corresponds to motion compensation for PUs included in the CU method, and motion compensation may be performed according to the determined mode.

重建的残差块和预测块可由加法器255彼此相加。加法器255可通过将重建的残差块和预测块相加来生成重建块。The reconstructed residual block and the prediction block may be added to each other by the adder 255 . The adder 255 may generate a reconstructed block by adding the reconstructed residual block and the prediction block.

重建块可通过滤波器单元260进行滤波。滤波器单元260可将去块滤波器、SAO滤波器和ALF中的至少一个应用于重建块或重建图像。重建图像可以是包括重建块的画面。The reconstructed block may be filtered by filter unit 260 . The filter unit 260 may apply at least one of a deblocking filter, a SAO filter, and an ALF to the reconstructed block or the reconstructed image. The reconstructed image may be a picture including reconstructed blocks.

经过滤波的重建图像可被编码设备100输出,并且可被编码设备使用。The filtered reconstructed image may be output by the encoding device 100 and used by the encoding device.

通过滤波器单元260滤波的重建图像可作为参考画面被存储在参考画面缓冲器270中。通过滤波器单元260滤波的重建块可以是参考画面的一部分。换句话说,参考画面可以是由通过滤波器单元260滤波的重建块构成的图像。存储的参考画面随后可被用于帧间预测。The reconstructed image filtered by the filter unit 260 may be stored in the reference picture buffer 270 as a reference picture. The reconstructed block filtered by the filter unit 260 may be part of the reference picture. In other words, the reference picture may be an image composed of reconstructed blocks filtered by the filter unit 260 . The stored reference pictures can then be used for inter prediction.

图3是示意性地示出当图像被编码和解码时图像的分区结构的示图。FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a partition structure of an image when the image is encoded and decoded.

图3可示意性地示出单个单元被分区为多个子单元的示例。FIG. 3 may schematically illustrate an example in which a single unit is partitioned into a plurality of subunits.

为了有效地对图像进行分区,可在编码和解码中使用编码单元(CU)。术语“单元”可被用于共同地指定1)包括图像样点的块和2)语法元素。例如,“单元的分区”可表示“与单元对应的块的分区”。To efficiently partition an image, coding units (CUs) may be used in encoding and decoding. The term "unit" may be used to collectively designate 1) a block comprising image samples and 2) a syntax element. For example, "partition of a unit" may mean "partition of a block corresponding to a unit".

CU可被用作用于图像编码/解码的基本单元。CU可被用作在图像编码/解码中从帧内模式和帧间模式选择的一个模式被应用到的单元。换句话说,在图像编码/解码中,可确定帧内模式和帧间模式中的哪一个模式将被应用于每个CU。A CU may be used as a basic unit for image encoding/decoding. The CU may be used as a unit to which one mode selected from the intra mode and the inter mode is applied in image encoding/decoding. In other words, in image encoding/decoding, it may be determined which of the intra mode and the inter mode is to be applied to each CU.

此外,CU可以是对变换系数进行预测、变换、量化、逆变换、反量化和编码/解码的基本单元。Also, a CU may be a basic unit for predicting, transforming, quantizing, inverse transforming, inverse quantizing, and encoding/decoding transform coefficients.

参照图3,图像300可被顺序地分区为与最大编码单元(LCU)对应的单元,并且分区结构可针对每个LCU被确定。这里,LCU可被用于具有与编码树单元(CTU)相同的含义。3, a picture 300 may be sequentially partitioned into units corresponding to a largest coding unit (LCU), and a partition structure may be determined for each LCU. Here, LCU may be used to have the same meaning as Coding Tree Unit (CTU).

对单元进行分区可表示对与单元对应的块进行分区。块分区信息可包括关于单元的深度的深度信息。深度信息可指示单元被分区的次数和/或单元被分区的程度。单个单元可被分层分区为子单元,同时所述单个单元具有基于树结构的深度信息。每个被分区出的子单元可具有深度信息。深度信息可以是指示CU的尺寸的信息。可针对每个CU存储深度信息。Partitioning a cell may mean partitioning a block corresponding to the cell. The block partition information may include depth information about the depth of the unit. The depth information may indicate the number of times the cell is partitioned and/or the extent to which the cell is partitioned. A single unit can be hierarchically partitioned into subunits, while the single unit has depth information based on a tree structure. Each partitioned subunit may have depth information. The depth information may be information indicating the size of the CU. Depth information may be stored for each CU.

每个CU可具有深度信息。当CU被分区时,从分区生成的CU的深度可从被分区的CU的深度增加1。Each CU may have depth information. When a CU is partitioned, the depth of the CU generated from the partition may be increased by 1 from the depth of the partitioned CU.

分区结构可表示LCU 310中的用于对图像进行有效编码的编码单元(CU)的分布。可根据单个CU是否将被分区为多个CU来确定这种分布。通过进行分区而生成的CU的数量可以是正整数2或更大,包括2、3、4、8、16等。根据通过进行分区而生成的CU的数量,通过进行分区而生成的每个CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸可小于被分区之前的CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸。The partition structure may represent the distribution of coding units (CUs) in the LCU 310 that are used to efficiently encode pictures. This distribution may be determined depending on whether a single CU is to be partitioned into multiple CUs. The number of CUs generated by partitioning may be a positive integer of 2 or more, including 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, and so on. According to the number of CUs generated by partitioning, the horizontal size and vertical size of each CU generated by partitioning may be smaller than those of the CU before being partitioned.

每个分区出的CU可按照相同的方式被递归地分区为四个CU。与被分区之前的CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸中的至少一个相比,经由递归分区,每个被分区出的CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸中的至少一个可被减小。Each partitioned CU may be recursively partitioned into four CUs in the same manner. Via recursive partitioning, at least one of the horizontal size and the vertical size of each partitioned CU may be reduced compared to at least one of the horizontal size and the vertical size of the CU before being partitioned.

CU的分区可被递归地执行直到预定义的深度或预定义的尺寸为止。例如,CU的深度可具有从0至3的范围的值。根据CU的深度,CU的尺寸的范围可从尺寸64×64至尺寸8×8。Partitioning of a CU may be performed recursively up to a predefined depth or a predefined size. For example, the depth of a CU may have a value ranging from 0 to 3. Depending on the depth of the CU, the size of the CU may range from size 64x64 to size 8x8.

例如,LCU的深度可以是0,最小编码单元(SCU)的深度可以是预定义的最大深度。这里,如上所述,LCU可以是具有最大编码单元尺寸的CU,并且SCU可以是具有最小编码单元尺寸的CU。For example, the depth of the LCU may be 0, and the depth of the smallest coding unit (SCU) may be a predefined maximum depth. Here, as described above, the LCU may be the CU having the largest coding unit size, and the SCU may be the CU having the smallest coding unit size.

可在LCU 310处开始进行分区,并且每当CU的水平尺寸和/或垂直尺寸通过进行分区而减小时,CU的深度可增加1。Partitioning may begin at LCU 310, and the depth of the CU may increase by one whenever the horizontal size and/or vertical size of the CU is reduced by partitioning.

例如,对于各个深度,未被分区的CU可具有2N×2N的尺寸。此外,在CU被分区的情况下,尺寸为2N×2N的CU可被分区为尺寸均为N×N的四个CU。每当深度增加1时,N的值可减半。For example, an unpartitioned CU may have a size of 2Nx2N for each depth. Also, in the case where a CU is partitioned, a CU of size 2N×2N may be partitioned into four CUs each of size N×N. The value of N can be halved each time the depth increases by 1.

参照图3,深度为0的LCU可具有64×64个像素或64×64的块。0可以是最小深度。深度为3的SCU可具有8×8个像素或8×8的块。3可以是最大深度。这里,作为LCU的具有64×64的块的CU可用深度0来表示。具有32×32的块的CU可用深度1来表示。具有16×16的块的CU可用深度2来表示。作为SCU的具有8×8的块的CU可用深度3来表示。Referring to FIG. 3 , an LCU with a depth of 0 may have 64×64 pixels or a block of 64×64. 0 can be the minimum depth. A depth-3 SCU may have 8x8 pixels or 8x8 blocks. 3 can be the maximum depth. Here, a CU having a block of 64×64, which is an LCU, may be represented by depth 0. A CU with a block of 32x32 may be represented with a depth of 1. A CU with 16x16 blocks may be represented with a depth of 2. A CU having a block of 8×8 that is an SCU may be represented by a depth of 3.

关于对应CU是否被分区的信息可以用CU的分区信息来表示。分区信息可以是1比特信息。除了SCU之外的所有CU可包括分区信息。例如,未被分区的CU的分区信息的值可以是0。被分区的CU的分区信息的值可以是1。The information on whether the corresponding CU is partitioned may be represented by the partition information of the CU. The partition information may be 1-bit information. All CUs except SCUs may include partition information. For example, the value of partition information of a CU that is not partitioned may be 0. The value of the partition information of the partitioned CU may be 1.

例如,当单个CU被分区为四个CU时,通过进行分区而生成的四个CU中的每个CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸可以是在被分区之前的CU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸的一半。当具有32×32的尺寸的CU被分区为四个CU时,被分区出的四个CU中的每个CU的尺寸可以是16×16。当单个CU被分区为四个CU时,可认为CU已经以四叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single CU is partitioned into four CUs, the horizontal and vertical sizes of each of the four CUs generated by partitioning may be half of those of the CU before being partitioned. When a CU having a size of 32×32 is partitioned into four CUs, the size of each of the four partitioned CUs may be 16×16. When a single CU is partitioned into four CUs, the CUs may be considered to have been partitioned in a quad-tree structure.

例如,当单个CU被分区成两个CU时,通过进行分区而生成的两个CU中的每个CU的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸可以是在被分区之前的CU的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸的一半。当尺寸为32×32的CU被垂直分区为两个CU时,被分区出的两个CU中的每个CU的尺寸可以是16×32。当尺寸为32×32的CU被水平分区为两个CU时,被分区出的两个CU中的每个CU的尺寸可以是32×16。当单个CU被分区为两个CU时,可认为CU已经以二叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single CU is partitioned into two CUs, the horizontal or vertical size of each of the two CUs generated by partitioning may be half the horizontal or vertical size of the CU before being partitioned. When a CU having a size of 32×32 is vertically partitioned into two CUs, the size of each of the two partitioned CUs may be 16×32. When a CU having a size of 32×32 is horizontally partitioned into two CUs, the size of each of the partitioned two CUs may be 32×16. When a single CU is partitioned into two CUs, the CUs may be considered to have been partitioned in a binary tree structure.

四叉树划分和二叉树划分两者被应用于图3的LCU310。Both quad-tree partitioning and binary-tree partitioning are applied to the LCU 310 of FIG. 3 .

在编码设备100中,可通过递归四叉树结构将尺寸为64×64的编码树单元(CTU)分区为多个更小的CU。单个CU可被分区为具有相同尺寸的四个CU。每个CU可被递归地分区并且可具有四叉树结构。In the encoding apparatus 100, a coding tree unit (CTU) having a size of 64×64 may be partitioned into a plurality of smaller CUs through a recursive quad-tree structure. A single CU may be partitioned into four CUs with the same size. Each CU may be recursively partitioned and may have a quadtree structure.

通过CU的递归分区,可选择引起最小率失真代价的最优分区方法。Through recursive partitioning of the CU, the optimal partitioning method that incurs the least rate-distortion cost can be selected.

图4是示出编码单元(CU)能够包括的预测单元(PU)的形式的示图。FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a form of a prediction unit (PU) that a coding unit (CU) can include.

在从LCU分区出的CU中,可将不再被分区的CU划分为一个或更多个预测单元(PU)。这种划分也被称为“分区”。Among the CUs partitioned from the LCU, the CUs that are no longer partitioned may be divided into one or more prediction units (PUs). This division is also called "partitioning".

PU可以是用于预测的基本单元。PU可在跳过模式、帧间模式和帧内模式中的任意一个模式下被编码和解码。可根据各个模式将PU分区为各种形状。例如,以上参照图1描述的目标块和以上参照图2描述的目标块可以均是PU。A PU may be a basic unit for prediction. The PU may be encoded and decoded in any one of skip mode, inter mode, and intra mode. The PU can be partitioned into various shapes according to each mode. For example, the target block described above with reference to FIG. 1 and the target block described above with reference to FIG. 2 may both be PUs.

CU可不被划分为PU。当CU不被划分为PU时,CU的尺寸和PU的尺寸可彼此相等。A CU may not be divided into PUs. When the CU is not divided into PUs, the size of the CU and the size of the PU may be equal to each other.

在跳过模式下,在CU中可不存在分区。在跳过模式下,可支持2N×2N模式410,而不进行分区,其中,在2N×2N模式410中,PU的尺寸和CU的尺寸彼此相同。In skip mode, there may be no partitions in the CU. In skip mode, the 2Nx2N mode 410, in which the size of the PU and the size of the CU are the same as each other, may be supported without partitioning.

在帧间模式下,在CU中可存在8种类型的分区形状。例如,在帧间模式下,可支持2N×2N模式410、2N×N模式415、N×2N模式420、N×N模式425、2N×nU模式430、2N×nD模式435、nL×2N模式440和nR×2N模式445。In inter mode, there can be 8 types of partition shapes in a CU. For example, in inter mode, 2N×2N mode 410, 2N×N mode 415, N×2N mode 420, N×N mode 425, 2N×nU mode 430, 2N×nD mode 435, nL×2N mode can be supported 440 and nR×2N mode 445.

在帧内模式下,可支持2N×2N模式410和N×N模式425。In intra mode, 2Nx2N mode 410 and NxN mode 425 may be supported.

在2N×2N模式410下,可对尺寸为2N×2N的PU进行编码。尺寸为2N×2N的PU可表示尺寸与CU的尺寸相同的PU。例如,尺寸为2N×2N的PU可具有尺寸64×64、32×32、16×16或8×8。In 2Nx2N mode 410, a PU of size 2Nx2N may be encoded. A PU of size 2N×2N may represent a PU of the same size as that of a CU. For example, a PU of size 2Nx2N may have size 64x64, 32x32, 16x16, or 8x8.

在N×N模式425下,可对尺寸为N×N的PU进行编码。In NxN mode 425, a PU of size NxN may be encoded.

例如,在帧内预测中,当PU的尺寸是8×8时,可对四个分区出的PU进行编码。每个分区出的PU的尺寸可以是4×4。For example, in intra prediction, when the size of the PU is 8×8, four partitioned PUs may be encoded. The size of each partitioned PU may be 4×4.

当在帧内模式下对PU进行编码时,可使用多个帧内预测模式中的任意一个对PU进行编码。例如,HEVC技术可提供35个帧内预测模式,PU可在所述35个帧内预测模式中的任意一个下被编码。When the PU is encoded in intra mode, the PU may be encoded using any one of multiple intra prediction modes. For example, HEVC techniques may provide 35 intra-prediction modes under which a PU may be encoded.

可基于率失真代价来确定2N×2N模式410和N×N模式425中的哪一个模式将被用于对PU进行编码。Which of the 2Nx2N mode 410 and the NxN mode 425 will be used to encode the PU may be determined based on a rate-distortion cost.

编码设备100可对尺寸为2N×2N的PU执行编码操作。这里,编码操作可以是在能够被编码设备100使用的多个帧内预测模式中的每个模式下对PU进行编码的操作。通过编码操作,可推导出用于尺寸为2N×2N的PU的最佳帧内预测模式。该最佳帧内预测模式可以是能够被编码设备100使用的多个帧内预测模式之中的在对尺寸为2N×2N的PU进行编码时出现最小率失真代价的帧内预测模式。The encoding apparatus 100 may perform an encoding operation on a PU having a size of 2N×2N. Here, the encoding operation may be an operation of encoding the PU in each of a plurality of intra prediction modes that can be used by the encoding apparatus 100 . Through encoding operations, the optimal intra prediction mode for a PU of size 2Nx2N can be derived. The optimal intra prediction mode may be an intra prediction mode in which the smallest rate-distortion cost occurs when encoding a PU of size 2N×2N among a plurality of intra prediction modes that can be used by the encoding apparatus 100 .

此外,编码设备100可顺序地对通过进行N×N分区而获得的各个PU执行编码操作。这里,编码操作可以是在能够被编码设备100使用的多个帧内预测模式中的每个模式下对PU进行编码的操作。通过编码操作,可推导出用于尺寸为N×N的PU的最佳帧内预测模式。该最佳帧内预测模式可以是能够被编码设备100使用的多个帧内预测模式之中的在对尺寸为N×N的PU进行编码时出现最小率失真代价的帧内预测模式。Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may sequentially perform encoding operations on respective PUs obtained by performing N×N partitioning. Here, the encoding operation may be an operation of encoding the PU in each of a plurality of intra prediction modes that can be used by the encoding apparatus 100 . Through encoding operations, the optimal intra prediction mode for a PU of size NxN can be derived. The optimal intra prediction mode may be an intra prediction mode in which the smallest rate-distortion cost occurs when encoding a PU of size N×N among a plurality of intra prediction modes that can be used by the encoding apparatus 100 .

编码设备100可基于尺寸为2N×2N的PU的率失真代价与尺寸为N×N的PU的率失真代价之间的比较来确定尺寸为2N×2N的PU和尺寸为N×N的PU中的哪一个将被编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may determine, based on a comparison between a rate-distortion cost of a PU of size 2N×2N and a rate-distortion cost of a PU of size N×N, among a PU of size 2N×2N and a PU of size N×N which will be encoded.

单个CU可被分区为一个或更多个PU,并且PU可被分区多个PU。A single CU may be partitioned into one or more PUs, and a PU may be partitioned into multiple PUs.

例如,当单个PU被分区为四个PU时,通过分区而生成的四个PU中的每一个的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸可以是被分区之前的PU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸的一半。当尺寸为32×32的PU被分区为四个PU时,四个被分区出的PU中的每一个的尺寸可以是16×16。当单个PU被分区为四个PU时,可认为PU已经以四叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single PU is partitioned into four PUs, the horizontal and vertical sizes of each of the four PUs generated by partitioning may be half of those of the PU before being partitioned. When a PU of size 32x32 is partitioned into four PUs, the size of each of the four partitioned PUs may be 16x16. When a single PU is partitioned into four PUs, the PUs can be considered to have been partitioned in a quad-tree structure.

例如,当单个PU被分区为两个PU时,通过分区而生成的两个PU中的每一个的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸可以是被分区之前的PU的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸的一半。当尺寸为32×32的PU被垂直分区为两个PU时,两个被分区出的PU中的每一个的尺寸可以是16×32。当尺寸为32×32的PU被水平分区为两个PU时,两个被分区出的PU中的每一个的尺寸可以是32×16。当单个PU被分区为两个PU时,可认为PU已经以二叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single PU is partitioned into two PUs, the horizontal or vertical size of each of the two PUs generated by partitioning may be half the horizontal or vertical size of the PU before being partitioned. When a PU of size 32x32 is vertically partitioned into two PUs, the size of each of the two partitioned PUs may be 16x32. When a PU of size 32x32 is horizontally partitioned into two PUs, the size of each of the two partitioned PUs may be 32x16. When a single PU is partitioned into two PUs, the PUs can be considered to have been partitioned in a binary tree structure.

图5是示出能够被包括在CU中的变换单元(TU)的形式的示图。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a form of a transform unit (TU) that can be included in a CU.

变换单元(TU)可以是CU中被用于诸如变换、量化、逆变换、反量化、熵编码和熵解码的过程的基本单元。A transform unit (TU) may be a basic unit in a CU that is used for processes such as transform, quantization, inverse transform, inverse quantization, entropy encoding, and entropy decoding.

TU可具有正方形形状或矩形形状。可基于CU的尺寸和/或形状来确定TU的形状。A TU may have a square shape or a rectangular shape. The shape of the TU may be determined based on the size and/or shape of the CU.

在从LCU分区出的CU中,可将不再被分区为CU的CU分区为一个或更多个TU。这里,TU的分区结构可以是四叉树结构。例如,如图5中所示,可根据四叉树结构将单个CU 510分区一次或更多次。通过这种分区,单个CU 510可由具有各种尺寸的TU组成。In a CU partitioned from an LCU, a CU that is no longer partitioned as a CU may be partitioned into one or more TUs. Here, the partition structure of the TU may be a quadtree structure. For example, as shown in FIG. 5, a single CU 510 may be partitioned one or more times according to a quadtree structure. Through such partitioning, a single CU 510 may be composed of TUs of various sizes.

可认为当单个CU被划分两次或更多次时CU被递归地划分。通过划分,单个CU可由具有各种尺寸的变换单元(TU)组成。It can be considered that a CU is recursively divided when a single CU is divided two or more times. Through partitioning, a single CU may be composed of transform units (TUs) with various sizes.

可选地,可基于划分CU的垂直线和/或水平线的数量将单个CU划分为一个或更多个TU。Optionally, a single CU may be divided into one or more TUs based on the number of vertical and/or horizontal lines dividing the CU.

CU可被划分为对称TU或非对称TU。为了划分为非对称TU,可将关于每个TU的尺寸和/或形状的信息从编码设备100用信号发送到解码设备200。可选地,可从关于CU的尺寸和/或形状的信息推导每个TU的尺寸和/或形状。CUs can be divided into symmetric TUs or asymmetric TUs. In order to divide into asymmetric TUs, information about the size and/or shape of each TU may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . Optionally, the size and/or shape of each TU may be derived from information about the size and/or shape of the CU.

CU可不被划分为TU。当CU不被划分为TU时,CU的尺寸和TU的尺寸可彼此相等。A CU may not be divided into TUs. When the CU is not divided into TUs, the size of the CU and the size of the TU may be equal to each other.

单个CU可被分区为一个或更多个TU,并且TU可被分区为多个TU。A single CU may be partitioned into one or more TUs, and a TU may be partitioned into multiple TUs.

例如,当单个TU被分区为四个TU时,通过分区而生成的四个TU中的每一个的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸可以是被分区之前的TU的水平尺寸和垂直尺寸的一半。当尺寸为32×32的TU被分区为四个TU时,四个被分区出的TU中的每一个的尺寸可以是16×16。当单个TU被分区为四个TU时,可认为TU已经以四叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single TU is partitioned into four TUs, the horizontal and vertical sizes of each of the four TUs generated by partitioning may be half of those of the TU before being partitioned. When a TU of size 32x32 is partitioned into four TUs, the size of each of the four partitioned TUs may be 16x16. When a single TU is partitioned into four TUs, the TUs can be considered to have been partitioned in a quad-tree structure.

例如,当单个TU被分区为两个TU时,通过分区而生成的两个TU中的每一个的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸可以是被分区之前的TU的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸的一半。当尺寸为32×32的TU被垂直分区为两个TU时,两个被分区出的TU中的每一个的尺寸可以是16×32。当尺寸为32×32的TU被水平分区为两个TU时,两个被分区出的TU中的每一个的尺寸可以是32×16。当单个TU被分区为两个TU时,可认为TU已经以二叉树结构被分区。For example, when a single TU is partitioned into two TUs, the horizontal or vertical size of each of the two TUs generated by partitioning may be half the horizontal or vertical size of the TU before being partitioned. When a TU of size 32x32 is vertically partitioned into two TUs, the size of each of the two partitioned TUs may be 16x32. When a TU of size 32x32 is horizontally partitioned into two TUs, the size of each of the two partitioned TUs may be 32x16. When a single TU is partitioned into two TUs, the TUs can be considered to have been partitioned in a binary tree structure.

图6示出根据示例的块的划分。FIG. 6 shows the division of blocks according to an example.

在视频编码和/或解码处理中,如图6中所示,目标块可被划分。In the video encoding and/or decoding process, as shown in FIG. 6, target blocks may be divided.

对于目标块的划分,指示划分信息的指示符可从编码设备100被用信号发送到解码设备200。划分信息可以是指示目标块如何被划分的信息。For the division of the target block, an indicator indicating division information may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . The division information may be information indicating how the target block is divided.

划分信息可以是划分标志(以下称为“split_flag”)、四-二进制标志(以下称为“QB_flag”)、四叉树标志(以下称为“quadtree_flag”)、二叉树标志(以下称为“binarytree_flag”)和二进制类型标志(以下称为“Btype_flag”)中的一个或更多个。The division information may be a division flag (hereinafter referred to as "split_flag"), a quad-binary flag (hereinafter referred to as "QB_flag"), a quadtree flag (hereinafter referred to as "quadtree_flag"), a binary tree flag (hereinafter referred to as "binarytree_flag") ) and one or more of a binary type flag (hereinafter referred to as "Btype_flag").

“split_flag”可以是指示块是否被划分的标志。例如,split_flag值为1可指示对应块被划分。split_flag值为0可指示对应块不被划分。'split_flag' may be a flag indicating whether the block is divided. For example, a split_flag value of 1 may indicate that the corresponding block is split. A split_flag value of 0 may indicate that the corresponding block is not split.

“QB_flag”可以是指示四叉树形式和二叉树形式中的哪一个与块被划分的形状对应的标志。例如,QB_flag值为0可指示块以四叉树形式被划分。QB_flag值为1可指示块以二叉树形式被划分。可选地,QB_flag值为0可指示块以二叉树形式被划分。QB_flag值为1可指示块以四叉树形式被划分。"QB_flag" may be a flag indicating which of the quad-tree form and the binary-tree form corresponds to the shape in which the block is divided. For example, a QB_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is partitioned in a quadtree. A QB_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is partitioned in a binary tree. Optionally, a QB_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is divided in a binary tree. A QB_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is partitioned in a quadtree.

“quadtree_flag”可以是指示块是否以四叉树形式被划分的标志。例如,quadtree_flag值为1可指示块以四叉树形式被划分。quadtree_flag值为0可指示块不以四叉树形式被划分。'quadtree_flag' may be a flag indicating whether a block is divided in a quadtree form. For example, a quadtree_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is divided in a quadtree. A quadtree_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is not partitioned in a quadtree.

“binarytree_flag”可以是指示块是否以二叉树形式被划分的标志。例如,binarytree_flag值为1可指示块以二叉树形式被划分。binarytree_flag值为0可指示块不以二叉树形式被划分。"binarytree_flag" may be a flag indicating whether the block is divided in a binary tree form. For example, a binarytree_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is divided in a binary tree. A binarytree_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is not divided in a binary tree.

“Btype_flag”可以是指示当块以二叉树形式被划分时垂直划分和水平划分中的哪一个与划分方向对应的标志。例如,Btype_flag值为0可指示块在水平方向上被划分。Btype_flag值为1可指示块在垂直方向上被划分。可选地,Btype_flag值为0可指示块在垂直方向上被划分。Btype_flag值为1可指示块在水平方向上被划分。'Btype_flag' may be a flag indicating which of vertical division and horizontal division corresponds to the division direction when the block is divided in a binary tree form. For example, a Btype_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is divided in the horizontal direction. A Btype_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is divided in the vertical direction. Alternatively, a Btype_flag value of 0 may indicate that the block is divided in the vertical direction. A Btype_flag value of 1 may indicate that the block is divided in the horizontal direction.

例如,可通过用信号发送quadtree_flag、binarytree_flag和Btype_flag中的至少一个来推导图6中的块的划分信息,如下表1中所示。For example, partition information for the block in FIG. 6 may be derived by signaling at least one of quadtree_flag, binarytree_flag, and Btype_flag, as shown in Table 1 below.

表1Table 1

Figure BDA0002589119230000291
Figure BDA0002589119230000291

例如,可通过用信号发送split_flag、QB_flag和Btype_flag中的至少一个来推导图6中的块的划分信息,如下表2中所示。For example, the split information for the block in FIG. 6 may be derived by signaling at least one of split_flag, QB_flag, and Btype_flag, as shown in Table 2 below.

表2Table 2

Figure BDA0002589119230000301
Figure BDA0002589119230000301

划分方法可根据块的尺寸和/或形状而仅限于四叉树或二叉树。当这个限制被应用时,split_flag可以是指示块是否以四叉树形式被划分的标志或者指示块是否以二叉树形式被划分的标志。可根据块的深度信息来推导块的尺寸和形状,并且深度信息可从编码设备100被用信号发送到解码设备200。The partitioning method may be limited to quadtree or binary tree depending on the size and/or shape of the block. When this restriction is applied, split_flag may be a flag indicating whether the block is divided in the form of a quad-tree or a flag indicating whether the block is divided in the form of a binary tree. The size and shape of the block may be derived from the depth information of the block, and the depth information may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 .

当块的尺寸落在特定范围内时,仅以四叉树形式进行划分是可能的。例如,可由可仅以四叉树形式进行划分的最大块尺寸和最小块尺寸中的至少一个来定义所述特定范围。Partitioning in the form of a quadtree is only possible when the size of the block falls within a certain range. For example, the specific range may be defined by at least one of a maximum block size and a minimum block size that can be divided only in the form of a quadtree.

可通过比特流将指示可仅以四叉树形式进行划分的最大块尺寸和最小块尺寸的信息从编码设备100用信号发送到解码设备200。此外,可针对诸如视频、序列、画面和条带(或片段)的单元中的至少一个用信号发送这个信息。Information indicating the maximum block size and the minimum block size that can be divided only in the form of a quadtree may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream. Furthermore, this information may be signaled for at least one of units such as videos, sequences, pictures, and slices (or segments).

可选地,最大块尺寸和/或最小块尺寸可以是由编码设备100和解码设备200预先定义的固定尺寸。例如,当块的尺寸大于64×64且小于256×256时,仅以四叉树形式进行划分是可能的。在这种情况下,split_flag可以是指示是否执行以四叉树形式的划分的标志。Alternatively, the maximum block size and/or the minimum block size may be fixed sizes predefined by the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 . For example, when the size of the block is larger than 64x64 and smaller than 256x256, only division in the form of a quadtree is possible. In this case, split_flag may be a flag indicating whether to perform division in a quadtree form.

当块的尺寸落入特定范围内时,仅以二叉树形式进行划分是可能的。例如,可由可仅以二叉树形式进行划分的最大块尺寸和最小块尺寸中的至少一个来定义所述特定范围。Partitioning in binary tree form is only possible when the size of the block falls within a certain range. For example, the specific range may be defined by at least one of a maximum block size and a minimum block size that can be divided only in a binary tree.

可通过比特流将指示可仅以二叉树形式进行划分的最大块尺寸和/或最小块尺寸的信息从编码设备100用信号发送到解码设备200。此外,可针对诸如序列、画面和条带(或片段)的单元中的至少一个用信号发送这个信息。Information indicating the maximum block size and/or the minimum block size that can be divided only in a binary tree form may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream. Furthermore, this information may be signaled for at least one of units such as sequences, pictures, and slices (or slices).

可选地,最大块尺寸和/或最小块尺寸可以是由编码设备100和解码设备200预先定义的固定尺寸。例如,当块的尺寸大于8×8且小于16×16时,仅以二叉树形式进行划分是可能的。在这种情况下,split_flag可以是指示是否执行以二叉树形式的划分的标志。Alternatively, the maximum block size and/or the minimum block size may be fixed sizes predefined by the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 . For example, when the size of the block is larger than 8×8 and smaller than 16×16, only division in the form of a binary tree is possible. In this case, split_flag may be a flag indicating whether to perform division in the form of a binary tree.

块的划分可受到先前划分的限制。例如,当块以二叉树形式被划分并生成多个分区块时,可仅以二叉树形式另外划分每个分区块。The division of blocks may be restricted by previous divisions. For example, when a block is divided in the form of a binary tree and a plurality of partitioned blocks are generated, each of the partitioned blocks may be additionally divided only in the form of a binary tree.

当分区块的水平尺寸或垂直尺寸是不能被进一步划分的尺寸时,可不用信号发送上述指示符。When the horizontal size or vertical size of the partition block is a size that cannot be further divided, the above-mentioned indicator may not be signaled.

图7是用于解释帧内预测处理的实施例的示图。FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of intra prediction processing.

从图7中的图的中心径向延伸的箭头表示帧内预测模式的预测方向。此外,出现在箭头附近的数字可表示被分配给帧内预测模式或被分配给帧内预测模式的预测方向的模式值的示例。Arrows extending radially from the center of the graph in FIG. 7 indicate the prediction directions of the intra prediction modes. Also, numbers appearing near the arrows may represent examples of mode values assigned to the intra prediction mode or assigned to the prediction direction of the intra prediction mode.

可使用与目标块邻近的块的参考样点来执行帧内编码和/或解码。邻近块可以是邻近的重建块。例如,可使用在每个邻近的重建块中包括的参考样点的值或者邻近的重建块的编码参数来执行帧内编码和/或解码。Intra-coding and/or decoding may be performed using reference samples of blocks adjacent to the target block. Neighboring blocks may be neighboring reconstructed blocks. For example, intra-frame encoding and/or decoding may be performed using values of reference samples included in each adjacent reconstructed block or encoding parameters of adjacent reconstructed blocks.

编码设备100和/或解码设备200可通过基于关于目标图像中的样点的信息对目标块执行帧内预测来生成预测块。当帧内预测被执行时,编码设备100和/或解码设备200可通过基于关于目标图像中的样点的信息执行帧内预测来生成针对目标块的预测块。当帧内预测被执行时,编码设备100和/或解码设备200可基于至少一个重建的参考样点来执行方向预测和/或非方向预测。The encoding apparatus 100 and/or the decoding apparatus 200 may generate the prediction block by performing intra prediction on the target block based on the information on the samples in the target image. When intra prediction is performed, the encoding apparatus 100 and/or the decoding apparatus 200 may generate a prediction block for the target block by performing intra prediction based on information about samples in the target image. When intra prediction is performed, the encoding apparatus 100 and/or the decoding apparatus 200 may perform directional prediction and/or non-directional prediction based on at least one reconstructed reference sample.

预测块可以是作为执行帧内预测的结果而生成的块。预测块可对应于CU、PU和TU中的至少一个。The prediction block may be a block generated as a result of performing intra prediction. A prediction block may correspond to at least one of a CU, PU, and TU.

预测块的单元可具有与CU、PU和TU中的至少一个对应的尺寸。预测块可具有尺寸为2N×2N或N×N的正方形形状。尺寸N×N可包括尺寸4×4、8×8、16×16、32×32、64×64等。A unit of a prediction block may have a size corresponding to at least one of a CU, PU, and TU. The prediction block may have a square shape of size 2Nx2N or NxN. Dimensions NxN may include dimensions 4x4, 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, 64x64, and the like.

可选地,预测块可以是尺寸为2×2、4×4、8×8、16×16、32×32、64×64等的正方形块或者尺寸为2×8、4×8、2×16、4×16、8×16等的矩形块。Alternatively, the prediction block may be a square block of size 2x2, 4x4, 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, 64x64, etc. or a size of 2x8, 4x8, 2x Rectangular blocks of 16, 4x16, 8x16, etc.

可考虑用于目标块的帧内预测模式执行帧内预测。目标块可具有的帧内预测模式的数量可以是预定义的固定值,并且可以是根据预测块的属性不同地确定的值。例如,预测块的属性可包括预测块的尺寸、预测块的类型等。Intra prediction may be performed considering the intra prediction mode for the target block. The number of intra prediction modes that the target block may have may be a predefined fixed value, and may be a value determined differently according to properties of the prediction block. For example, the properties of the prediction block may include the size of the prediction block, the type of the prediction block, and the like.

例如,不论预测块的尺寸如何,帧内预测模式的数量都可被固定为35。可选地,帧内预测模式的数量可以是例如3、5、9、17、34、35或36。For example, the number of intra prediction modes may be fixed to 35 regardless of the size of the prediction block. Alternatively, the number of intra prediction modes may be, for example, 3, 5, 9, 17, 34, 35 or 36.

帧内预测模式可以是非方向模式或方向模式。例如,如图7中所示,帧内预测模式可包括两种非方向模式和33种方向模式。The intra prediction mode may be a non-directional mode or a directional mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the intra prediction modes may include two non-directional modes and 33 directional modes.

所述两种非方向模式可包括DC模式和平面模式。The two non-directional modes may include DC mode and planar mode.

所述方向模式可以是具有特定方向或特定角度的模式。The directional pattern may be a pattern with a specific direction or a specific angle.

帧内预测模式中的每一个可用模式编号、模式值和模式角度中的至少一个来表示。帧内预测模式的数量可以是M。M的值可以是1或更大。换句话说,帧内预测模式的数量可以是M,其中,M包括非方向模式的数量和方向模式的数量。Each of the intra prediction modes may be represented by at least one of a mode number, a mode value, and a mode angle. The number of intra prediction modes may be M. The value of M can be 1 or greater. In other words, the number of intra prediction modes may be M, where M includes the number of non-directional modes and the number of directional modes.

帧内预测模式的数量可被固定为M,而不管块的尺寸如何。例如,帧内预测模式的数量可被固定为35和67中的任意一个,而不管块的尺寸如何。The number of intra prediction modes may be fixed to M regardless of the size of the block. For example, the number of intra prediction modes may be fixed to any one of 35 and 67 regardless of the size of the block.

可选地,帧内预测模式的数量可根据块的尺寸和/或颜色分量的类型而不同。Alternatively, the number of intra prediction modes may vary according to the size of the block and/or the type of color components.

例如,块的尺寸越大,帧内预测模式的数量越多。可选地,块的尺寸越大,帧内预测模式的数量越少。当块的尺寸是4×4或8×8时,帧内预测模式的数量可以是67。当块的尺寸是16×16时,帧内预测模式的数量可以是35。当块的尺寸是32×32时,帧内预测模式的数量可以是19。当块的尺寸是64×64时,帧内预测模式的数量可以是7。For example, the larger the size of the block, the larger the number of intra prediction modes. Optionally, the larger the size of the block, the smaller the number of intra prediction modes. When the size of the block is 4×4 or 8×8, the number of intra prediction modes may be 67. When the size of the block is 16×16, the number of intra prediction modes may be 35. When the size of the block is 32×32, the number of intra prediction modes may be 19. When the size of the block is 64×64, the number of intra prediction modes may be seven.

例如,帧内预测模式的数量可根据颜色分量是亮度信号还是色度信号而不同。可选地,与亮度分量块对应的帧内预测模式的数量可大于与色度分量块对应的帧内预测模式的数量。For example, the number of intra prediction modes may differ depending on whether the color component is a luminance signal or a chrominance signal. Alternatively, the number of intra prediction modes corresponding to luma component blocks may be greater than the number of intra prediction modes corresponding to chroma component blocks.

例如,在模式值为26的垂直模式中,可基于参考样点的像素值沿垂直方向执行预测。例如,在模式值为10的水平模式中,可基于参考样点的像素值沿水平方向执行预测。For example, in a vertical mode with a mode value of 26, prediction may be performed in the vertical direction based on pixel values of reference samples. For example, in a horizontal mode with a mode value of 10, prediction may be performed in the horizontal direction based on pixel values of reference samples.

即使在除了上述模式之外的方向模式中,编码设备100和解码设备200仍可使用依据与方向模式对应的角度的参考样点对目标单元执行帧内预测。Even in a direction mode other than the above-described modes, the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may perform intra prediction on the target unit using reference samples according to angles corresponding to the direction mode.

位于相对于垂直模式的右侧的帧内预测模式可被称为“垂直-右侧模式”。位于水平模式下方的帧内预测模式可被称为“水平-下方模式”。例如,在图7中,模式值是27、28、29、30、31、32、33和34之一的帧内预测模式可以是垂直-右侧模式613。模式值是2、3、4、5、6、7、8和9之一的帧内预测模式可以是水平-下方模式616。The intra prediction mode located on the right side with respect to the vertical mode may be referred to as "vertical-right mode". The intra prediction mode located below the horizontal mode may be referred to as a "horizontal-down mode". For example, in FIG. 7 , the intra prediction mode whose mode value is one of 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 may be the vertical-right mode 613. The intra prediction mode whose mode value is one of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 may be the horizontal-down mode 616 .

非方向模式可包括DC模式和平面模式。例如,DC模式的值可以是1。平面模式的值可以是0。Non-directional modes may include DC mode and planar mode. For example, the value of DC mode may be 1. The value of flat mode can be 0.

方向模式可包括角度模式。在多个帧内预测模式中,除了DC模式和平面模式之外的其余模式可以是方向模式。Orientation patterns may include angle patterns. Among the plurality of intra prediction modes, the remaining modes other than the DC mode and the planar mode may be directional modes.

当帧内预测模式是DC模式时,可基于多个参考像素的像素值的平均值生成预测块。例如,可基于多个参考像素的像素值的平均值确定预测块的像素的值。When the intra prediction mode is the DC mode, the prediction block may be generated based on an average value of pixel values of a plurality of reference pixels. For example, the value of the pixel of the prediction block may be determined based on an average value of pixel values of a plurality of reference pixels.

以上描述的帧内预测模式的数量以及各个帧内预测模式的模式值仅是示例性的。可根据实施例、实现和/或要求来不同地定义以上描述的帧内预测模式的数量以及各个帧内预测模式的模式值。The number of intra prediction modes and the mode value of each intra prediction mode described above are only exemplary. The number of intra-prediction modes described above and the mode value of each intra-prediction mode may be defined differently depending on the embodiment, implementation, and/or requirements.

为了对目标块执行帧内预测,可执行检查在重建的邻近块中包括的样点是否可被用作目标块的参考样点的步骤。当在邻近块中的样点之中存在不能被用作目标块的参考样点的样点时,经由使用在重建的邻近块中包括的样点之中的至少一个样点值的插值和/或复制而生成的值可替换不能被用作参考样点的样点的样点值。当经由复制和/或插值而生成的值替换现有样点的样点值时,该样点可被用作目标块的参考样点。In order to perform intra prediction on the target block, a step of checking whether samples included in the reconstructed adjacent blocks can be used as reference samples for the target block may be performed. When a sample that cannot be used as a reference sample of the target block exists among the samples in the neighboring block, via interpolation using at least one sample value among the samples included in the reconstructed neighboring block and/or Or copy the resulting value to replace the sample value of a sample that cannot be used as a reference sample. When a sample value of an existing sample is replaced by a value generated via copying and/or interpolation, that sample may be used as a reference sample for the target block.

在帧内预测中,可基于帧内预测模式和目标块的尺寸中的至少一个将滤波器应用于参考样点和预测样点中的至少一个。In intra prediction, a filter may be applied to at least one of reference samples and prediction samples based on at least one of an intra prediction mode and a size of a target block.

将被应用于参考样点和预测样点中的至少一个的滤波器的类型可根据目标块的帧内预测模式、目标块的尺寸和目标块的形状中的至少一个而不同。滤波器的类型可根据滤波器抽头的数量、滤波器系数的值和滤波器强度中的一个或更多个来被分类。The type of filter to be applied to at least one of the reference samples and the prediction samples may be different according to at least one of the intra prediction mode of the target block, the size of the target block, and the shape of the target block. The types of filters may be classified according to one or more of the number of filter taps, the values of filter coefficients, and filter strength.

当帧内预测模式是平面模式时,可在生成目标块的预测块时根据预测目标样点在预测块中的位置使用目标块的上参考样点、目标块的左参考样点、目标块的右上参考样点和目标块的左下参考样点的加权和来生成预测目标块的样点值。When the intra prediction mode is the plane mode, the upper reference sample of the target block, the left reference sample of the target block, the A weighted sum of the upper right reference samples and the lower left reference samples of the target block is used to generate the sample value of the prediction target block.

当帧内预测模式是DC模式时,可在生成目标块的预测块时使用目标块上方的参考样点和目标块左侧的参考样点的平均值。此外,可对目标块中的特定行或特定列执行使用参考样点的值的滤波。特定行可以是与参考样点相邻的一个或更多个上方行。特定列可以是与参考样点相邻的一个或更多个左侧列。When the intra prediction mode is the DC mode, the average value of the reference samples above the target block and the reference samples to the left of the target block may be used when generating the prediction block of the target block. Also, filtering using the values of the reference samples may be performed on a specific row or a specific column in the target block. A particular row may be one or more upper rows adjacent to the reference sample. A particular column may be one or more left columns adjacent to the reference sample.

当帧内预测模式是方向模式时,可使用目标块的上参考样点、左参考样点、右上参考样点和/或左下参考样点来生成预测块。When the intra prediction mode is the directional mode, the prediction block may be generated using upper reference samples, left reference samples, upper right reference samples and/or lower left reference samples of the target block.

为了生成上述预测样点,可执行基于实数的插值。In order to generate the predicted samples described above, real-number based interpolation may be performed.

可从与目标块相邻的邻近块的帧内预测模式预测目标块的帧内预测模式,并且用于预测的信息可被熵编码/熵解码。The intra prediction mode of the target block may be predicted from the intra prediction modes of neighboring blocks adjacent to the target block, and information for prediction may be entropy encoded/entropy decoded.

例如,当目标块和邻近块的帧内预测模式彼此相同时,可使用预定义的标志来用信号传送目标块和邻近块的帧内预测模式是相同的。For example, when the intra prediction modes of the target block and the adjacent blocks are the same as each other, a predefined flag may be used to signal that the intra prediction modes of the target block and the adjacent blocks are the same.

例如,可用信号传送用于指示在多个邻近块的帧内预测模式之中与目标块的帧内预测模式相同的帧内预测模式的指示符。For example, an indicator for indicating the same intra prediction mode as the intra prediction mode of the target block among the intra prediction modes of a plurality of adjacent blocks may be signaled.

当目标块和邻近块的帧内预测模式彼此不同时,可使用熵编码和/或熵解码对关于目标块的帧内预测模式的信息进行编码和/或解码。When the intra prediction modes of the target block and the neighboring blocks are different from each other, the information on the intra prediction mode of the target block may be encoded and/or decoded using entropy encoding and/or entropy decoding.

图8是用于解释在帧内预测过程中使用的参考样点的位置的示图。FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the positions of reference samples used in the intra prediction process.

图8示出了用于对目标块进行帧内预测的参考样点的位置。参照图8,用于对目标块进行帧内预测的重建参考样点可包括左下参考样点831、左参考样点833、左上角参考样点835、上参考样点837和右上参考样点839。FIG. 8 shows the positions of reference samples used for intra prediction of the target block. Referring to FIG. 8 , the reconstructed reference samples used for intra prediction of the target block may include a lower left reference sample 831, a left reference sample 833, an upper left reference sample 835, an upper reference sample 837, and an upper right reference sample 839 .

例如,左参考样点833可表示与目标块的左侧相邻的重建参考像素。上参考样点837可表示与目标块的顶部相邻的重建参考像素。左上角参考样点835可表示位于目标块的左上角处的重建参考像素。左下参考样点831可表示在位于与由左参考样点833组成的左侧样点线相同的线上的样点之中的位于所述左侧样点线下方的参考样点。右上参考样点839可表示在位于与由上参考样点837组成的上方样点线相同的线上的样点之中的位于所述上方样点线右侧的参考样点。For example, the left reference sample 833 may represent the reconstructed reference pixel adjacent to the left side of the target block. Upper reference samples 837 may represent reconstructed reference pixels adjacent to the top of the target block. The upper left reference sample 835 may represent the reconstructed reference pixel located at the upper left corner of the target block. The lower left reference sample 831 may represent a reference sample located below the left sample line among samples located on the same line as the left sample line composed of the left reference sample 833 . The upper right reference sample 839 may represent a reference sample located to the right of the upper sample line among samples located on the same line as the upper sample line composed of the upper reference sample 837 .

当目标块的尺寸是N×N时,左下参考样点831、左参考样点833、上参考样点837和右上参考样点839的数量可以均是N。When the size of the target block is N×N, the numbers of the lower left reference samples 831 , the left reference samples 833 , the upper reference samples 837 , and the upper right reference samples 839 may all be N.

通过对目标块执行帧内预测,可生成预测块。生成预测块的过程可包括确定预测块中的像素的值。目标块和预测块的尺寸可以相同。The predicted block may be generated by performing intra prediction on the target block. The process of generating the prediction block may include determining values for pixels in the prediction block. The size of the target block and the prediction block may be the same.

用于对目标块进行帧内预测的参考样点可根据目标块的帧内预测模式而改变。帧内预测模式的方向可表示参考样点与预测块的像素之间的依赖关系。例如,指定参考样点的值可被用作预测块中的一个或更多个指定像素的值。在这种情况下,所述指定参考样点和预测块中的所述一个或更多个指定像素可以是位于沿帧内预测模式的方向的直线上的样点和像素。换句话说,所述指定参考样点的值可被复制作为位于与帧内预测模式的方向相反的方向上的像素的值。可选地,在预测块中的像素的值可以是相对于该像素的位置位于帧内预测模式的方向上的参考样点的值。The reference samples used for intra prediction of the target block may vary according to the intra prediction mode of the target block. The direction of the intra prediction mode may represent the dependency between the reference samples and the pixels of the prediction block. For example, a value specifying a reference sample may be used as a value specifying one or more pixels in the prediction block. In this case, the designated reference samples and the one or more designated pixels in the prediction block may be samples and pixels located on a straight line in the direction of the intra prediction mode. In other words, the value of the specified reference sample can be copied as the value of the pixel located in the direction opposite to that of the intra prediction mode. Alternatively, the value of a pixel in the prediction block may be the value of a reference sample located in the direction of the intra prediction mode with respect to the position of the pixel.

在示例中,当目标块的帧内预测模式是模式值为26的垂直模式时,上参考样点837可被用于帧内预测。当帧内预测模式是垂直模式时,预测块中的像素的值可以是垂直地位于该像素的位置上方的参考样点的值。因此,与目标块的顶部相邻的上参考样点837可被用于帧内预测。此外,在预测块的一行中的像素的值可与上参考样点837的像素的值相同。In an example, when the intra prediction mode of the target block is a vertical mode with a mode value of 26, the upper reference sample 837 may be used for intra prediction. When the intra prediction mode is the vertical mode, the value of a pixel in the prediction block may be the value of a reference sample located vertically above the position of the pixel. Therefore, the upper reference sample 837 adjacent to the top of the target block can be used for intra prediction. Furthermore, the values of the pixels in a row of the prediction block may be the same as the values of the pixels of the upper reference sample 837 .

在示例中,当目标块的帧内预测模式是模式值为10的水平模式时,左参考样点833可被用于帧内预测。当帧内预测模式是水平模式时,预测块中的像素的值可以是水平地位于该像素的位置左侧的参考样点的值。因此,与目标块的左侧相邻的左参考样点833可被用于帧内预测。此外,在预测块的一列中的像素的值可与左参考样点833的像素的值相同。In an example, when the intra prediction mode of the target block is a horizontal mode with a mode value of 10, the left reference sample 833 may be used for intra prediction. When the intra prediction mode is the horizontal mode, the value of a pixel in the prediction block may be the value of a reference sample located horizontally to the left of the position of the pixel. Therefore, the left reference sample 833 adjacent to the left side of the target block can be used for intra prediction. Furthermore, the values of the pixels in one column of the prediction block may be the same as the values of the pixels of the left reference sample 833 .

在示例中,当当前块的帧内预测模式的模式值是18时,左参考样点833中的至少一些、左上角参考样点835、以及上参考样点837中的至少一些可被用于帧内预测。当帧内预测模式的模式值是18时,预测块中的像素的值可以是对角地位于该像素的左上角处的参考样点的值。In an example, when the mode value of the intra prediction mode of the current block is 18, at least some of the left reference samples 833, the upper left reference samples 835, and the upper reference samples 837 may be used for Intra prediction. When the mode value of the intra prediction mode is 18, the value of the pixel in the prediction block may be the value of the reference sample diagonally located at the upper left corner of the pixel.

此外,在模式值为27、28、29、30、31、32、33或34的帧内预测模式被使用的情况下,右上参考样点839中的至少一部分可被用于帧内预测。Also, in the case where an intra prediction mode with a mode value of 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 or 34 is used, at least a part of the upper right reference samples 839 may be used for intra prediction.

此外,在模式值为2、3、4、5、6、7、8或9的帧内预测模式被使用的情况下,左下参考样点831中的至少一部分可被用于帧内预测。Also, in the case where an intra prediction mode with a mode value of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 is used, at least a part of the lower left reference samples 831 may be used for intra prediction.

此外,在模式值是范围从11至25的值的帧内预测模式的情况下,左上角参考样点835可被用于帧内预测。Also, in the case of an intra prediction mode in which the mode value is a value ranging from 11 to 25, the upper left reference sample 835 may be used for intra prediction.

用于确定预测块中的一个像素的像素值的参考样点的数量可以是1或者2或者更多。The number of reference samples used to determine the pixel value of one pixel in the prediction block may be 1 or 2 or more.

如上所述,可根据像素的位置和由帧内预测模式的方向所指示的参考样点的位置来确定预测块中的像素的像素值。当像素的位置以及由帧内预测模式的方向所指示的参考样点的位置是整数位置时,由整数位置所指示的一个参考样点的值可被用于确定预测块中的像素的像素值。As described above, the pixel value of the pixel in the prediction block may be determined according to the position of the pixel and the position of the reference sample indicated by the direction of the intra prediction mode. When the position of the pixel and the position of the reference sample indicated by the direction of the intra prediction mode are integer positions, the value of one reference sample indicated by the integer position may be used to determine the pixel value of the pixel in the prediction block .

当像素的位置以及由帧内预测模式的方向所指示的参考样点的位置不是整数位置时,可生成基于与该参考样点的位置最接近的两个参考样点的内插参考样点。内插参考样点的值可被用于确定预测块中的像素的像素值。换句话说,当预测块中的像素的位置以及由帧内预测模式的方向所指示的参考样点的位置指示两个参考样点之间的位置时,可生成基于这两个样点的值的内插值。When the position of the pixel and the position of the reference sample indicated by the direction of the intra prediction mode are not integer positions, an interpolated reference sample based on the two closest reference samples to the position of the reference sample may be generated. The values of the interpolated reference samples may be used to determine pixel values for pixels in the prediction block. In other words, when the position of the pixel in the prediction block and the position of the reference sample indicated by the direction of the intra prediction mode indicate the position between the two reference samples, a value based on the two samples may be generated the interpolated value.

经由预测而生成的预测块可以与原始目标块不同。换句话说,可能存在预测误差,该预测误差是目标块与预测块之间的差,并且也可能存在在目标块的像素与预测块的像素之间的预测误差。The prediction block generated via prediction may be different from the original target block. In other words, there may be a prediction error, which is the difference between the target block and the prediction block, and there may also be a prediction error between the pixels of the target block and the pixels of the prediction block.

在下文中,术语“差”、“误差”和“残差”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。In the following, the terms "difference", "error" and "residual" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

例如,在方向帧内预测的情况下,预测块的像素与参考样点之间的距离越长,则可能发生的预测误差越大。这种预测误差可导致生成的预测块与邻近块之间的不连续性。For example, in the case of directional intra prediction, the longer the distance between the pixels of the prediction block and the reference samples, the larger the prediction error that may occur. Such prediction errors can lead to discontinuities between the generated prediction block and neighboring blocks.

为了减少预测误差,可使用针对预测块的滤波操作。滤波操作可被配置为自适应地将滤波器应用于预测块中的被认为具有较大预测误差的区域。例如,被认为具有较大预测误差的区域可以是预测块的边界。此外,在预测块中被认为具有较大预测误差的区域可根据帧内预测模式而不同,并且滤波器的特性也可根据帧内预测模式而不同。To reduce prediction errors, filtering operations for prediction blocks may be used. The filtering operation may be configured to adaptively apply filters to regions in the prediction block that are considered to have larger prediction errors. For example, a region considered to have a larger prediction error may be the boundary of a prediction block. Also, a region considered to have a large prediction error in a prediction block may differ according to intra prediction modes, and characteristics of filters may also differ according to intra prediction modes.

图9是用于解释帧间预测过程的实施例的示图。FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of an inter prediction process.

图9中示出的矩形可表示图像(或画面)。此外,在图9中,箭头可表示预测方向。也就是说,可根据预测方向对每个图像进行编码和/或解码。The rectangles shown in FIG. 9 may represent images (or pictures). Furthermore, in FIG. 9, arrows may indicate prediction directions. That is, each picture may be encoded and/or decoded according to the prediction direction.

图像可根据编码类型被分类为帧内画面(I画面)、单向预测画面或预测编码画面(P画面)、以及双向预测画面或双向预测编码画面(B画面)。可根据每个画面的编码类型对每个画面进行编码和/或解码。Pictures may be classified into intra pictures (I pictures), unidirectionally predictive pictures or predictively coded pictures (P pictures), and bidirectionally predictive pictures or bidirectionally predictively coded pictures (B pictures) according to encoding types. Each picture may be encoded and/or decoded according to its encoding type.

当作为将被编码的目标的目标图像是I画面时,目标图像可在不进行参照其它图像的帧间预测的情况下使用图像本身包含的数据被编码。例如,I画面可仅经由帧内预测被编码。When a target image to be encoded is an I picture, the target image can be encoded using data contained in the image itself without performing inter prediction with reference to other images. For example, I pictures may be encoded via intra prediction only.

当目标图像是P画面时,可经由使用存在于一个方向上的参考画面的帧间预测对目标图像进行编码。这里,所述一个方向可以是前向方向或后向方向。When the target image is a P picture, the target image may be encoded via inter prediction using reference pictures existing in one direction. Here, the one direction may be a forward direction or a backward direction.

当目标图像是B画面时,可经由使用存在于两个方向上的参考画面的帧间预测对图像进行编码,或者可以经由使用存在于前向方向和后向方向之一上的参考画面的帧间预测对图像进行编码。这里,所述两个方向可以是前向方向和后向方向。When the target image is a B-picture, the image may be encoded via inter-frame prediction using reference pictures existing in both directions, or may be encoded via frames using reference pictures existing in one of the forward and backward directions Inter prediction encodes images. Here, the two directions may be a forward direction and a backward direction.

使用参考画面进行编码和/或解码的P画面和B画面可被视为使用帧间预测的图像。P pictures and B pictures encoded and/or decoded using reference pictures may be regarded as pictures using inter prediction.

下面,将详细地描述根据实施例的在帧间模式下的帧间预测。Hereinafter, the inter prediction in the inter mode according to the embodiment will be described in detail.

可使用运动信息来执行帧间预测。Inter prediction may be performed using motion information.

在帧间模式下,编码设备100可对目标块执行帧间预测和/或运动补偿。解码设备200可对目标块执行与由编码设备100执行的帧间预测和/或运动补偿对应的帧间预测和/或运动补偿。In the inter mode, the encoding apparatus 100 may perform inter prediction and/or motion compensation on the target block. The decoding apparatus 200 may perform inter prediction and/or motion compensation corresponding to the inter prediction and/or motion compensation performed by the encoding apparatus 100 on the target block.

可由编码设备100和解码设备200在帧间预测期间单独地推导目标块的运动信息。可使用重建的邻近块的运动信息、col块的运动信息和/或与col块相邻的块的运动信息来推导运动信息。The motion information of the target block may be derived separately by the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 during inter prediction. The motion information may be derived using motion information of reconstructed neighboring blocks, motion information of the col block, and/or motion information of blocks adjacent to the col block.

例如,编码设备100或解码设备200可通过将空间候选和/或时间候选的运动信息用作目标块的运动信息来执行预测和/或运动补偿。目标块可表示PU和/或PU分区。For example, the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 may perform prediction and/or motion compensation by using motion information of spatial candidates and/or temporal candidates as motion information of the target block. A target block may represent a PU and/or a PU partition.

空间候选可以是在空间上与目标块相邻的重建块。Spatial candidates may be reconstructed blocks that are spatially adjacent to the target block.

时间候选可以是在先前重建的同位画面(col画面)中的与目标块对应的重建块。A temporal candidate may be a reconstructed block corresponding to the target block in a previously reconstructed co-located picture (col picture).

在帧间预测中,编码设备100和解码设备200可通过利用空间候选和/或时间候选的运动信息来提高编码效率和解码效率。空间候选的运动信息可被称为“空间运动信息”。时间候选的运动信息可被称为“时间运动信息”。In inter prediction, the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may improve encoding efficiency and decoding efficiency by utilizing motion information of spatial candidates and/or temporal candidates. The motion information of the spatial candidates may be referred to as "spatial motion information". The motion information of the temporal candidates may be referred to as "temporal motion information".

下面,空间候选的运动信息可以是包括空间候选的PU的运动信息。时间候选的运动信息可以是包括时间候选的PU的运动信息。候选块的运动信息可以是包括候选块的PU的运动信息。Hereinafter, the motion information of the spatial candidate may be motion information of a PU including the spatial candidate. The motion information of the temporal candidate may be motion information of a PU including the temporal candidate. The motion information of the candidate block may be motion information of a PU including the candidate block.

可使用参考画面执行帧间预测。Inter prediction may be performed using reference pictures.

参考画面可以是在目标画面之前的画面和在目标画面之后的画面中的至少一个。参考画面可以是用于目标块的预测的图像。The reference picture may be at least one of a picture preceding the target picture and a picture following the target picture. The reference picture may be a picture used for prediction of the target block.

在帧间预测中,可利用用于指示参考画面的参考画面索引(或refIdx)、随后将被描述的运动矢量等来指定参考画面中的区域。这里,在参考画面中指定的区域可指示参考块。In inter prediction, a region in a reference picture may be specified using a reference picture index (or refIdx) for indicating a reference picture, a motion vector to be described later, and the like. Here, the area specified in the reference picture may indicate a reference block.

帧间预测可选择参考画面,也可以从参考画面选择与目标块对应的参考块。此外,帧间预测可使用所选择的参考块来生成针对目标块的预测块。For inter prediction, a reference picture can be selected, and a reference block corresponding to the target block can also be selected from the reference picture. Also, inter prediction may use the selected reference block to generate a prediction block for the target block.

可由编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个在帧间预测期间推导运动信息。Motion information may be derived during inter prediction by each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 .

空间候选可以是1)存在于目标画面中的2)已经在先前经由编码和/或解码而重建并且3)与目标块相邻或位于目标块的拐角处的块。这里,“位于目标块的拐角处的块”可以是与水平相邻于目标块的邻近块垂直相邻的块,或者是与垂直相邻于目标块的邻近块水平相邻的块。此外,“位于目标块的拐角处的块”可具有与“与目标块的拐角相邻的块”相同的含义。“位于目标块的拐角处的块”的含义可被包括在“与目标块相邻的块”的含义中。Spatial candidates may be 1) blocks that exist in the target picture 2) have been previously reconstructed via encoding and/or decoding and 3) are adjacent to or at the corners of the target block. Here, the "block at the corner of the target block" may be a block that is vertically adjacent to a neighboring block that is horizontally adjacent to the target block, or a block that is horizontally adjacent to a neighboring block that is vertically adjacent to the target block. Also, "a block located at the corner of the target block" may have the same meaning as "a block adjacent to the corner of the target block". The meaning of "a block located at the corner of the target block" may be included in the meaning of "a block adjacent to the target block".

例如,空间候选可以是位于目标块左侧的重建块、位于目标块上方的重建块、位于目标块左下角的重建块、位于目标块右上角的重建块或位于目标块左上角的目标块。For example, a spatial candidate can be a reconstructed block located to the left of the target block, a reconstructed block located above the target block, a reconstructed block located in the lower left corner of the target block, a reconstructed block located in the upper right corner of the target block, or a target block located in the upper left corner of the target block.

编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可识别存在于col画面中的在空间上与目标块对应的位置的块。目标块在目标画面中的位置和所识别的块在col画面中的位置可彼此对应。Each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may identify a block existing at a position spatially corresponding to the target block in the col picture. The position of the target block in the target picture and the position of the identified block in the col picture may correspond to each other.

编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可将存在于针对所识别的块的预定义相关位置处的col块确定为时间候选。所述预定义相关位置可以是存在于所识别的块内部和/或外部的位置。Each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may determine a col block that exists at a predefined relevant position for the identified block as a temporal candidate. The predefined relevant locations may be locations that exist inside and/or outside the identified block.

例如,col块可包括第一col块和第二col块。当所识别的块的坐标是(xP,yP)并且所识别的块的尺寸用(nPSW,nPSH)表示时,第一col块可以是位于坐标(xP+nPSW,yP+nPSH)处的块。第二col块可以是位于坐标(xP+(nPSW>>1),yP+(nPSH>>1))处的块。当第一col块不可用时,可选择性地使用第二col块。For example, a col block may include a first col block and a second col block. When the coordinates of the identified block are (xP, yP) and the size of the identified block is denoted by (nPSW, nPSH), the first col block may be the block located at coordinates (xP+nPSW, yP+nPSH). The second col block may be the block located at coordinates (xP+(nPSW>>1), yP+(nPSH>>1)). The second col block is optionally used when the first col block is not available.

可基于col块的运动矢量确定目标块的运动矢量。编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可对col块的运动矢量进行缩放。col块的经缩放的运动矢量可被用作目标块的运动矢量。此外,存储在列表中的时间候选的运行信息的运动矢量可以是经缩放的运动矢量。The motion vector of the target block may be determined based on the motion vector of the col block. Each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may scale the motion vector of the col block. The scaled motion vector of the col block may be used as the motion vector of the target block. Also, the motion vector of the running information of the temporal candidates stored in the list may be a scaled motion vector.

目标块的运动矢量与col块的运动矢量的比率可与第一距离与第二距离的比率相同。第一距离可以是参考画面与目标块的目标画面之间的距离。第二距离可以是参考画面与col块的col画面之间的距离。The ratio of the motion vector of the target block to the motion vector of the col block may be the same as the ratio of the first distance to the second distance. The first distance may be a distance between the reference picture and the target picture of the target block. The second distance may be a distance between the reference picture and the col picture of the col block.

用于推导运动信息的方案可根据目标块的帧间预测模式而改变。例如,作为被应用于帧间预测的帧间预测模式,可存在高级运动矢量预测因子(AMVP)模式、合并模式、跳过模式、当前画面参考模式等。合并模式也可被称为“运动合并模式”。下面将详细描述各个模式。The scheme for deriving motion information may vary according to the inter prediction mode of the target block. For example, as the inter prediction mode applied to the inter prediction, there may be an Advanced Motion Vector Predictor (AMVP) mode, a merge mode, a skip mode, a current picture reference mode, and the like. Merge mode may also be referred to as "motion merge mode". Each mode will be described in detail below.

1)AMVP模式1) AMVP mode

当使用AMVP模式时,编码设备100可在目标块的邻近区域中搜索相似块。编码设备100可通过使用找到的相似块的运动信息对目标块执行预测来获取预测块。编码设备100可对作为目标块与预测块之间的差的残差块进行编码。When the AMVP mode is used, the encoding apparatus 100 may search for similar blocks in a neighboring area of the target block. The encoding apparatus 100 may acquire a prediction block by performing prediction on a target block using motion information of the found similar blocks. The encoding apparatus 100 may encode the residual block, which is the difference between the target block and the prediction block.

1-1)创建预测运动矢量候选的列表1-1) Create a list of predicted motion vector candidates

当AMVP模式被用作预测模式时,编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可使用空间候选的运动矢量、时间候选的运动矢量和零矢量来创建预测运动矢量候选的列表。预测运动矢量候选列表可包括一个或更多个预测运动矢量候选。空间候选的运动矢量、时间候选的运动矢量和零矢量中的至少一个可被确定并被用作预测运动矢量候选。When the AMVP mode is used as the prediction mode, each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may create a list of predicted motion vector candidates using motion vectors of spatial candidates, motion vectors of temporal candidates, and zero vectors. The motion vector predictor candidate list may include one or more motion vector predictor candidates. At least one of a motion vector of a spatial candidate, a motion vector of a temporal candidate, and a null vector may be determined and used as a predicted motion vector candidate.

在下文中,术语“预测运动矢量(候选)”和“运动矢量(候选)”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the terms "prediction motion vector (candidate)" and "motion vector (candidate)" may be used to have the same meaning, and may be used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,术语“预测运动矢量候选”和“AMVP候选”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换地使用。Hereinafter, the terms "motion vector predictor candidate" and "AMVP candidate" may be used to have the same meaning, and may be used interchangeably with each other.

在下文中,术语“预测运动矢量候选列表”和“AMVP候选列表”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。Hereinafter, the terms "motion vector predictor candidate list" and "AMVP candidate list" may be used to have the same meaning, and may be used interchangeably with each other.

空间候选可包括重建的空间邻近块。换句话说,重建的邻近块的运动矢量可被称为“空间预测运动矢量候选”。Spatial candidates may include reconstructed spatial neighboring blocks. In other words, the motion vectors of the reconstructed neighboring blocks may be referred to as "spatially predicted motion vector candidates".

时间候选可包括col块和与col块相邻的块。换句话说,col块的运动矢量或与col块相邻的块的运动矢量可被称为“时间预测运动矢量候选”。Temporal candidates may include the col block and blocks adjacent to the col block. In other words, the motion vector of the col block or the motion vector of the block adjacent to the col block may be referred to as a "temporal motion vector predictor candidate".

零矢量可以是(0,0)运动矢量。The zero vector can be the (0,0) motion vector.

预测运动矢量候选可以是用于对运动矢量进行预测的运动矢量预测因子。此外,在编码设备100中,每个预测运动矢量候选可以是用于运动矢量的初始搜索位置。A motion vector predictor candidate may be a motion vector predictor for predicting a motion vector. Also, in the encoding apparatus 100, each predicted motion vector candidate may be an initial search position for a motion vector.

1-2)使用预测运动矢量候选的列表搜索运动矢量1-2) Searching for motion vectors using the list of predicted motion vector candidates

编码设备100可使用预测运动矢量候选的列表在搜索范围内确定将被用于对目标块进行编码的运动矢量。此外,编码设备100可在存在于预测运动矢量候选列表中的预测运动矢量候选之中确定将被用作目标块的预测运动矢量的预测运动矢量候选。The encoding apparatus 100 may determine a motion vector to be used for encoding the target block within the search range using the list of predicted motion vector candidates. Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine a motion vector predictor candidate to be used as a motion vector predictor of the target block among the motion vector predictor candidates existing in the motion vector predictor candidate list.

将被用于对目标块进行编码的运动矢量可以是可按最小代价编码的运动矢量。The motion vector to be used for encoding the target block may be a motion vector that can be encoded with minimum cost.

此外,编码设备100可确定是否使用AMVP模式对目标块进行编码。Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine whether to encode the target block using the AMVP mode.

1-3)对帧间预测信息的传输1-3) Transmission of inter-frame prediction information

编码设备100可生成包括帧间预测所需的帧间预测信息的比特流。解码设备200可使用比特流的帧间预测信息对目标块执行帧间预测。The encoding apparatus 100 may generate a bitstream including inter prediction information required for inter prediction. The decoding apparatus 200 may perform inter prediction on the target block using the inter prediction information of the bitstream.

帧间预测信息可包含1)指示AMVP是否被使用的模式信息、2)预测运动矢量索引、3)运动矢量差(MVD)、4)参考方向和5)参考画面索引。The inter prediction information may include 1) mode information indicating whether AMVP is used, 2) a predicted motion vector index, 3) a motion vector difference (MVD), 4) a reference direction, and 5) a reference picture index.

在下文中,术语“预测运动矢量索引”和“AMVP索引”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。此外,帧间预测信息可包含残差信号。Hereinafter, the terms "predictor motion vector index" and "AMVP index" may be used to have the same meaning, and may be used interchangeably with each other. Furthermore, the inter prediction information may include residual signals.

当模式信息指示AMVP模式被使用时,解码设备200可通过熵解码从比特流获取预测运动矢量索引、MVD、参考方向和参考画面索引。When the mode information indicates that the AMVP mode is used, the decoding apparatus 200 may acquire the predicted motion vector index, the MVD, the reference direction, and the reference picture index from the bitstream through entropy decoding.

预测运动矢量索引可指示在预测运动矢量候选列表中包括的预测运动矢量候选之中的将被用于对目标块进行预测的预测运动矢量候选。The motion vector predictor index may indicate a motion vector predictor candidate to be used for prediction of the target block among the motion vector predictor candidates included in the motion vector predictor candidate list.

1-4)使用帧间预测信息的AMVP模式下的帧间预测1-4) Inter prediction in AMVP mode using inter prediction information

解码设备200可使用预测运动矢量候选列表来推导预测运动矢量候选,并且可基于推导的预测运动矢量候选来确定目标块的运动信息。The decoding apparatus 200 may derive motion vector predictor candidates using the motion vector predictor candidate list, and may determine motion information of the target block based on the derived motion vector predictor candidates.

解码设备200可使用预测运动矢量索引在预测运动矢量候选列表中包括的预测运动矢量候选之中确定用于目标块的运动矢量候选。解码设备200可从预测运动矢量候选列表中包括的预测运动矢量候选之中选择由预测运动矢量索引所指示的预测运动矢量候选作为目标块的预测运动矢量。The decoding apparatus 200 may determine a motion vector candidate for the target block from among the predicted motion vector candidates included in the predicted motion vector candidate list using the predicted motion vector index. The decoding apparatus 200 may select the motion vector predictor candidate indicated by the motion vector predictor index from among the motion vector predictor candidates included in the motion vector predictor candidate list as the motion vector predictor of the target block.

实际将被用于对目标块进行帧间预测的运动矢量可能不与预测运动矢量匹配。为了指示实际将被用于对目标块进行帧间预测的运动矢量与预测运动矢量之间的差,可使用MVD。编码设备100可推导与实际将被用于对目标块进行帧间预测的运动矢量相似的预测运动矢量,以便使用尽可能小的MVD。The motion vector that will actually be used for inter prediction of the target block may not match the predicted motion vector. In order to indicate the difference between the motion vector that will actually be used for inter-predicting the target block and the predicted motion vector, MVD may be used. The encoding apparatus 100 may derive a predicted motion vector similar to the motion vector actually to be used for inter prediction of the target block, so as to use the MVD as small as possible.

MVD可以是目标块的运动矢量与预测运动矢量之间的差。编码设备100可计算MVD,并可对MVD进行熵编码。The MVD may be the difference between the motion vector of the target block and the predicted motion vector. The encoding apparatus 100 may calculate the MVD, and may perform entropy encoding on the MVD.

可通过比特流将MVD从编码设备100发送到解码设备200。解码设备200可对接收的MVD进行解码。解码设备200可通过对解码的MVD和预测运动矢量进行求和来推导目标块的运动矢量。换句话说,由解码设备200推导出的目标块的运动矢量可以是熵解码的MVD和运动矢量候选之和。The MVD may be transmitted from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream. The decoding apparatus 200 may decode the received MVD. The decoding apparatus 200 may derive the motion vector of the target block by summing the decoded MVD and the predicted motion vector. In other words, the motion vector of the target block derived by the decoding apparatus 200 may be the sum of the entropy decoded MVD and the motion vector candidates.

参考方向可指示将被用于对目标块进行预测的参考画面的列表。例如,参考方向可指示参考画面列表L0和参考画面列表L1中的一个。The reference direction may indicate a list of reference pictures to be used for prediction of the target block. For example, the reference direction may indicate one of the reference picture list L0 and the reference picture list L1.

参考方向仅指示将被用于对目标块进行预测的参考画面列表,并且可不意味着参考画面的方向被限制为前向方向或后向方向。换句话说,参考画面列表L0和参考画面列表L1中的每一个可包括前向方向和/或后向方向上的画面。The reference direction only indicates a list of reference pictures to be used for prediction of the target block, and may not mean that the direction of the reference pictures is limited to the forward direction or the backward direction. In other words, each of the reference picture list L0 and the reference picture list L1 may include pictures in the forward direction and/or the backward direction.

参考方向是单向的可意味着使用单个参考画面列表。参考方向是双向的可意味着使用两个参考画面列表。换句话说,参考方向可指示以下情况之一:仅使用参考画面列表L0的情况、仅使用参考画面列表L1的情况、以及使用两个参考画面列表的情况。The reference direction being unidirectional may mean using a single reference picture list. The reference direction being bidirectional may mean using two reference picture lists. In other words, the reference direction may indicate one of the following cases: a case where only the reference picture list L0 is used, a case where only the reference picture list L1 is used, and a case where two reference picture lists are used.

参考画面索引可指示在参考画面列表中的参考画面之中的将被用于对目标块进行预测的参考画面。可由编码设备100对参考画面索引进行熵编码。经熵编码的参考画面索引可通过比特流由编码设备100用信号传送到解码设备200。The reference picture index may indicate a reference picture to be used for prediction of the target block among the reference pictures in the reference picture list. The reference picture index may be entropy encoded by the encoding apparatus 100 . The entropy-encoded reference picture index may be signaled by the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream.

当两个参考画面列表被用于对目标块进行预测时,单个参考画面索引和单个运动矢量可被用于参考画面列表中的每一个。此外,当两个参考画面列表被用于对目标块进行预测时,可为目标块指定两个预测块。例如,可使用针对目标块的两个预测块的平均值或加权和来生成目标块的(最终)预测块。When two reference picture lists are used to predict the target block, a single reference picture index and a single motion vector may be used for each of the reference picture lists. Also, when two reference picture lists are used to predict the target block, two prediction blocks may be designated for the target block. For example, the average or weighted sum of the two predicted blocks for the target block may be used to generate the (final) predicted block of the target block.

可通过预测运动矢量索引、MVD、参考方向和参考画面索引来推导目标块的运动矢量。The motion vector of the target block may be derived through the predicted motion vector index, MVD, reference direction, and reference picture index.

解码设备200可基于推导出的运动矢量和参考画面索引来生成针对目标块的预测块。例如,预测块可以是在由参考画面索引所指示的参考画面中的由推导出的运动矢量所指示的参考块。The decoding apparatus 200 may generate a prediction block for the target block based on the derived motion vector and the reference picture index. For example, the prediction block may be the reference block indicated by the derived motion vector in the reference picture indicated by the reference picture index.

由于预测运动矢量索引和MVD被编码,而目标块的运动矢量自身不被编码,因此从编码设备100发送到解码设备200的比特的数量可减少,并且编码效率可提高。Since the predicted motion vector index and the MVD are encoded while the motion vector of the target block itself is not encoded, the number of bits transmitted from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 can be reduced, and encoding efficiency can be improved.

可将重建的邻近块的运动信息用于目标块。在特定的帧间预测模式中,编码设备100可不单独对目标块的实际运动信息进行编码。目标块的运动信息不被编码,而是可对额外信息进行编码,其中,所述额外信息使得能够使用重建的邻近块的运动信息来推导目标块的运动信息。由于所述额外信息被编码,因此被发送到解码设备200的比特的数量可减少,并且编码效率可提高。The motion information of the reconstructed neighboring blocks may be used for the target block. In a specific inter prediction mode, the encoding apparatus 100 may not separately encode the actual motion information of the target block. The motion information of the target block is not encoded, but additional information may be encoded, wherein the additional information enables the motion information of the target block to be derived using the motion information of the reconstructed neighboring blocks. Since the additional information is encoded, the number of bits transmitted to the decoding apparatus 200 can be reduced, and encoding efficiency can be improved.

例如,作为目标块的运动信息不被直接编码的帧间预测模式,可存在跳过模式和/或合并模式。这里,编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可使用指示在重建的邻近单元之中的其运动信息将被用作目标单元的运动信息的单元的指示符和/或索引。For example, as an inter prediction mode in which the motion information of the target block is not directly encoded, there may be a skip mode and/or a merge mode. Here, each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may use an indicator and/or an index indicating a unit whose motion information is to be used as the motion information of the target unit among reconstructed neighboring units.

2)合并模式2) Merge mode

作为用于推导目标块的运动信息的方案,存在合并。术语“合并”可意味着对多个块的运动进行合并。“合并”可意味着一个块的运动信息也被应用于其它块。换句话说,合并模式可以是从邻近块的运动信息推导目标块的运动信息的模式。As a scheme for deriving motion information of a target block, there is merging. The term "merging" may mean merging the motions of multiple blocks. "Merge" may mean that the motion information of one block is also applied to other blocks. In other words, the merge mode may be a mode in which the motion information of the target block is derived from the motion information of the neighboring blocks.

当使用合并模式时,编码设备100可使用空间候选的运动信息和/或时间候选的运动信息来预测目标块的运动信息。空间候选可包括在空间上与目标块相邻的重建的空间邻近块。空间邻近块可包括左侧邻近块和上方邻近块。时间候选可包括col块。术语“空间候选”和“空间合并候选”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。术语“时间候选”和“时间合并候选”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换使用。When the merge mode is used, the encoding apparatus 100 may predict the motion information of the target block using the motion information of the spatial candidate and/or the motion information of the temporal candidate. The spatial candidates may include reconstructed spatially neighboring blocks that are spatially adjacent to the target block. The spatial neighboring blocks may include left neighboring blocks and upper neighboring blocks. Temporal candidates may include col blocks. The terms "spatial candidate" and "spatial merging candidate" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other. The terms "temporal candidate" and "temporal merge candidate" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

编码设备100可经由预测来获取预测块。编码设备100可对作为目标块与预测块之间的差的残差块进行编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may obtain a prediction block through prediction. The encoding apparatus 100 may encode the residual block, which is the difference between the target block and the prediction block.

2-1)创建合并候选列表2-1) Create a merge candidate list

当使用合并模式时,编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可使用空间候选的运动信息和/或时间候选的运动信息来创建合并候选列表。运动信息可包括1)运动矢量、2)参考画面索引和3)参考方向。参考方向可以是单向或双向。When the merge mode is used, each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may create a merge candidate list using motion information of spatial candidates and/or motion information of temporal candidates. The motion information may include 1) a motion vector, 2) a reference picture index, and 3) a reference direction. The reference direction can be unidirectional or bidirectional.

合并候选列表可包括合并候选。合并候选可以是运动信息。换句话说,合并候选列表可以是存储多条运动信息的列表。The merge candidate list may include merge candidates. Merge candidates may be motion information. In other words, the merging candidate list may be a list storing a plurality of pieces of motion information.

合并候选可以是多条时间候选和/或空间候选的运动信息。此外,合并候选列表可包括通过对已存在于合并候选列表中的合并候选进行组合而生成的新的合并候选。换句话说,合并候选列表可包括通过对先前存在于合并候选列表中的多条运动信息进行组合而生成的新的运动信息。The merging candidates may be pieces of motion information of temporal candidates and/or spatial candidates. Also, the merge candidate list may include new merge candidates generated by combining merge candidates already existing in the merge candidate list. In other words, the merge candidate list may include new motion information generated by combining pieces of motion information previously existing in the merge candidate list.

合并候选可以是推导帧间预测信息的特定模式。合并候选可以是指示推导帧间预测信息的特定模式的信息。可根据合并候选所指示的特定模式来推导目标块的帧间预测信息。此外,所述特定模式可包括推导一系列帧间预测信息的处理。这种特定模式可以是帧间预测信息推导模式或运动信息推导模式。A merge candidate may be a specific mode in which inter prediction information is derived. The merge candidate may be information indicating a specific mode of deriving inter prediction information. The inter prediction information of the target block may be derived according to the specific mode indicated by the merge candidate. Furthermore, the specific mode may include a process of deriving a series of inter prediction information. This specific mode may be an inter prediction information derivation mode or a motion information derivation mode.

可根据通过合并索引在合并候选列表中的合并候选中选择的合并候选所指示的模式来推导目标块的帧间预测信息。The inter prediction information of the target block may be derived according to the mode indicated by the merge candidate selected from among the merge candidates in the merge candidate list by the merge index.

例如,合并候选列表中的运动信息推导模式可以是以下模式中的至少一个:1)针对子块单元的运动信息推导模式;2)仿射运动信息推导模式。此外,合并候选列表可包括零矢量的运动信息。零矢量也可被称为“零合并候选”。For example, the motion information derivation mode in the merge candidate list may be at least one of the following modes: 1) a motion information derivation mode for sub-block units; 2) an affine motion information derivation mode. Also, the merge candidate list may include motion information of the zero vector. A zero vector may also be referred to as a "zero merge candidate".

换句话说,合并候选列表中的多条运动信息可以是以下信息中的至少一个:1)空间候选的运动信息、2)时间候选的运动信息、3)通过对先前存在于合并候选列表中的多条运动信息进行组合而生成的运动信息、以及4)零矢量。In other words, the pieces of motion information in the merge candidate list may be at least one of the following information: 1) motion information of spatial candidates, 2) motion information of temporal candidates, 3) motion information of Motion information generated by combining a plurality of pieces of motion information, and 4) a zero vector.

运动信息可包括1)运动矢量、2)参考画面索引和3)参考方向。参考方向也可被称为“帧间预测指示符”。参考方向可以是单向或双向。单向参考方向可指示L0预测或L1预测。The motion information may include 1) a motion vector, 2) a reference picture index, and 3) a reference direction. The reference direction may also be referred to as an "inter prediction indicator". The reference direction can be unidirectional or bidirectional. A unidirectional reference direction may indicate L0 prediction or L1 prediction.

可在执行合并模式下的预测之前创建合并候选列表。A merge candidate list may be created before prediction in merge mode is performed.

可预先定义合并候选列表中的合并候选的数量。编码设备100和解码设备200中的每一个可根据预定义的方案和预定义的优先级将合并候选添加到合并候选列表,使得合并候选列表具有预定义数量的合并候选。可使用预定义的方案和预定义的优先级将编码设备100的合并候选列表和解码设备200的合并候选列表制作为彼此相同。The number of merge candidates in the merge candidate list may be predefined. Each of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may add merging candidates to the merging candidate list according to a predefined scheme and a predefined priority so that the merging candidate list has a predefined number of merging candidates. The merging candidate list of the encoding apparatus 100 and the merging candidate list of the decoding apparatus 200 may be made identical to each other using a predefined scheme and a predefined priority.

可基于CU或PU来应用合并。当基于CU或PU执行合并时,编码设备100可将包括预定义的信息的比特流发送到解码设备200。例如,所述预定义的信息可包含1)指示是否针对各个块分区执行合并的信息、以及2)关于在作为针对目标块的空间候选和/或时间候选的块之中的将被执行合并的块的信息。Merging may be applied on a CU or PU basis. When combining is performed on a CU or PU basis, the encoding apparatus 100 may transmit a bitstream including predefined information to the decoding apparatus 200 . For example, the predefined information may include 1) information indicating whether or not to perform merging for each block partition, and 2) information on blocks to be merged among blocks that are spatial candidates and/or temporal candidates for the target block block information.

2-2)使用合并候选列表搜索运动矢量2-2) Search motion vector using merge candidate list

编码设备100可确定将被用于对目标块进行编码的合并候选。例如,编码设备100可使用合并候选列表中的合并候选对目标块执行预测,并且可生成针对合并候选的残差块。编码设备100可使用在预测和残差块的编码中生成最小代价的合并候选来对目标块进行编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may determine merge candidates to be used for encoding the target block. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 may perform prediction on the target block using the merge candidates in the merge candidate list, and may generate a residual block for the merge candidates. The encoding apparatus 100 may encode the target block using a merge candidate that generates the least cost in encoding of prediction and residual blocks.

此外,编码设备100可确定是否使用合并模式对目标块进行编码。Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine whether to encode the target block using the merge mode.

2-3)对帧间预测信息的传输2-3) Transmission of inter-frame prediction information

编码设备100可生成包括帧间预测所需的帧间预测信息的比特流。编码设备100可通过对帧间预测信息执行熵编码来生成经熵编码的帧间预测信息,并且可将包括经熵编码的帧间预测信息的比特流发送到解码设备200。经熵编码的帧间预测信息可由编码设备100通过比特流用信号传送到解码设备200。The encoding apparatus 100 may generate a bitstream including inter prediction information required for inter prediction. The encoding apparatus 100 may generate entropy-encoded inter-prediction information by performing entropy encoding on the inter-prediction information, and may transmit a bitstream including the entropy-encoded inter-prediction information to the decoding apparatus 200 . The entropy-encoded inter prediction information may be signaled by the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream.

解码设备200可使用比特流的帧间预测信息对目标块执行帧间预测。The decoding apparatus 200 may perform inter prediction on the target block using the inter prediction information of the bitstream.

帧间预测信息可包含1)指示合并模式是否被使用的模式信息和2)合并索引。The inter prediction information may include 1) mode information indicating whether a merge mode is used and 2) a merge index.

此外,帧间预测信息可包含残差信号。Furthermore, the inter prediction information may include residual signals.

解码设备200可仅在模式信息指示合并模式被使用时从比特流获取合并索引。The decoding apparatus 200 may acquire the merge index from the bitstream only when the mode information indicates that the merge mode is used.

模式信息可以是合并标志。模式信息的单位可以是块。关于块的信息可包括模式信息,并且模式信息可指示合并模式是否被应用于块。The mode information may be a merge flag. The unit of mode information may be a block. The information about the block may include mode information, and the mode information may indicate whether the merge mode is applied to the block.

合并索引可指示在合并候选列表中包括的合并候选之中的将被用于对目标块进行预测的合并候选。可选地,合并索引可指示在与目标块在空间上或时间上相邻的邻近块之中的将与目标块合并的块。The merge index may indicate a merge candidate to be used for prediction of the target block among the merge candidates included in the merge candidate list. Alternatively, the merge index may indicate a block to be merged with the target block among neighboring blocks that are spatially or temporally adjacent to the target block.

编码设备100可选择合并候选列表中包括的合并候选中的具有最高编码性能的合并候选,并且将合并索引的值设置为指示所选择的合并候选。The encoding apparatus 100 may select the merge candidate with the highest encoding performance among the merge candidates included in the merge candidate list, and set the value of the merge index to indicate the selected merge candidate.

2-4)使用帧间预测信息的合并模式的帧间预测2-4) Inter prediction of merge mode using inter prediction information

解码设备200可使用在合并候选列表中包括的合并候选之中的由合并索引指示的合并候选对目标块执行预测。The decoding apparatus 200 may perform prediction on the target block using the merging candidate indicated by the merging index among the merging candidates included in the merging candidate list.

可通过由合并索引指示的合并候选的运动矢量、参考画面索引和参考方向来指定目标块的运动矢量。The motion vector of the target block may be specified by the motion vector of the merge candidate indicated by the merge index, the reference picture index, and the reference direction.

3)跳过模式3) Skip mode

跳过模式可以是将空间候选的运动信息或时间候选的运动信息在没有改变的情况下应用于目标块的模式。此外,跳过模式可以是不使用残差信号的模式。换句话说,当使用跳过模式时,重建块可以是预测块。The skip mode may be a mode in which motion information of a spatial candidate or motion information of a temporal candidate is applied to the target block without change. Also, the skip mode may be a mode in which the residual signal is not used. In other words, when the skip mode is used, the reconstructed block may be the predicted block.

合并模式与跳过模式之间的差异在于是否发送或使用残差信号。也就是说,除了不发送或使用残差信号之外,跳过模式可类似于合并模式。The difference between merge mode and skip mode is whether a residual signal is sent or used. That is, skip mode may be similar to merge mode, except that no residual signal is sent or used.

当使用跳过模式时,编码设备100可通过比特流将与在作为空间候选或时间候选的块之中的其运动信息将被用作目标块的运动信息的块有关的信息发送到解码设备200。编码设备100可通过对该信息执行熵编码来生成经熵编码的信息,并且可通过比特流将经熵编码的信息用信号传送到解码设备200。When the skip mode is used, the encoding apparatus 100 may transmit, to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream, information about a block whose motion information is to be used as the motion information of the target block among the blocks that are spatial candidates or temporal candidates . The encoding apparatus 100 may generate entropy-encoded information by performing entropy encoding on the information, and may signal the entropy-encoded information to the decoding apparatus 200 through a bitstream.

此外,当使用跳过模式时,编码设备100可不将其它语法信息(诸如MVD)发送到解码设备200。例如,当使用跳过模式时,编码设备100可不将与MVC、编码块标志和变换系数等级中的至少一个相关的语法元素用信号传送到解码设备200。Also, when the skip mode is used, the encoding apparatus 100 may not transmit other syntax information such as MVD to the decoding apparatus 200 . For example, when the skip mode is used, the encoding apparatus 100 may not signal syntax elements related to at least one of MVC, encoding block flags, and transform coefficient levels to the decoding apparatus 200 .

3-1)创建合并候选列表3-1) Create a merge candidate list

跳过模式也可使用合并候选列表。换句话说,可在合并模式和跳过模式两者中使用合并候选列表。在这方面,合并候选列表也可被称为“跳过候选列表”或“合并/跳过候选列表”。The skip mode can also use a merge candidate list. In other words, the merge candidate list can be used in both merge mode and skip mode. In this regard, the merge candidate list may also be referred to as a "skip candidate list" or a "merge/skip candidate list".

可选地,跳过模式可使用与合并模式的候选列表不同的额外候选列表。在这种情况下,在以下描述中,可分别用跳过候选列表和跳过候选来替换合并候选列表和合并候选。Optionally, skip mode may use an additional candidate list that is different from that of merge mode. In this case, in the following description, the merge candidate list and the merge candidate may be replaced with a skip candidate list and a skip candidate, respectively.

可在执行跳过模式下的预测之前创建合并候选列表。A merge candidate list may be created before prediction in skip mode is performed.

3-2)使用合并候选列表搜索运动矢量3-2) Search motion vector using merge candidate list

编码设备100可确定将被用于对目标块进行编码的合并候选。例如,编码设备100可使用合并候选列表中的合并候选对目标块执行预测。编码设备100可使用在预测中生成最小代价的合并候选对目标块进行编码。The encoding apparatus 100 may determine merge candidates to be used for encoding the target block. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 may perform prediction on the target block using merge candidates in the merge candidate list. The encoding apparatus 100 may encode the target block using a merge candidate that generates the least cost in prediction.

此外,编码设备100可确定是否使用跳过模式对目标块进行编码。Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine whether to encode the target block using the skip mode.

3-3)对帧间预测信息的传输3-3) Transmission of inter-frame prediction information

编码设备100可生成包括帧间预测所需的帧间预测信息的比特流。解码设备200可使用比特流的帧间预测信息对目标块执行帧间预测。The encoding apparatus 100 may generate a bitstream including inter prediction information required for inter prediction. The decoding apparatus 200 may perform inter prediction on the target block using the inter prediction information of the bitstream.

帧间预测信息可包括1)指示跳过模式是否被使用的模式信息和2)跳过索引。The inter prediction information may include 1) mode information indicating whether a skip mode is used and 2) a skip index.

跳过索引可与以上描述的合并索引相同。The skip index may be the same as the merge index described above.

当使用跳过模式时,可在不使用残差信号的情况下对目标块进行编码。帧间预测信息可不包含残差信号。可选地,比特流可不包括残差信号。When using skip mode, the target block can be encoded without using a residual signal. The inter prediction information may not include residual signals. Alternatively, the bitstream may not include a residual signal.

解码设备200可仅在模式信息指示跳过模式被使用时从比特流获取跳过索引。如上所述,合并索引和跳过索引可彼此相同。解码设备200可仅在模式信息指示合并模式或跳过模式被使用时从比特流获取跳过索引。The decoding apparatus 200 may acquire the skip index from the bitstream only when the mode information indicates that the skip mode is used. As described above, the merge index and the skip index may be the same as each other. The decoding apparatus 200 may acquire the skip index from the bitstream only when the mode information indicates that the merge mode or the skip mode is used.

跳过索引可指示在合并候选列表中包括的合并候选之中的将被用于对目标块进行预测的合并候选。The skip index may indicate a merging candidate to be used for prediction of the target block among the merging candidates included in the merging candidate list.

3-4)使用帧间预测信息的跳过模式下的帧间预测3-4) Inter prediction in skip mode using inter prediction information

解码设备200可使用在合并候选列表中包括的合并候选之中的由跳过索引指示的合并候选对目标块执行预测。The decoding apparatus 200 may perform prediction on the target block using the merge candidate indicated by the skip index among the merge candidates included in the merge candidate list.

可通过由跳过索引指示的合并候选的运动矢量、参考画面索引和参考方向来指定目标块的运动矢量。The motion vector of the target block may be specified by the motion vector of the merge candidate indicated by the skip index, the reference picture index, and the reference direction.

4)当前画面参考模式4) Current screen reference mode

当前画面参考模式可表示这样的预测模式:该预测模式使用目标块所属的目标画面中的先前重建的区域。The current picture reference mode may represent a prediction mode that uses a previously reconstructed region in the target picture to which the target block belongs.

可使用用于指定先前重建的区域的运动矢量。可使用目标块的参考画面索引来确定目标块是否已在当前画面参考模式下被编码。Motion vectors that specify previously reconstructed regions can be used. The reference picture index of the target block may be used to determine whether the target block has been encoded in the current picture reference mode.

指示目标块是否是以当前画面参考模式被编码的块的标志或索引可由编码设备100用信号传送到解码设备200。可选地,可通过目标块的参考画面索引来推断目标块是否是以当前画面参考模式被编码的块。A flag or index indicating whether the target block is a block encoded in the current picture reference mode may be signaled by the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . Alternatively, whether the target block is a block encoded in the current picture reference mode may be inferred from the reference picture index of the target block.

当目标块以当前画面参考模式被编码时,当前画面可存在于针对目标块的参考画面列表中的固定位置或任意位置。When the target block is encoded in the current picture reference mode, the current picture may exist at a fixed position or an arbitrary position in the reference picture list for the target block.

例如,所述固定位置可以是参考画面索引是0的位置或最后位置。For example, the fixed position may be the position where the reference picture index is 0 or the last position.

在目标画面存在于参考画面列表中的任意位置时,指示这样的任意位置的额外参考画面索引可由编码设备100用信号传送到解码设备200。When a target picture exists at an arbitrary position in the reference picture list, an additional reference picture index indicating such an arbitrary position may be signaled by the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 .

在以上描述的AMVP模式、合并模式和跳过模式中,可使用列表的索引来指定在列表中的多条运动信息之中的将被用于对目标块进行预测的运动信息。In the AMVP mode, merge mode, and skip mode described above, motion information to be used for prediction of a target block among pieces of motion information in the list may be specified using an index of the list.

为了提高编码效率,编码设备100可仅用信号传送在列表中的元素之中的在对目标块的帧间预测中生成最小代价的元素的索引。编码设备100可对该索引进行编码,并且可用信号传送编码后的索引。In order to improve encoding efficiency, the encoding apparatus 100 may signal only an index of an element that generates a minimum cost in inter prediction on the target block among the elements in the list. The encoding apparatus 100 may encode the index, and may signal the encoded index.

因此,必须能够由编码设备100和解码设备200使用相同的方案基于相同的数据来推导以上描述的列表(即,预测运动矢量候选列表和合并候选列表)。这里,所述相同的数据可包括重建画面和重建块。此外,为了使用索引指定元素,必须固定列表中的元素的顺序。Therefore, it must be possible to derive the above-described lists (ie, the motion vector predictor candidate list and the merge candidate list) based on the same data using the same scheme by the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 . Here, the same data may include reconstructed pictures and reconstructed blocks. Also, in order to specify an element using an index, the order of the elements in the list must be fixed.

图10示出根据实施例的空间候选。FIG. 10 shows spatial candidates according to an embodiment.

在图10中,示出了空间候选的位置。In Fig. 10, the positions of the spatial candidates are shown.

在图的中央处的大块可表示目标块。五个小块可表示空间候选。The large block at the center of the graph may represent the target block. Five tiles can represent spatial candidates.

目标块的坐标可以是(xP,yP),目标块的尺寸可用(nPSW,nPSH)来表示。The coordinates of the target block can be (xP, yP), and the size of the target block can be represented by (nPSW, nPSH).

空间候选A0可以是与目标块的左下角相邻的块。A0可以是占有位于坐标(xP-1,yP+nPSH+1)处的像素的块。The spatial candidate A 0 may be a block adjacent to the lower left corner of the target block. A 0 may be a block occupying the pixel located at coordinates (xP-1, yP+nPSH+1).

空间坐标A1可以是与目标块的左侧相邻的块。A1可以是在与目标块的左侧相邻的块之中的最下方的块。可选地,A1可以是与A0的顶部相邻的块。A1可以是占有位于坐标(xP-1,yP+nPSH)处的像素的块。 The spatial coordinate A1 may be the block adjacent to the left of the target block. A 1 may be the lowermost block among the blocks adjacent to the left of the target block. Alternatively, A1 may be the block adjacent to the top of A0 . A1 may be a block occupying the pixel located at coordinates (xP-1, yP+nPSH).

空间候选B0可以是与目标块的右上角相邻的块。B0可以是占有位于坐标(xP+nPSW+1,yP-1)处的像素的块。The spatial candidate B 0 may be a block adjacent to the upper right corner of the target block. B 0 may be a block occupying the pixel located at coordinates (xP+nPSW+1, yP-1).

空间候选B1可以是与目标块的顶部相邻的块。B1可以是在与目标块的顶部相邻的块之中的最右侧的块。可选地,B1可以是与B0的左侧相邻的块。B1可以是占有位于坐标(xP+nPSW,yP-1)处的像素的块。The spatial candidate B1 may be a block adjacent to the top of the target block. B 1 may be the rightmost block among the blocks adjacent to the top of the target block. Alternatively, B1 may be the block adjacent to the left of B0 . B 1 may be a block occupying the pixel located at coordinates (xP+nPSW, yP-1).

空间候选B2可以是与目标块的左上角相邻的块。B2可以是占有位于坐标(xP-1,yP-1)处的像素的块。The spatial candidate B2 may be a block adjacent to the upper left corner of the target block. B2 may be a block occupying the pixel located at coordinates (xP-1, yP-1).

对空间候选和时间候选的可用性的确定Determination of availability of spatial and temporal candidates

为了将空间候选的运动信息或时间候选的运动信息包括在列表中,必须确定空间候选的运动信息或时间候选的运动信息是否可用。In order to include the motion information of the spatial candidate or the motion information of the temporal candidate in the list, it must be determined whether the motion information of the spatial candidate or the motion information of the temporal candidate is available.

在下文中,候选块可包括空间候选和时间候选。Hereinafter, candidate blocks may include spatial candidates and temporal candidates.

例如,可通过顺序地应用以下步骤1)至步骤4)来执行所述确定。For example, the determination may be performed by sequentially applying the following steps 1) to 4).

步骤1)当包括候选块的PU位于画面的边界外时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。表述“可用性被设置为假”可具有与“设置为不可用”相同的含义。Step 1) When the PU including the candidate block is located outside the boundary of the picture, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false". The expression "availability is set to false" may have the same meaning as "set to unavailable".

步骤2)当包括候选块的PU位于条带的边界外时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。当目标块和候选块位于不同条带中时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。Step 2) When the PU including the candidate block is located outside the boundary of the slice, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false". When the target block and the candidate block are located in different slices, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false".

步骤3)当包括候选块的PU位于并行块的边界外时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。当目标块和候选块位于不同并行块中时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。Step 3) When the PU including the candidate block is located outside the boundary of the parallel block, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false". When the target block and the candidate block are located in different parallel blocks, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false".

步骤4)当包括候选块的PU的预测模式是帧内预测模式时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。当包括候选块的PU不使用帧间预测时,候选块的可用性可被设置为“假”。Step 4) When the prediction mode of the PU including the candidate block is the intra prediction mode, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false". When the PU including the candidate block does not use inter prediction, the availability of the candidate block may be set to "false".

图11示出根据实施例的将空间候选的运动信息添加到合并列表的顺序。FIG. 11 illustrates an order of adding motion information of spatial candidates to a merge list according to an embodiment.

如图11中所示,当空间候选的多条运动信息被添加到合并列表时,可使用A1、B1、B0、A0和B2的顺序。也就是说,可按照A1、B1、B0、A0和B2的顺序将可用空间候选的多条运动信息添加到合并列表。As shown in FIG. 11 , when pieces of motion information of spatial candidates are added to the merge list, the order of A 1 , B 1 , B 0 , A 0 , and B 2 may be used. That is, pieces of motion information of available space candidates may be added to the merge list in the order of A 1 , B 1 , B 0 , A 0 , and B 2 .

用于在合并模式和跳过模式下推导合并列表的方法Methods for deriving merged lists in merge mode and skip mode

如上所述,可设置合并列表中的合并候选的最大数量。可用“N”来指示设置的最大数量。设置的数量可从编码设备100发送到解码设备200。条带的条带头可包括N。换句话说,可通过条带头来设置用于条带的目标块的合并列表中的合并候选的最大数量。例如,N的值基本上可以是5。As described above, the maximum number of merge candidates in the merge list can be set. "N" can be used to indicate the maximum number of settings. The set number may be transmitted from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . The strip header of the strip may include N. In other words, the maximum number of merge candidates in the merge list for the target block of the slice can be set by the slice header. For example, the value of N can be substantially 5.

可按照以下步骤1)至4)的顺序将多条运动信息(即,合并候选)添加到合并列表中。A plurality of pieces of motion information (ie, merge candidates) may be added to the merge list in the order of steps 1) to 4) below.

步骤1)在空间候选之中,可将可用空间候选添加到合并列表。可按照图10中示出的顺序来将可用空间候选的多条运动信息添加到合并列表。这里,当可用空间候选的运动信息与合并列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将可用空间候选的运动信息添加到合并列表。检查对应运动信息是否与列表中存在的其它运动信息重叠的操作可被简称为“重叠检查”。 Step 1) Among the space candidates, the available space candidates may be added to the merged list. The pieces of motion information of the available space candidates may be added to the merge list in the order shown in FIG. 10 . Here, when the motion information of the available space candidates overlaps with other motion information already existing in the merge list, the motion information of the available space candidates may not be added to the merge list. The operation of checking whether the corresponding motion information overlaps with other motion information existing in the list may be simply referred to as "overlap checking".

被添加的运动信息的最大条数可以是N。The maximum number of pieces of motion information to be added may be N.

步骤2)当合并列表中的运动信息的条数小于N并且时间候选可用时,可将时间候选的运动信息添加到合并列表。这里,当可用时间候选的运动信息与合并列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将时间候选的运动信息添加到合并列表。 Step 2) When the number of pieces of motion information in the merge list is less than N and the temporal candidates are available, the motion information of the temporal candidates can be added to the merge list. Here, when the motion information of the available temporal candidates overlaps with other motion information already existing in the merge list, the motion information of the temporal candidates may not be added to the merge list.

步骤3)当合并列表中的运动信息的条数小于N并且目标条带的类型是“B”时,可将通过组合的双向预测(双预测)而生成的组合运动信息添加到合并列表。 Step 3) When the number of pieces of motion information in the merge list is less than N and the type of the target slice is "B", the combined motion information generated by combined bidirectional prediction (bi-prediction) may be added to the merge list.

目标条带可以是包括目标块的条带。The target slice may be a slice including target blocks.

组合运动信息可以是L0运动信息和L1运动信息的组合。L0运动信息可以是仅参照参考画面列表L0的运动信息。L1运动信息可以是仅参照参考画面列表L1的运动信息。The combined motion information may be a combination of L0 motion information and L1 motion information. The L0 motion information may be motion information referring only to the reference picture list L0. The L1 motion information may be motion information referring only to the reference picture list L1.

在合并列表中,可存在一条或更多条L0运动信息。此外,在合并列表中,可存在一条或更多条L1运动信息。In the merged list, there may be one or more pieces of L0 motion information. Also, in the merged list, there may be one or more pieces of L1 motion information.

组合运动信息可包括一条或更多条组合运动信息。当生成组合运动信息时,可预先定义所述一条或更多条L0运动信息和所述一条或更多条L1运动信息之中的将被用于生成组合运动信息的步骤的L0运动信息和L1运动信息。可经由使用合并列表中的一对不同运动信息的组合的双向预测按照预定义的顺序来生成一条或更多条组合运动信息。所述一对不同运动信息中的一条运动信息可以是L0运动信息,并且所述一对不同运动信息中的另一条运动信息可以是L1运动信息。The combined motion information may include one or more pieces of combined motion information. When generating combined motion information, L0 motion information and L1 to be used in the step of generating combined motion information among the one or more pieces of L0 motion information and the one or more pieces of L1 motion information may be predefined sports information. One or more pieces of combined motion information may be generated in a predefined order via bidirectional prediction using a combination of a pair of different motion information in the merged list. One piece of motion information in the pair of different motion information may be L0 motion information, and the other piece of motion information in the pair of different motion information may be L1 motion information.

例如,被添加有最高优先级的组合运动信息可以是具有合并索引0的L0运动信息和具有合并索引1的L1运动信息的组合。当具有合并索引0的运动信息不是L0运动信息时或者当具有合并索引1的运动信息不是L1运动信息时,可既不生成也不添加组合运动信息。接下来,被添加有下一优先级的组合运动信息可以是具有合并索引1的L0运动信息和具有合并索引0的L1运动信息的组合。随后的详细组合可符合视频编码/解码领域的其它组合。For example, the combined motion information added with the highest priority may be a combination of L0 motion information with merge index 0 and L1 motion information with merge index 1. When motion information with merge index 0 is not L0 motion information or when motion information with merge index 1 is not L1 motion information, combined motion information may neither be generated nor added. Next, the combined motion information added with the next priority may be a combination of L0 motion information with merge index 1 and L1 motion information with merge index 0. The detailed combinations that follow may conform to other combinations in the field of video encoding/decoding.

这里,当组合运动信息与合并列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将组合运动信息添加到合并列表。Here, when the combined motion information overlaps with other motion information already existing in the merge list, the combined motion information may not be added to the merge list.

步骤4)当合并列表中的运动信息的条数小于N时,可将零矢量的运动信息添加到合并列表。 Step 4) When the number of pieces of motion information in the merge list is less than N, the motion information of the zero vector can be added to the merge list.

零矢量运动信息可以是运动矢量是零矢量的运动信息。The zero vector motion information may be motion information in which the motion vector is a zero vector.

零矢量运动信息的条数可以是一个或更多个。一条或更多条零矢量运动信息的参考画面索引可彼此不同。例如,第一零矢量运动信息的参考画面索引的值可以是0。第二零矢量运动信息的参考画面索引的值可以是1。The number of pieces of zero vector motion information may be one or more. The reference picture indices of one or more pieces of zero vector motion information may be different from each other. For example, the value of the reference picture index of the first zero vector motion information may be 0. The value of the reference picture index of the second zero vector motion information may be 1.

零矢量运动信息的条数可与参考画面列表中的参考画面的数量相同。The number of pieces of zero vector motion information may be the same as the number of reference pictures in the reference picture list.

零矢量运动信息的参考方向可以是双向的。两个运动矢量可以是零矢量。零矢量运动信息的条数可以是参考画面列表L0中的参考画面的数量和参考画面列表L1中的参考画面的数量中较小的一个。可选地,当参考画面列表L0中的参考画面的数量和参考画面列表L1中的参考画面的数量彼此不同时,作为单向的参考方向可被用于可仅应用于单个参考画面列表的参考画面索引。The reference direction of the zero vector motion information can be bidirectional. The two motion vectors can be zero vectors. The number of pieces of zero vector motion information may be the smaller one of the number of reference pictures in the reference picture list L0 and the number of reference pictures in the reference picture list L1. Alternatively, when the number of reference pictures in the reference picture list L0 and the number of reference pictures in the reference picture list L1 are different from each other, a reference direction that is a unidirectional can be used for a reference that can only be applied to a single reference picture list screen index.

编码设备100和/或解码设备200可随后将零矢量运动信息添加到合并列表,同时改变参考画面索引。The encoding apparatus 100 and/or the decoding apparatus 200 may then add the zero vector motion information to the merge list while changing the reference picture index.

当零矢量运动信息与合并列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将零矢量运动信息添加到合并列表。When the zero vector motion information overlaps with other motion information already present in the merge list, the zero vector motion information may not be added to the merge list.

上述步骤1)至步骤4)的顺序仅是示例性的,并且可被改变。此外,可根据预定义的条件省略以上步骤中的一些步骤。The order of the above steps 1) to 4) is only exemplary and may be changed. Furthermore, some of the above steps may be omitted according to predefined conditions.

用于在AMVP模式下推导预测运动矢量候选列表的方法Method for deriving motion vector predictor candidate list in AMVP mode

可预先定义在预测运动矢量候选列表中的预测运动矢量候选的最大数量。可用N来指示预定义的最大数量。例如,预定义的最大数量可以是2。The maximum number of motion vector predictor candidates in the motion vector predictor candidate list may be predefined. N can be used to indicate a predefined maximum number. For example, the predefined maximum number can be 2.

可按照以下的步骤1)至步骤3)的顺序将多条运动信息(即,预测运动矢量候选)添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。A plurality of pieces of motion information (ie, motion vector predictor candidates) may be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list in the order of step 1) to step 3) below.

步骤1)可将空间候选之中的可用空间候选添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。空间候选可包括第一空间候选和第二空间候选。 Step 1) The available spatial candidates among the spatial candidates may be added to the predicted motion vector candidate list. The spatial candidates may include a first spatial candidate and a second spatial candidate.

第一空间候选可以是A0、A1、经缩放的A0和经缩放的A1中的一个。第二空间候选可以是B0、B1、B2、经缩放的B0、经缩放的B1和经缩放的B2中的一个。The first spatial candidate may be one of A 0 , A 1 , scaled A 0 , and scaled A 1 . The second spatial candidate may be one of B 0 , B 1 , B 2 , scaled B 0 , scaled B 1 , and scaled B 2 .

可按照第一空间候选和第二空间候选的顺序将可用空间候选的多条运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。在这种情况下,当可用空间候选的运动信息与预测运动矢量候选列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将可用空间候选的运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。换句话说,当N的值是2时,如果第二空间候选的运动信息与第一空间候选的运动信息相同,则可不将第二空间候选的运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。The pieces of motion information of the available spatial candidates may be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list in the order of the first spatial candidate and the second spatial candidate. In this case, when the motion information of the available space candidates overlaps with other motion information already existing in the motion vector predictor candidate list, the motion information of the available space candidates may not be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list. In other words, when the value of N is 2, if the motion information of the second spatial candidate is the same as that of the first spatial candidate, the motion information of the second spatial candidate may not be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list.

被添加的运动信息的最大条数可以是N。The maximum number of pieces of motion information to be added may be N.

步骤2)当预测运动矢量候选列表中的运动信息的条数小于N并且时间候选可用时,可将时间候选的运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。在这种情况下,当可用时间候选的运动信息与预测运动矢量候选列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将可用时间候选的运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。 Step 2) When the number of pieces of motion information in the motion vector predictor candidate list is less than N and the temporal candidates are available, the motion information of the temporal candidates may be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list. In this case, when the motion information of the available temporal candidates overlaps with other motion information already existing in the motion vector predictor candidate list, the motion information of the available temporal candidates may not be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list.

步骤3)当预测运动矢量候选列表中的运动信息的条数小于N时,可将零矢量运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。 Step 3) When the number of pieces of motion information in the motion vector predictor candidate list is less than N, zero vector motion information may be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list.

零矢量运动信息可包括一条或更多条零矢量运动信息。所述一条或更多条零矢量运动信息的参考画面索引可彼此不同。The zero vector motion information may include one or more pieces of zero vector motion information. The reference picture indices of the one or more pieces of zero vector motion information may be different from each other.

编码设备100和/或解码设备200可顺序地将多条零矢量运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表,同时改变参考画面索引。The encoding apparatus 100 and/or the decoding apparatus 200 may sequentially add pieces of zero vector motion information to the predicted motion vector candidate list while changing the reference picture index.

当零矢量运动信息与预测运动矢量候选列表中已经存在的其它运动信息重叠时,可不将零矢量运动信息添加到预测运动矢量候选列表。When the zero vector motion information overlaps with other motion information already present in the motion vector predictor candidate list, the zero vector motion information may not be added to the motion vector predictor candidate list.

以上结合合并列表做出的对零矢量运动信息的描述也可应用于零矢量运动信息。将省略其重复的描述。The description of the zero vector motion information made above in connection with the merge list can also be applied to the zero vector motion information. Duplicate descriptions thereof will be omitted.

以上描述的步骤1)至步骤3)的顺序仅是示例性的,并且可被改变。此外,可根据预定义的条件省略步骤中的一些步骤。The order of step 1) to step 3) described above is only exemplary and may be changed. Furthermore, some of the steps may be omitted according to predefined conditions.

图12示出根据示例的变换和量化处理。Figure 12 shows transform and quantization processing according to an example.

如图12中所示,可通过对残差信号执行变换和/或量化处理来生成量化的等级。As shown in FIG. 12, the quantized levels may be generated by performing transform and/or quantization processing on the residual signal.

残差信号可被生成为原始块与预测块之间的差。这里,预测块可以是经由帧内预测或帧间预测而生成的块。The residual signal may be generated as the difference between the original block and the predicted block. Here, the prediction block may be a block generated via intra prediction or inter prediction.

残差信号可通过作为量化过程的一部分的变换过程被变换为频域中的信号。The residual signal may be transformed into a signal in the frequency domain by a transformation process as part of the quantization process.

用于变换的变换核可包括各种DCT核,诸如离散余弦变换(DCT)类型2(DCT-II)和离散正弦变换(DST)核。Transform kernels for transforms may include various DCT kernels, such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) type 2 (DCT-II) and discrete sine transform (DST) kernels.

这些变换核可对残差信号执行可分离变换或二维(2D)不可分离变换。可分离变换可以是指示在水平方向和垂直方向中的每一个上对残差信号执行一维(1D)变换的变换。These transform kernels can perform a separable transform or a two-dimensional (2D) non-separable transform on the residual signal. The separable transform may be a transform indicating that a one-dimensional (1D) transform is performed on the residual signal in each of the horizontal and vertical directions.

自适应地用于1D变换的DCT类型和DST类型除了包括DCT-II之外还可包括DCT-V、DCT-VIII、DST-I和DST-VII,如下表3中所示。The DCT types and DST types adaptively used for the 1D transform may include DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I, and DST-VII in addition to DCT-II, as shown in Table 3 below.

表3table 3

变换集transform set 变换候选Transform candidates 00 DST-VII、DCT-VIIIDST-VII, DCT-VIII 11 DST-VII、DST-IDST-VII, DST-I 22 DST-VII、DCT-VDST-VII, DCT-V

如表3中所示,当将被用于变换的DCT类型或DST类型被推导时,可使用变换集。每个变换集可包括多个变换候选。每个变换候选可以是DCT类型或DST类型。As shown in Table 3, when the DCT type or DST type to be used for the transform is deduced, the transform set can be used. Each transform set may include multiple transform candidates. Each transform candidate may be of DCT type or DST type.

下表4示出根据帧内预测模式被应用于水平方向的变换集的示例。Table 4 below shows an example of transform sets applied to the horizontal direction according to intra prediction modes.

表4Table 4

Figure BDA0002589119230000531
Figure BDA0002589119230000531

Figure BDA0002589119230000541
Figure BDA0002589119230000541

在表4中,根据目标块的帧内预测模式来指示将被应用于残差信号的水平方向的每个变换集的数量。In Table 4, the number of each transform set to be applied to the horizontal direction of the residual signal is indicated according to the intra prediction mode of the target block.

下表5示出根据帧内预测模式被应用于残差信号的垂直方向的变换集的示例。Table 5 below shows an example of a transform set applied to the vertical direction of the residual signal according to the intra prediction mode.

表5table 5

Figure BDA0002589119230000542
Figure BDA0002589119230000542

Figure BDA0002589119230000551
Figure BDA0002589119230000551

如表4和表5中所例示,可根据目标块的帧内预测模式来预先定义将被应用于水平方向和垂直方向的变换集。编码设备100可使用包括在与目标块的帧内预测模式对应的变换集中的变换来对残差信号执行变换和逆变换。此外,解码设备200可使用包括在与目标块的帧内预测模式对应的变换集中的变换来对残差信号执行逆变换。As exemplified in Tables 4 and 5, transform sets to be applied to the horizontal and vertical directions may be predefined according to the intra prediction mode of the target block. The encoding apparatus 100 may perform transform and inverse transform on the residual signal using the transform included in the transform set corresponding to the intra prediction mode of the target block. Also, the decoding apparatus 200 may perform inverse transform on the residual signal using the transform included in the transform set corresponding to the intra prediction mode of the target block.

在变换和逆变换中,如表3、表4和表5中所例示,将被应用于残差信号的变换集可被确定,并且可不被用信号发送。可将变换指示信息从编码设备100用信号发送到解码设备200。变换指示信息可以是指示变换集中包括的将被应用于残差信号的多个变换候选中的哪一个被使用的信息。In transform and inverse transform, as exemplified in Table 3, Table 4, and Table 5, the set of transforms to be applied to the residual signal may be determined, and may not be signaled. The transformation indication information may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . The transform indication information may be information indicating which of a plurality of transform candidates included in the transform set to be applied to the residual signal is used.

如上所述,使用各种变换的方法可被应用于经由帧内预测或帧间预测所生成的残差信号。As described above, methods using various transforms may be applied to residual signals generated via intra prediction or inter prediction.

变换可包括首次变换和二次变换中的至少一个。可通过对残差信号执行首次变换来生成变换系数,并且可通过对变换系数执行二次变换来生成二次变换系数。The transformation may include at least one of a first transformation and a second transformation. The transform coefficients may be generated by performing a first transform on the residual signal, and the second transform coefficients may be generated by performing a second transform on the transform coefficients.

首次变换可被称为“主变换”。此外,首次变换也可被称为“自适应多变换(AMT)方案”。如上所述,AMT可表示将不同的变换应用于各个1D方向(即,垂直方向和水平方向)。The first transformation may be referred to as the "main transformation". Furthermore, the first transform may also be referred to as an "adaptive multi-transform (AMT) scheme". As described above, AMT may represent applying different transforms to each 1D direction (ie, vertical and horizontal).

二次变换可以是用于提高由首次变换生成的变换系数的能量集中的变换。类似于首次变换,二次变换可以是可分离变换或不可分离变换。这样的不可分离变换可以是不可分离二次变换(NSST)。The secondary transform may be a transform for increasing the energy concentration of the transform coefficients generated by the first transform. Similar to the first transform, the second transform can be a separable transform or a non-separable transform. Such a non-separable transform may be a non-separable quadratic transform (NSST).

可使用预定义的多种变换方法中的至少一种来执行首次变换。例如,所述预定义的多种变换方法可包括离散余弦变换(DCT)、离散正弦变换(DST)、Karhunen-Loeve变换(KLT)等。The first transformation may be performed using at least one of a number of predefined transformation methods. For example, the predefined multiple transform methods may include discrete cosine transform (DCT), discrete sine transform (DST), Karhunen-Loeve transform (KLT), and the like.

可对通过执行首次变换而生成的变换系数执行二次变换。The second transform may be performed on the transform coefficients generated by performing the first transform.

首次变换和二次变换可被应用于与亮度(luma)分量和色度(chroma)分量中的一个或更多个对应的信号分量。可根据针对目标块和/或邻近块的编码参数中的至少一个来确定是否应用首次变换和/或二次变换。例如,可根据目标块的尺寸和/或形状来确定是否应用首次变换和/或二次变换。The first transform and the second transform may be applied to signal components corresponding to one or more of a luma (luma) component and a chroma (chroma) component. Whether to apply the primary transform and/or the secondary transform may be determined according to at least one of encoding parameters for the target block and/or neighboring blocks. For example, whether to apply the primary transform and/or the secondary transform may be determined according to the size and/or shape of the target block.

可根据针对目标块和/或邻近块的编码参数中的至少一个来确定将被应用于首次变换和/或二次变换的变换方法。确定的变换方法还可指示首次变换和/或二次变换不被使用。The transform method to be applied to the first transform and/or the second transform may be determined according to at least one of encoding parameters for the target block and/or neighboring blocks. The determined transform method may also indicate that the first transform and/or the second transform is not used.

可选地,指示变换方法的变换信息可从编码设备100被用信号发送到解码设备200。例如,变换信息可包括将被用于首次变换和/或二次变换的变换的索引。Alternatively, transform information indicating the transform method may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 100 to the decoding apparatus 200 . For example, the transform information may include indices of transforms to be used for the first transform and/or the second transform.

可通过对通过执行首次变换和/或二次变换而生成的结果执行量化或者对残差信号执行量化来生成量化的等级。The level of quantization may be generated by performing quantization on the result generated by performing the first transform and/or the second transform, or by performing quantization on the residual signal.

图13示出根据示例的对角线扫描。Figure 13 shows a diagonal scan according to an example.

图14示出根据示例的水平扫描。FIG. 14 shows horizontal scanning according to an example.

图15示出根据示例的垂直扫描。FIG. 15 shows vertical scanning according to an example.

可根据帧内预测模式、块尺寸和块形状中的至少一个,经由(右上)对角线扫描、垂直扫描和水平扫描中的至少一个对量化的变换系数进行扫描。所述块可以是变换单元(TU)The quantized transform coefficients may be scanned via (top right) at least one of diagonal scanning, vertical scanning, and horizontal scanning according to at least one of intra prediction mode, block size, and block shape. The block may be a transform unit (TU)

每个扫描可在特定的开始点处启动,并且可在特定的结束点处终止。Each scan can start at a specific start point and can end at a specific end point.

例如,可通过使用图13的对角线扫描对块的系数进行扫描来将量化的变换系数改变为1D矢量形式。可选地,可根据块的尺寸和/或帧内预测模式使用图14的水平扫描或图15的垂直扫描,而不使用对角线扫描。For example, the quantized transform coefficients may be changed into 1D vector form by scanning the coefficients of the block using the diagonal scanning of FIG. 13 . Alternatively, the horizontal scan of FIG. 14 or the vertical scan of FIG. 15 may be used instead of the diagonal scan according to the size of the block and/or the intra prediction mode.

垂直扫描可以是在列方向上扫描2D块类型系数的操作。水平扫描可以是在行方向上扫描2D块类型系数的操作。Vertical scanning may be an operation of scanning 2D block type coefficients in the column direction. Horizontal scanning may be an operation of scanning 2D block type coefficients in the row direction.

换句话说,可根据块的尺寸和/或帧间预测模式来确定对角线扫描、垂直扫描和水平扫描中的哪一个将被使用。In other words, which of the diagonal scan, the vertical scan and the horizontal scan will be used may be determined according to the size of the block and/or the inter prediction mode.

如图13、图14和图15中所示,可沿着对角线方向、水平方向或垂直方向扫描量化的变换系数。As shown in FIGS. 13 , 14 and 15 , the quantized transform coefficients may be scanned in a diagonal direction, a horizontal direction, or a vertical direction.

量化的变换系数可由块形状表示。每个块可包括多个子块。可根据最小块尺寸或最小块形状来定义每个子块。The quantized transform coefficients may be represented by a block shape. Each block may include multiple sub-blocks. Each sub-block may be defined according to a minimum block size or minimum block shape.

在扫描中,根据扫描的类型或方向的扫描顺序可被首先应用于子块。此外,根据扫描的方向的扫描顺序可被应用于每个子块中的量化的变换系数。In scanning, a scanning order according to the type or direction of scanning may be applied to the sub-blocks first. Also, a scanning order according to the direction of scanning may be applied to the quantized transform coefficients in each sub-block.

例如,如图13、图14和图15中所示,当目标块的尺寸是8×8时,可通过对目标块的残差信号的首次变换、二次变换和量化来生成量化的变换系数。因此,可将三种类型的扫描顺序中的一种应用于四个4×4的子块,并且还可根据所述扫描顺序针对每个4×4的子块扫描量化的变换系数。For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 , 14 and 15 , when the size of the target block is 8×8, quantized transform coefficients may be generated by first transforming, second transforming, and quantizing the residual signal of the target block . Thus, one of three types of scan orders can be applied to the four 4x4 sub-blocks, and the quantized transform coefficients can also be scanned for each 4x4 sub-block according to the scan order.

经过扫描的量化的变换系数可被熵编码,并且比特流可包括经过熵编码的量化的变换系数。The scanned quantized transform coefficients may be entropy encoded, and the bitstream may include the entropy encoded quantized transform coefficients.

解码设备200可经由对比特流进行熵解码来生成量化的变换系数。可经由逆扫描按照2D块的形式对量化的变换系数进行排列。这里,作为逆扫描的方法,可执行右上对角扫描、垂直扫描和水平扫描中的至少一个。The decoding apparatus 200 may generate quantized transform coefficients via entropy decoding of the bitstream. The quantized transform coefficients may be arranged in 2D blocks via inverse scanning. Here, as a method of inverse scanning, at least one of upper-right diagonal scanning, vertical scanning, and horizontal scanning may be performed.

可对量化的变换系数执行反量化。可根据是否执行二次逆变换,对通过执行反量化而生成的结果执行二次逆变换。此外,可根据是否将执行首次逆变换,对通过执行二次逆变换而生成的结果执行首次逆变换。可通过对经由执行二次逆变换而生成的结果执行首次逆变换来生成重建的残差信号。Inverse quantization may be performed on the quantized transform coefficients. The result generated by performing inverse quantization may be subjected to inverse quadratic transformation according to whether or not inverse quadratic transformation is performed. Also, the first inverse transformation may be performed on the result generated by performing the second inverse transformation according to whether the first inverse transformation will be performed. The reconstructed residual signal may be generated by performing a first inverse transform on a result generated by performing a second inverse transform.

图16是根据实施例的编码设备的配置图。FIG. 16 is a configuration diagram of an encoding apparatus according to an embodiment.

编码设备1600可与以上描述的编码设备100对应。The encoding apparatus 1600 may correspond to the encoding apparatus 100 described above.

编码设备1600可包括通过总线1690彼此通信的处理单元1610、内存1630、用户界面(UI)输入装置1650、UI输出装置1660和存储器1640。电子装置1600还可包括连接到网络1699的通信单元1620。The encoding apparatus 1600 may include a processing unit 1610, a memory 1630, a user interface (UI) input device 1650, a UI output device 1660, and a memory 1640 in communication with each other through a bus 1690. The electronic device 1600 may also include a communication unit 1620 connected to the network 1699 .

处理单元1610可以是用于运行存储在内存1630或存储器1640中的处理指令的中央处理器(CPU)或半导体器件。处理单元1610可以是至少一个硬件处理器。The processing unit 1610 may be a central processing unit (CPU) or a semiconductor device for executing processing instructions stored in the memory 1630 or the memory 1640 . The processing unit 1610 may be at least one hardware processor.

处理单元1610可生成并处理被输入到编码设备1600的、从编码设备1600输出的、或者在编码设备1600中使用的信号、数据或信息,并且可执行与信号、数据或信息相关的检查、比较、确定等。换句话说,在实施例中,可由处理单元1610执行数据或信息的生成和处理以及与数据或信息相关的检查、比较和确定。The processing unit 1610 may generate and process signals, data, or information input to the encoding apparatus 1600, output from the encoding apparatus 1600, or used in the encoding apparatus 1600, and may perform inspection, comparison on the signals, data, or information , OK, etc. In other words, in an embodiment, the generation and processing of data or information and the checking, comparison and determination of data or information may be performed by the processing unit 1610 .

处理单元1610可包括帧间预测单元110、帧内预测单元120、切换器115、减法器125、变换单元130、量化单元140、熵编码单元150、反量化单元160、逆变换单元170、加法器175、滤波器单元180和参考画面缓冲器190。The processing unit 1610 may include an inter prediction unit 110, an intra prediction unit 120, a switch 115, a subtractor 125, a transform unit 130, a quantization unit 140, an entropy encoding unit 150, an inverse quantization unit 160, an inverse transform unit 170, an adder 175 , filter unit 180 and reference picture buffer 190 .

帧间预测单元110、帧内预测单元120、切换器115、减法器125、变换单元130、量化单元140、熵编码单元150、反量化单元160、逆变换单元170、加法器175、滤波器单元180和参考画面缓冲器190中的至少一些可以是程序模块,并且可与外部装置或系统进行通信。所述程序模块可以以操作系统、应用程序模块或其它程序模块的形式被包括在编码设备1600中。Inter prediction unit 110, intra prediction unit 120, switch 115, subtractor 125, transform unit 130, quantization unit 140, entropy encoding unit 150, inverse quantization unit 160, inverse transform unit 170, adder 175, filter unit At least some of 180 and reference picture buffer 190 may be program modules and may communicate with an external device or system. The program modules may be included in the encoding device 1600 in the form of an operating system, application program modules, or other program modules.

所述程序模块可被物理地存储在各种类型的公知的存储装置中。此外,所述程序模块中的至少一些也可被存储在能够与编码设备1200进行通信的远程存储装置中。The program modules may be physically stored in various types of well-known storage devices. Furthermore, at least some of the program modules may also be stored in a remote storage device capable of communicating with the encoding apparatus 1200 .

程序模块可包括但不限于用于执行根据实施例的功能或操作或者用于实现根据实施例的抽象数据类型的例程、子例程、程序、对象、组件和数据结构。Program modules may include, but are not limited to, routines, subroutines, programs, objects, components, and data structures for performing functions or operations according to embodiments or for implementing abstract data types according to embodiments.

可使用由编码设备1600的至少一个处理器运行的指令或代码来实现所述程序模块。The program modules may be implemented using instructions or code executed by at least one processor of the encoding device 1600 .

处理单元1610可运行帧间预测单元110、帧内预测单元120、切换器115、减法器125、变换单元130、量化单元140、熵编码单元150、反量化单元160、逆变换单元170、加法器175、滤波器单元180和参考画面缓冲器190中的指令或代码。Processing unit 1610 may operate inter prediction unit 110, intra prediction unit 120, switch 115, subtractor 125, transform unit 130, quantization unit 140, entropy encoding unit 150, inverse quantization unit 160, inverse transform unit 170, adders 175 , the filter unit 180 and the instructions or code in the reference picture buffer 190 .

存储单元可表示内存1630和/或存储器1640。内存1630和存储器1640中的每一个可以是各种类型的易失性或非易失性存储介质中的任意一种。例如,内存1630可包括只读存储器(ROM)1631和随机存取存储器(RAM)1632中的至少一个。The storage unit may represent memory 1630 and/or storage 1640 . Each of memory 1630 and storage 1640 may be any of various types of volatile or nonvolatile storage media. For example, the memory 1630 may include at least one of a read only memory (ROM) 1631 and a random access memory (RAM) 1632 .

存储单元可存储用于编码设备1600的操作的数据或信息。在实施例中,编码设备1600的数据或信息可被存储在存储单元中。The storage unit may store data or information used for the operation of the encoding apparatus 1600 . In an embodiment, the data or information of the encoding apparatus 1600 may be stored in a storage unit.

例如,存储单元可存储画面、块、列表、运动信息、帧间预测信息、比特流等。For example, the storage unit may store pictures, blocks, lists, motion information, inter prediction information, bitstreams, and the like.

编码设备1600可被实现在包括计算机可读存储介质的计算机系统中。The encoding apparatus 1600 may be implemented in a computer system including a computer-readable storage medium.

存储介质可存储编码设备1600的操作所需的至少一个模块。内存1630可存储至少一个模块,并且可被配置为使得所述至少一个模块由处理单元1610运行。The storage medium may store at least one module required for the operation of the encoding apparatus 1600 . The memory 1630 may store at least one module and may be configured such that the at least one module is executed by the processing unit 1610 .

可通过通信单元1620来执行与编码设备1600的数据或信息的通信相关的功能。Functions related to communication of data or information of the encoding apparatus 1600 may be performed through the communication unit 1620 .

例如,通信单元1620可将比特流发送到随后将描述的解码设备1600。For example, the communication unit 1620 may transmit the bitstream to the decoding apparatus 1600 which will be described later.

图17是根据实施例的解码设备的配置图。FIG. 17 is a configuration diagram of a decoding apparatus according to an embodiment.

解码设备1700可对应于以上描述的解码设备200。The decoding apparatus 1700 may correspond to the decoding apparatus 200 described above.

解码设备1700可包括通过总线1790彼此通信的处理单元1710、内存1730、用户界面(UI)输入装置1750、UI输出装置1760和存储器1740。解码设备1700还可包括连接到网络1799的通信单元1720。The decoding apparatus 1700 may include a processing unit 1710, a memory 1730, a user interface (UI) input device 1750, a UI output device 1760, and a memory 1740 in communication with each other through a bus 1790. The decoding device 1700 may also include a communication unit 1720 connected to the network 1799 .

处理单元1710可以是用于运行存储在内存1730或存储器1740中的处理指令的中央处理器(CPU)或半导体器件。处理单元1710可以是至少一个硬件处理器。The processing unit 1710 may be a central processing unit (CPU) or a semiconductor device for executing processing instructions stored in the memory 1730 or the memory 1740 . The processing unit 1710 may be at least one hardware processor.

处理单元1710可生成并处理被输入到解码设备1700的、从解码设备1700输出的、或者在解码设备1700中使用的信号、数据或信息,并且可执行与信号、数据或信息相关的检查、比较、确定等。换句话说,在实施例中,可由处理单元1710执行数据或信息的生成和处理以及与数据或信息相关的检查、比较和确定。The processing unit 1710 may generate and process signals, data or information input to the decoding apparatus 1700, output from the decoding apparatus 1700, or used in the decoding apparatus 1700, and may perform checking, comparison related to the signals, data or information , OK, etc. In other words, in an embodiment, the generation and processing of data or information and the checking, comparison and determination of data or information may be performed by the processing unit 1710 .

处理单元1710可包括熵解码单元210、反量化单元220、逆变换单元230、帧内预测单元240、帧间预测单元250、切换器245、加法器255、滤波器单元260和参考画面缓冲器270。The processing unit 1710 may include an entropy decoding unit 210 , an inverse quantization unit 220 , an inverse transform unit 230 , an intra prediction unit 240 , an inter prediction unit 250 , a switch 245 , an adder 255 , a filter unit 260 , and a reference picture buffer 270 .

解码设备200的熵解码单元210、反量化单元220、逆变换单元230、帧内预测单元240、帧间预测单元250、加法器255、切换器245、滤波器单元260和参考画面缓冲器270中的至少一些可以是程序模块,并且可与外部装置或系统进行通信。所述程序模块可以以操作系统、应用程序模块或其它程序模块的形式被包括在解码设备1700中。In the entropy decoding unit 210 , the inverse quantization unit 220 , the inverse transform unit 230 , the intra prediction unit 240 , the inter prediction unit 250 , the adder 255 , the switch 245 , the filter unit 260 and the reference picture buffer 270 of the decoding apparatus 200 At least some of the modules may be program modules and may communicate with external devices or systems. The program modules may be included in the decoding device 1700 in the form of an operating system, application program modules, or other program modules.

程序模块可被物理地存储在各种类型的公知的存储装置中。此外,所述程序模块中的至少一些也可被存储在能够与解码设备1700进行通信的远程存储装置中。Program modules may be physically stored in various types of well-known storage devices. Furthermore, at least some of the program modules may also be stored in a remote storage device capable of communicating with the decoding apparatus 1700 .

程序模块可包括但不限于用于执行根据实施例的功能或操作或者用于实现根据实施例的抽象数据类型的例程、子例程、程序、对象、组件和数据结构。Program modules may include, but are not limited to, routines, subroutines, programs, objects, components, and data structures for performing functions or operations according to embodiments or for implementing abstract data types according to embodiments.

可使用由解码设备1700的至少一个处理器运行的指令或代码来实现所述程序模块。The program modules may be implemented using instructions or code executed by at least one processor of the decoding apparatus 1700 .

处理单元1710可运行熵解码单元210、反量化单元220、逆变换单元230、帧内预测单元240、帧间预测单元250、切换器245、加法器255、滤波器单元260和参考画面缓冲器270中的指令或代码。Processing unit 1710 may operate entropy decoding unit 210 , inverse quantization unit 220 , inverse transform unit 230 , intra prediction unit 240 , inter prediction unit 250 , switch 245 , adder 255 , filter unit 260 , and reference picture buffer 270 instruction or code in .

存储单元可表示内存1730和/或存储器1740。内存1730和存储器1740中的每一个可以是各种类型的易失性或非易失性存储介质中的任意一种。例如,内存1730可包括ROM1731和RAM 1732中的至少一个。The storage unit may represent memory 1730 and/or storage 1740 . Each of memory 1730 and storage 1740 may be any of various types of volatile or non-volatile storage media. For example, the memory 1730 may include at least one of the ROM 1731 and the RAM 1732 .

存储单元可存储用于解码设备1700的操作的数据或信息。在实施例中,解码设备1700的数据或信息可被存储在存储单元中。The storage unit may store data or information for the operation of the decoding apparatus 1700 . In an embodiment, the data or information of the decoding apparatus 1700 may be stored in a storage unit.

例如,存储单元可存储画面、块、列表、运动信息、帧间预测信息、比特流等。For example, the storage unit may store pictures, blocks, lists, motion information, inter prediction information, bitstreams, and the like.

解码设备1700可被实现在包括计算机可读存储介质的计算机系统中。The decoding apparatus 1700 may be implemented in a computer system including a computer-readable storage medium.

存储介质可存储解码设备1700的操作所需的至少一个模块。内存1730可存储至少一个模块,并且可被配置为使得所述至少一个模块由处理单元1710运行。The storage medium may store at least one module required for the operation of the decoding apparatus 1700 . The memory 1730 may store at least one module and may be configured such that the at least one module is executed by the processing unit 1710 .

可通过通信单元1720来执行与解码设备1700的数据或信息的通信相关的功能。Functions related to communication of data or information of the decoding apparatus 1700 may be performed through the communication unit 1720 .

例如,通信单元1720可从编码设备1600接收比特流。For example, the communication unit 1720 may receive the bitstream from the encoding apparatus 1600 .

用于双向帧内预测的方法和设备Method and apparatus for bidirectional intra prediction

图18是根据实施例的双向帧内预测方法的流程图。18 is a flowchart of a bidirectional intra prediction method according to an embodiment.

双向帧内预测方法可由编码设备1600和/或解码设备1700执行。The bidirectional intra prediction method may be performed by the encoding apparatus 1600 and/or the decoding apparatus 1700 .

例如,编码设备1600可执行根据实施例的预测方法,以便将针对目标块和/或多个分区块的多种预测方法的效率进行比较,并且还可执行根据实施例的预测方法,以便生成针对目标块的重建块。For example, the encoding apparatus 1600 may perform the prediction method according to the embodiment in order to compare the efficiencies of the various prediction methods for the target block and/or the plurality of partition blocks, and may also perform the prediction method according to the embodiment in order to generate the prediction method for the target block and/or the plurality of partition blocks. The reconstructed block of the target block.

在实施例中,目标块可以是PU,或者可以是CTB、CU、PU、TU、子块、具有特定尺寸的块和具有预定义范围内的尺寸的块中的至少一个。可选地,目标块可以是编码的单元。In an embodiment, the target block may be a PU, or may be at least one of a CTB, a CU, a PU, a TU, a sub-block, a block with a certain size, and a block with a size within a predefined range. Alternatively, the target block may be an encoded unit.

例如,解码设备1700可执行根据实施例的预测方法,以便生成针对目标块的重建块。For example, the decoding apparatus 1700 may perform the prediction method according to the embodiment in order to generate a reconstructed block for the target block.

下面,术语“处理单元”可与编码设备1600的处理单元1610和/或解码设备1700的处理单元1710对应。Hereinafter, the term "processing unit" may correspond to the processing unit 1610 of the encoding apparatus 1600 and/or the processing unit 1710 of the decoding apparatus 1700.

在步骤1810,处理单元可确定将被应用于目标块的编码和/或解码的双向帧内预测模式。At step 1810, the processing unit may determine a bidirectional intra prediction mode to be applied to encoding and/or decoding of the target block.

处理单元可基于以下项中的至少一个确定和推导双向帧内预测模式:1)帧内预测模式指示符、2)单向/双向分类指示符、3)最可能模式(MPM)、4)位于在目标块的指定方向上的邻近块中的像素的可用性、以及5)邻近块的预测模式。The processing unit may determine and derive a bidirectional intra prediction mode based on at least one of: 1) an intra prediction mode indicator, 2) a unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator, 3) a most probable mode (MPM), 4) located at Availability of pixels in neighboring blocks in the specified direction of the target block, and 5) prediction modes of neighboring blocks.

在步骤1820,处理单元可通过使用所确定的双向帧内预测模式针对目标块执行双向帧内预测来确定针对目标块的预测块的预测值。At step 1820, the processing unit may determine a prediction value for a prediction block of the target block by performing bidirectional intra prediction on the target block using the determined bidirectional intra prediction mode.

在实施例中,双向帧内预测的两个方向可以是以相反方向实现的两个线性方向。例如,两个方向可以是45°角的方向和225°角的方向。In an embodiment, the two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be two linear directions implemented in opposite directions. For example, the two directions may be a direction at an angle of 45° and a direction at an angle of 225°.

在实施例中,双向帧内预测的两个方向可以是不共线地定向的两个不同方向。例如,两个方向可以是45°角的方向和90°角的方向。In an embodiment, the two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be two different directions that are not oriented collinearly. For example, the two directions may be a direction at an angle of 45° and a direction at an angle of 90°.

处理单元可在目标块的指定方向上生成至少一个虚拟邻近像素,并且可使用所述至少一个虚拟邻近像素针对目标块执行双向帧内预测。处理单元可基于所述至少一个虚拟邻近像素来推导预测块中的目标像素的预测值。指定方向可包括右方向和下方向中的一个或更多个。The processing unit may generate at least one virtual neighboring pixel in the specified direction of the target block, and may perform bidirectional intra prediction for the target block using the at least one virtual neighboring pixel. The processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel in the prediction block based on the at least one virtual neighboring pixel. The specified direction may include one or more of a right direction and a downward direction.

目标像素可以是作为编码和/或解码的目标的像素。The target pixel may be a pixel that is the target of encoding and/or decoding.

处理单元可使用以下项中的至少一个来推导目标块中的目标像素的预测值:1)位于双向帧内预测的两个方向上的邻近块中的像素、2)根据位于两个方向上的邻近块中的各个像素与目标像素之间的距离的权重、以及3)针对两个方向的权重。The processing unit may derive the predicted value for the target pixel in the target block using at least one of: 1) pixels in adjacent blocks located in both directions of bidirectional intra prediction, 2) based on A weight for the distance between each pixel in the neighboring block and the target pixel, and 3) a weight for both directions.

目标块中的目标像素的预测值可以是预测块中的像素的值。The predicted value of the target pixel in the target block may be the value of the pixel in the predicted block.

处理单元可使用推导出的预测值在帧内预测中执行编码和/或解码。The processing unit may use the derived prediction values to perform encoding and/or decoding in intra prediction.

在步骤1810,处理单元可基于与目标块相关的编码参数、目标画面的信息、目标条带的信息、量化参数、编码块标志(CBF)、目标块的尺寸、目标块的形式、应用于目标块的熵编码方法、目标块的邻近块的帧内预测模式和目标块的时间层等级中的至少一个来推导双向帧内预测模式。At step 1810, the processing unit may, based on coding parameters related to the target block, information of the target picture, information of the target slice, quantization parameters, coding block flag (CBF), size of the target block, form of the target block, applied to the target The bidirectional intra prediction mode is derived by at least one of an entropy coding method of the block, an intra prediction mode of neighboring blocks of the target block, and a temporal layer level of the target block.

可选地,在步骤1820,处理单元可基于与目标块相关的编码参数、目标画面的信息、目标条带的信息、量化参数、编码块标志(CBF)、目标块的尺寸、目标块的形式、应用于目标块的熵编码方法、目标块的邻近块的帧内预测模式和目标块的时间层等级中的至少一个来推导目标块中的目标像素的预测值。Optionally, in step 1820, the processing unit may be based on coding parameters related to the target block, information of the target picture, information of the target slice, quantization parameters, coding block flags (CBF), the size of the target block, the form of the target block , applied to at least one of an entropy coding method of the target block, an intra prediction mode of neighboring blocks of the target block, and a temporal layer level of the target block to derive a predicted value of a target pixel in the target block.

双向帧内预测模式的确定Determination of Bidirectional Intra Prediction Mode

在下文中,双向帧内预测模式可指示双向帧内预测的方向。术语“双向帧内预测模式”和“双向帧内预测的方向”可被用于具有相同的含义,并且可彼此互换地使用。Hereinafter, the bidirectional intra prediction mode may indicate the direction of bidirectional intra prediction. The terms "bidirectional intra prediction mode" and "direction of bidirectional intra prediction" may be used to have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably with each other.

图19示出根据示例的单向帧内预测模式。19 shows a unidirectional intra prediction mode according to an example.

图20示出根据示例的双向帧内预测模式。FIG. 20 shows a bidirectional intra prediction mode according to an example.

图21示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素的双向帧内预测模式。21 illustrates a bidirectional intra prediction mode using virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example.

处理单元可基于以下项中的至少一个确定和推导双向帧内预测模式:1)帧内预测模式指示符、2)单向/双向分类指示符、3)MPM、4)位于目标块的指定方向上的邻近块中的像素的可用性、以及5)邻近块的预测模式。The processing unit may determine and derive a bidirectional intra prediction mode based on at least one of: 1) an intra prediction mode indicator, 2) a unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator, 3) MPM, 4) in a specified direction of the target block Availability of pixels in neighboring blocks above, and 5) prediction mode of neighboring blocks.

如图19中所示,单向帧内预测模式可以是参考位于单个指定方向上的像素的帧内预测模式。As shown in FIG. 19 , the unidirectional intra prediction mode may be an intra prediction mode that refers to pixels located in a single specified direction.

如图20中所示,双向帧内预测模式可以是参考位于两个指定方向上的像素的帧内预测模式。As shown in FIG. 20 , the bidirectional intra prediction mode may be an intra prediction mode that refers to pixels located in two specified directions.

这里,将被参考的像素可以是与目标块相邻的像素。针对帧内预测将被参考的像素也可被称为“样点”。Here, the pixel to be referenced may be a pixel adjacent to the target block. Pixels to be referenced for intra prediction may also be referred to as "samples".

这里,术语“位于两个指定方向上的像素”可表示“位于第一指定方向上的像素和位于第二指定方向上的像素”。Here, the term "pixels located in two specified directions" may mean "pixels located in a first specified direction and pixels located in a second specified direction".

如图21中所示,在双向帧内预测模式下,可使用重建邻近块中的像素来生成位于目标块右侧或目标块下方的至少一个虚拟邻近像素。换句话说,至少一个虚拟邻近像素可位于目标块右侧或目标块下方。双向帧内预测模式可以是使用重建邻近块中的像素和虚拟邻近像素的参考位于两个指定方向上的像素的帧内预测模式。As shown in FIG. 21, in the bidirectional intra prediction mode, pixels in the reconstructed adjacent blocks may be used to generate at least one virtual adjacent pixel located to the right of or below the target block. In other words, at least one virtual neighboring pixel may be located to the right of the target block or below the target block. The bidirectional intra-prediction mode may be an intra-prediction mode using pixels in the reconstructed neighboring blocks and virtual neighboring pixels with reference to pixels located in two specified directions.

这里,位于目标块右侧的虚拟邻近像素可与目标块相邻并在目标块右侧。这里,位于目标块下方的虚拟邻近像素可与目标块相邻并在目标块下方。Here, virtual neighboring pixels located to the right of the target block may be adjacent to and to the right of the target block. Here, virtual neighboring pixels located below the target block may be adjacent to and below the target block.

处理单元可基于单向/双向分类指示符和帧内预测模式指示符中的至少一个确定双向帧内预测模式是否将被用于目标块,并且可推导双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may determine whether the bidirectional intra prediction mode is to be used for the target block based on at least one of the unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator and the intra prediction mode indicator, and may derive the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

单向/双向分类指示符可指示双向帧内预测模式是否将被用于目标块。单向/双向分类指示符可具有第一值和第二值中的任意一个。第一值可指示单向帧内预测被使用。例如,第一值可以是“0”。第二值可指示双向帧内预测被使用。例如,第二值可以是“1”。The unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator may indicate whether bidirectional intra prediction mode is to be used for the target block. The one-way/two-way classification indicator can have any one of the first value and the second value. The first value may indicate that uni-directional intra prediction is used. For example, the first value may be "0". The second value may indicate that bidirectional intra prediction is used. For example, the second value may be "1".

单向/双向分类指示符可以以编码和/或解码的特定单元(诸如视频、序列、画面、条带、并行块、CTU、CU、目标块、目标块的子块和具有特定尺寸的块)的等级被用信号发送。换句话说,编码和/或解码的特定单元可包括指示双向帧内预测模式是否将被用于单元中的目标的单向/双向分类指示符。The unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator can be encoded and/or decoded in specific units (such as video, sequence, picture, slice, parallel block, CTU, CU, target block, sub-blocks of target block, and blocks with specific dimensions) The level of is signaled. In other words, a particular unit of encoding and/or decoding may include a unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator that indicates whether bidirectional intra prediction mode is to be used for the target in the unit.

双向帧内预测模式可指示针对双向帧内预测的两个方向。可使用以下在1)至4)中给出的方案来指示所述两个方向。The bidirectional intra prediction mode may indicate two directions for bidirectional intra prediction. The two directions can be indicated using the schemes given in 1) to 4) below.

1)帧内预测模式指示符的数量可以是两个,并且双向帧内预测的两个方向可分别由两个帧内预测模式指示符指示。1) The number of intra prediction mode indicators may be two, and two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be indicated by two intra prediction mode indicators, respectively.

两个帧内预测模式指示符中的每一个可指示单向帧内预测模式的方向。双向帧内预测的两个方向可由两个帧内预测模式指示符所指示的两个方向来确定。Each of the two intra prediction mode indicators may indicate the direction of the unidirectional intra prediction mode. The two directions of bidirectional intra prediction may be determined by the two directions indicated by the two intra prediction mode indicators.

在这种情况下,一个帧内预测模式指示符可指示针对帧内预测模式的一个方向,而不是在单向预测模式与双向预测模式之间进行区分。这里,方向可与诸如45°、80°或135°的角度对应。In this case, one intra-prediction mode indicator may indicate one direction for the intra-prediction mode, rather than distinguishing between the uni-directional prediction mode and the bi-directional prediction mode. Here, the direction may correspond to an angle such as 45°, 80° or 135°.

2)一个帧内预测模式指示符可指示单向帧内预测的方向和双向帧内预测的方向中的任意一个。2) One intra prediction mode indicator may indicate any one of the direction of unidirectional intra prediction and the direction of bidirectional intra prediction.

例如,帧内预测模式指示符的值“3”可指示45°的单向帧内预测,并且帧内预测模式指示符的值“70”可指示45°和225°的双向帧内预测。For example, a value of "3" for the intra-prediction mode indicator may indicate 45° uni-directional intra-prediction, and a value of "70" for the intra-prediction mode indicator may indicate 45° and 225° bi-directional intra-prediction.

3)为了指示帧内预测的方向,可一起使用单向/双向分类指示符和帧内预测模式指示符。3) To indicate the direction of intra prediction, a unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator and an intra prediction mode indicator may be used together.

单向/双向分类指示符可指示单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被使用,并且帧内预测模式指示符可指示预测的方向。The unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator may indicate which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction is to be used, and the intra prediction mode indicator may indicate the direction of prediction.

例如,当单向/双向分类指示符的值是第二值并且帧内预测模式指示符的值是7时,可使用45°和225°的双向帧内预测,其中,225°是与45°相反的方向。For example, when the value of the unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator is the second value and the value of the intra prediction mode indicator is 7, bidirectional intra prediction of 45° and 225° may be used, where 225° is the same as 45° Opposite Direction.

例如,当单向/双向分类指示符的值为第一值并且帧内预测模式指示符的值是7时,可使用45°的单向帧内预测。For example, when the value of the unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator is the first value and the value of the intra prediction mode indicator is 7, 45° unidirectional intra prediction may be used.

4)当一个帧内预测模式指示符指示单向帧内预测的指定方向时,可执行双向帧内预测。4) When one intra-prediction mode indicator indicates a specified direction of uni-directional intra-prediction, bi-directional intra-prediction can be performed.

例如,当帧内预测模式指示符指示45°的单向预测时,可执行45°和225°的双向帧内预测,其中,225°是与45°相反的方向。For example, when the intra prediction mode indicator indicates unidirectional prediction of 45°, bidirectional intra prediction of 45° and 225° may be performed, where 225° is the opposite direction to 45°.

图22示出根据示例的从帧内预测模式指示符的方向推导和选择双向帧内预测。22 illustrates the derivation and selection of bidirectional intra prediction from the direction of an intra prediction mode indicator, according to an example.

处理单元可基于1)帧内预测模式指示符和2)目标块的邻近块中的像素的可用性来自适应地确定和推导双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may adaptively determine and derive the bidirectional intra-prediction mode based on 1) the intra-prediction mode indicator and 2) the availability of pixels in neighboring blocks of the target block.

如图22中所示,帧内预测模式指示符可指示帧内预测模式的一个方向,并且与帧内预测模式的所述方向对应的附加方向可被确定。这里,附加方向可以是根据帧内预测模式的所述方向确定的针对双向帧内预测的方向。As shown in FIG. 22, the intra prediction mode indicator may indicate one direction of the intra prediction mode, and additional directions corresponding to the direction of the intra prediction mode may be determined. Here, the additional direction may be a direction for bidirectional intra prediction determined according to the direction of the intra prediction mode.

附加方向可以是与帧内预测的所述方向相反的方向。The additional direction may be the opposite direction to that of the intra prediction.

可根据与由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向对应的方向上的参考像素的可用性来选择和推导单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的任意一个。Either one of uni-directional intra-prediction and bi-directional intra-prediction may be selected and derived according to the availability of reference pixels in the direction corresponding to the direction indicated by the intra-prediction mode indicator.

例如,可根据与由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向相反的方向上的参考像素的可用性来选择和推导单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的任意一个。For example, either one of uni-directional intra-prediction and bi-directional intra-prediction may be selected and derived according to the availability of reference pixels in a direction opposite to that indicated by the intra-prediction mode indicator.

这里,当对应方向上的参考像素可用时,可选择双向帧内预测,而当对应方向上的参考像素不可用时,可选择单向帧内预测。Here, when the reference pixels in the corresponding direction are available, bidirectional intra prediction can be selected, and when the reference pixels in the corresponding direction are not available, unidirectional intra prediction can be selected.

在下文中,术语“指定方向上的(参考)像素”可表示“位于指定方向上的(参考)像素”。Hereinafter, the term "a (reference) pixel in a specified direction" may mean "a (reference) pixel located in a specified direction".

这里,参考像素可用的事实可表示参考像素的值已经被确定。可选地,参考像素可用的事实可表示在执行目标块的帧内预测之前已经执行了参考像素的重建。参考像素不可用的事实可表示参考像素的值尚未被确定。可选地,参考像素不可用的事实可表示在执行目标块的帧内预测之前尚未执行参考像素的重建,并且因此参考像素的值尚未被确定。Here, the fact that the reference pixel is available may indicate that the value of the reference pixel has been determined. Alternatively, the fact that the reference pixels are available may indicate that the reconstruction of the reference pixels has been performed before performing intra prediction of the target block. The fact that the reference pixel is unavailable may indicate that the value of the reference pixel has not been determined. Alternatively, the fact that the reference pixel is unavailable may indicate that the reconstruction of the reference pixel has not been performed before performing intra prediction of the target block, and thus the value of the reference pixel has not been determined.

例如,当帧内预测模式指示符指示右上方向(例如,45°角)并且作为与右上方向相反的方向的左下方向(例如,225°角)上的邻近块中的像素可用时,处理单元可确定将被用于目标块的帧内预测是两个方向(即,右上方向和左下方向)上的双向帧内预测。For example, when the intra-prediction mode indicator indicates an upper-right direction (eg, a 45° angle) and is available as a pixel in a neighboring block in a lower-left direction (eg, a 225° angle) in the opposite direction to the upper-right direction, the processing unit may It is determined that the intra prediction to be used for the target block is bidirectional intra prediction in two directions (ie, the upper right direction and the lower left direction).

例如,当帧内预测模式指示符指示右上方向(例如,45°角)并且作为与右上方向相反的方向的左下方向(例如,225度角的方向)上的邻近块中的像素不可用时,处理单元可确定将被用于目标块的帧内预测是右上方向上的单向帧内预测。For example, when the intra prediction mode indicator indicates an upper-right direction (eg, a 45° angle) and pixels in a neighboring block in a lower-left direction (eg, a direction at a 225-degree angle), which is the opposite direction to the upper-right direction, are unavailable, processing The unit may determine that the intra prediction to be used for the target block is unidirectional intra prediction in the upper-right direction.

用于帧内预测模式的确定和推导的单元可以是目标块。帧内预测模式的选择可以是确定单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被使用。也就是说,可自适应地确定单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被用于整个目标块。A unit for determination and derivation of the intra prediction mode may be a target block. The selection of the intra prediction mode may be to determine which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction will be used. That is, it can be adaptively determined which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction is to be used for the entire target block.

在下文中,由帧内预测模式指示符指示的帧内预测方向可被指定为“第一方向”,并且第二方向可指定与第一方向对应的方向或与第一方向相反的方向。Hereinafter, the intra prediction direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator may be designated as a 'first direction', and the second direction may designate a direction corresponding to the first direction or a direction opposite to the first direction.

例如,对于目标块中的所有像素,当第一方向上的所有参考像素和第二方向上的所有参考像素可用时,可使用第一方向和第二方向上的双向帧内预测。对于目标块中的所有像素,当在第二方向上的所有参考像素中存在至少一个不可用参考像素时,可使用第一方向上的单向帧内预测。For example, bidirectional intra prediction in the first and second directions may be used when all reference pixels in the first direction and all reference pixels in the second direction are available for all pixels in the target block. For all pixels in the target block, when there is at least one unavailable reference pixel among all reference pixels in the second direction, unidirectional intra prediction in the first direction may be used.

用于帧内预测模式的确定和推导的单元可以是目标块中的每个像素。也就是说,可自适应地确定单向帧内预测和双向帧内预测中的哪一个将被用于目标块中的像素中的每一个。The unit for determination and derivation of the intra prediction mode may be each pixel in the target block. That is, it can be adaptively determined which of unidirectional intra prediction and bidirectional intra prediction is to be used for each of the pixels in the target block.

例如,对于目标块中的特定像素,当第一方向上的参考像素和第二方向上的参考像素可用时,可使用第一方向和第二方向上的双向帧内预测。对于目标块中的特定像素,当第二方向上的参考像素不可用时,可使用第一方向上的单向帧内预测。For example, for a particular pixel in the target block, when reference pixels in the first direction and reference pixels in the second direction are available, bidirectional intra prediction in the first and second directions may be used. For a specific pixel in the target block, when reference pixels in the second direction are not available, unidirectional intra prediction in the first direction may be used.

当第一方向上的参考像素或第二方向上的参考像素不可用时,处理单元可使用填充来生成不可用参考像素的值。这里,将被用于不可用参考像素的填充的值可以是最接近不可用参考像素的可用参考像素的值。当存在多个与不可用参考像素最接近的参考像素时,用于填充不可用参考像素的值可以是多个最接近的可用参考像素的值的平均值。When reference pixels in the first direction or reference pixels in the second direction are unavailable, the processing unit may use padding to generate values for the unavailable reference pixels. Here, the value to be used for the padding of the unavailable reference pixel may be the value of the available reference pixel closest to the unavailable reference pixel. When there are multiple reference pixels closest to the unavailable reference pixel, the value used to fill the unavailable reference pixel may be an average of the values of the multiple closest available reference pixels.

借助于填充,可使不可用参考像素可用,并且可执行使用可用参考像素的单向帧内预测或双向帧内预测。With padding, unavailable reference pixels can be made available, and unidirectional intra prediction or bidirectional intra prediction using the available reference pixels can be performed.

第二方向可以是与由帧内预测模式指示符指示的第一方向相反的共线方向。换句话说,第二方向可以是通过将180°加到第一方向而产生的方向。可选地,第二方向可以是将预定义角度(α)加到由帧内预测模式指示符指示的第一方向的方向。预定义角度(α)可在编码设备1600和解码设备1700中被设置为相同的值,并且可从编码设备1600被用信号发送到解码设备1700。The second direction may be a collinear direction opposite to the first direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator. In other words, the second direction may be a direction created by adding 180° to the first direction. Alternatively, the second direction may be a direction adding a predefined angle (α) to the first direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator. The predefined angle (α) may be set to the same value in the encoding apparatus 1600 and the decoding apparatus 1700 , and may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 1600 to the decoding apparatus 1700 .

如上所述,实施例中的帧内预测模式指示符可不将单向模式与双向模式区分开,并且可指示帧内预测的方向。As described above, the intra prediction mode indicator in an embodiment may not distinguish unidirectional mode from bidirectional mode, and may indicate the direction of intra prediction.

处理单元可基于以下项中的至少一个选择用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式:1)MPM、2)单向/双向分类指示符、3)邻近块的帧内预测模式、以及4)指定方向上的参考像素的可用性。The processing unit may select a bidirectional intra prediction mode for the target block based on at least one of: 1) MPM, 2) unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator, 3) intra prediction mode of neighboring blocks, and 4) specified Availability of reference pixels in the orientation.

处理单元可使用邻近块的帧内预测模式以及MPM来确定用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may use the intra-prediction modes of neighboring blocks and the MPM to determine a bidirectional intra-prediction mode for the target block.

处理单元可使用目标块的邻近块的帧内预测模式以及MPM来确定用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may use intra-prediction modes of neighboring blocks of the target block and the MPM to determine a bidirectional intra-prediction mode for the target block.

例如,当双向帧内预测已经被用于邻近块中的至少一个并且目标块的MPM中的至少一个与邻近块的双向帧内预测模式匹配时,处理单元可将使用匹配的MPM的双向帧内预测模式确定为目标块的双向帧内预测模式。For example, when bidirectional intra prediction has been used for at least one of the adjacent blocks and at least one of the MPMs of the target block matches the bidirectional intra prediction mode of the adjacent block, the processing unit may use the bidirectional intra prediction of the matched MPM The prediction mode is determined as a bidirectional intra prediction mode of the target block.

例如,处理单元可使用目标块的N个MPM中的两个方向的MPM来确定用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。N可以是整数2或更大的整数。例如,N可以是6。For example, the processing unit may determine a bidirectional intra-prediction mode for the target block using MPMs in both directions of the N MPMs for the target block. N may be an integer of 2 or greater. For example, N can be 6.

处理单元可使用目标块的邻近块的帧内预测模式、MPM和单向/双向分类指示符来确定用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may determine a bidirectional intra prediction mode for the target block using intra prediction modes, MPM, and unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicators of neighboring blocks of the target block.

例如,当单向/双向分类指示符指示双向帧内预测被使用时,处理单元可使用目标块的MPM中的一个MPM来确定用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。例如,将被使用的MPM可以是MPM列表中的第一个MPM。For example, when the unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator indicates that bidirectional intra prediction is used, the processing unit may use one of the MPMs of the target block to determine the bidirectional intra prediction mode for the target block. For example, the MPM to be used may be the first MPM in the MPM list.

处理单元可基于邻近块的帧内预测模式、MPM以及与邻近块的帧内预测方向相反的方向上的参考像素的可用性来选择用于目标块的双向帧内预测模式。The processing unit may select a bidirectional intra-prediction mode for the target block based on the intra-prediction mode of the neighboring block, the MPM, and the availability of reference pixels in a direction opposite the intra-prediction direction of the neighboring block.

例如,处理单元可被配置为从目标块的MPM中的任意一个推导针对目标块的帧内预测的方向,并且可被配置为当与推导出的方向对应的方向上的参考像素可用时,将推导出的方向和所述对应的方向上的双向帧内预测模式用于目标块的帧内预测。For example, the processing unit may be configured to derive the direction of intra prediction for the target block from any of the MPMs of the target block, and may be configured to, when a reference pixel in a direction corresponding to the derived direction is available, convert the The derived direction and the bidirectional intra prediction mode in the corresponding direction are used for intra prediction of the target block.

使用双向帧内预测模式的帧内预测Intra prediction using bidirectional intra prediction mode

当目标块的帧内预测模式被推导并被选择为双向帧内预测模式时,处理单元可通过参考位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的邻近块中的像素中的至少一个来确定针对目标像素的预测值。When the intra prediction mode of the target block is derived and selected as the bidirectional intra prediction mode, the processing unit may determine by referring to at least one of pixels located in adjacent blocks in both prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode The predicted value for the target pixel.

这里,目标像素可以是作为预测的目标的像素,并且可以是目标块中的像素或针对目标块的预测块中的像素。换句话说,可根据双向帧内预测模式经由双向帧内预测来确定针对目标块的预测值。Here, the target pixel may be a pixel targeted for prediction, and may be a pixel in a target block or a pixel in a prediction block for the target block. In other words, the prediction value for the target block may be determined through bidirectional intra prediction according to the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

在这样的双向帧内预测中,处理单元可通过对位于双向帧内预测的各个预测方向上的邻近块中的像素进行滤波来获取各个预测方向上的参考像素。处理单元可使用获取的参考像素中的至少一个来推导针对目标像素的预测值。In such bidirectional intra prediction, the processing unit may obtain reference pixels in each prediction direction by filtering pixels located in adjacent blocks in each prediction direction of the bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may use at least one of the obtained reference pixels to derive a predicted value for the target pixel.

换句话说,参考像素可以是邻近块中的像素,并且可以是由目标块中的像素的指定预测方向指定的位置处的像素。可选地,参考像素可以是通过将滤波应用于与由目标块中的像素的指定预测方向指定的位置相邻的像素而获取的值。In other words, the reference pixel may be a pixel in an adjacent block, and may be a pixel at a position specified by the specified prediction direction of the pixel in the target block. Alternatively, the reference pixel may be a value obtained by applying filtering to pixels adjacent to the position specified by the specified prediction direction of the pixels in the target block.

处理单元可使用双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的参考像素中的至少一个来确定针对目标像素的预测值。The processing unit may determine the predicted value for the target pixel using at least one of the reference pixels in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

当双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的参考像素中的至少一个被使用时,可将权重应用于各个参考像素。权重可被预先定义。可选地,可通过计算来设置权重。When at least one of the reference pixels in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode is used, weights may be applied to the respective reference pixels. Weights can be predefined. Optionally, the weights can be set by calculation.

例如,可基于目标像素与各个参考像素之间的距离来设置权重。权重可与目标像素和各个参考像素之间的距离成反比。可选地,权重可与目标像素和各个参考像素之间的距离成正比。参考像素的权重的比例可以是各个参考像素与目标像素之间的距离的比例的倒数。For example, the weights may be set based on the distance between the target pixel and each reference pixel. The weight may be inversely proportional to the distance between the target pixel and each reference pixel. Alternatively, the weight may be proportional to the distance between the target pixel and each reference pixel. The ratio of the weights of the reference pixels may be the inverse of the ratio of the distances between the respective reference pixels and the target pixel.

参考像素的权重可根据预测方向而不同。The weights of reference pixels may differ according to the prediction direction.

每个参考像素的权重可根据对应参考像素是否是由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向上的参考像素而不同。例如,由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向的权重可以是α,并且与所指示的方向对应的方向的权重可以是1-α。α可以是大于0且小于1的实数。例如,α可以是2/3。The weight of each reference pixel may differ according to whether the corresponding reference pixel is a reference pixel in the direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator. For example, the weight of the direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator may be α, and the weight of the direction corresponding to the indicated direction may be 1-α. α can be a real number greater than 0 and less than 1. For example, a can be 2/3.

可选地,可基于目标像素与对应参考像素之间的距离并且基于参考像素是否是由帧内预测模式指示符指示的方向上的参考像素来设置每个参考像素的权重。Alternatively, the weight of each reference pixel may be set based on the distance between the target pixel and the corresponding reference pixel and based on whether the reference pixel is a reference pixel in the direction indicated by the intra prediction mode indicator.

权重可由编码设备1600设置,并且可通过比特流将所设置的权重从编码设备1600用信号发送到解码设备1700。The weights may be set by the encoding apparatus 1600, and the set weights may be signaled from the encoding apparatus 1600 to the decoding apparatus 1700 through a bitstream.

当双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向中的一个的权重被用信号发送时,可基于用信号发送的权重来设置其他预测方向的权重。When the weight of one of the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode is signaled, the weight of the other prediction direction may be set based on the signaled weight.

可以以编码和/或解码的特定单元(诸如视频、序列、画面、条带、并行块、CTU、CU、目标块、目标块的子块和具有特定尺寸的块)的等级用信号发送每个权重。换句话说,编码和/或解码的特定单元可包括将被用于对应单元中的目标的权重或将被用于推导权重的信息。Each may be signaled at the level of a specific unit of encoding and/or decoding, such as a video, sequence, picture, slice, parallel block, CTU, CU, target block, sub-blocks of a target block, and blocks of a specific size. Weights. In other words, a particular unit of encoding and/or decoding may include weights to be used for objects in the corresponding unit or information to be used to derive the weights.

使用虚拟像素的双向帧内预测Bidirectional intra prediction using virtual pixels

图23示出根据示例的虚拟邻近像素的生成。23 illustrates the generation of virtual neighboring pixels according to an example.

由于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的像素中的一些像素在双向帧内预测之前未被重建,因此它们可不被用于双向帧内预测。处理单元可生成与未被重建的像素对应的虚拟邻近像素,并且可使用虚拟邻近像素来执行双向帧内预测。Since some of the pixels in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode are not reconstructed before the bidirectional intra prediction, they may not be used for the bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may generate virtual neighboring pixels corresponding to the pixels that have not been reconstructed, and may use the virtual neighboring pixels to perform bidirectional intra prediction.

邻近像素可以是重建邻近块中的重建像素。每个虚拟邻近像素可以是使用一个或更多个重建像素生成的像素。换句话说,可基于一个或更多个重建像素的值生成虚拟邻近像素的值。The neighboring pixels may be reconstructed pixels in a reconstructed neighboring block. Each virtual neighboring pixel may be a pixel generated using one or more reconstructed pixels. In other words, the values of virtual neighboring pixels may be generated based on the values of one or more reconstructed pixels.

例如,虚拟邻近像素可以是与目标块相邻并且在目标块上方或左侧的像素。虚拟邻近像素可以是与目标块相邻并且在目标块下方或右侧的像素。For example, a virtual neighboring pixel may be a pixel adjacent to and above or to the left of the target block. Virtual neighboring pixels may be pixels adjacent to and below or to the right of the target block.

针对目标块的虚拟邻近像素可以是针对目标块的虚拟邻近块中的像素。虚拟邻近块可以是与目标块相邻的未重建的块。例如,虚拟邻近块可以是与目标块相邻并且在目标块下方或右侧的块。A virtual neighboring pixel for the target block may be a pixel in a virtual neighboring block for the target block. A virtual neighbor block may be an unreconstructed block adjacent to the target block. For example, a virtual neighboring block may be a block adjacent to and below or to the right of the target block.

当目标块的帧内预测模式被推导并被确定为双向帧内预测模式时,处理单元可通过参考位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的邻近像素和虚拟邻近像素中的至少一个来确定针对目标像素的预测值。When the intra prediction mode of the target block is derived and determined to be the bidirectional intra prediction mode, the processing unit may refer to at least one of adjacent pixels and virtual adjacent pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode Determine the predicted value for the target pixel.

当以这种方式执行预测时,处理单元可通过对各个预测方向上的邻近像素进行滤波来获取各个预测方向上的参考像素。此外,处理单元通过对各个预测方向上的虚拟邻近像素进行滤波来获取各个预测方向上的参考像素。处理单元可使用所获取的参考像素中的至少一个来推导针对目标像素的预测值。When performing prediction in this manner, the processing unit may obtain reference pixels in each prediction direction by filtering neighboring pixels in each prediction direction. In addition, the processing unit obtains reference pixels in each prediction direction by filtering virtual neighboring pixels in each prediction direction. The processing unit may use at least one of the obtained reference pixels to derive a predicted value for the target pixel.

换句话说,参考像素可以是邻近像素或虚拟邻近像素,并且可以是由目标块中的像素的指定预测方向指定的位置处的像素。可选地,参考像素可以是通过将滤波应用于与由目标块中的像素的指定预测方向指定的位置相邻的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素而获取的值。In other words, the reference pixel may be an adjacent pixel or a virtual adjacent pixel, and may be a pixel at a position specified by a specified prediction direction of a pixel in the target block. Alternatively, the reference pixel may be a value obtained by applying filtering to neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels adjacent to the position specified by the specified prediction direction of the pixel in the target block.

处理单元可使用双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的参考像素中的至少一个来确定针对目标像素的预测值。参考像素可包括邻近像素和虚拟邻近像素。The processing unit may determine the predicted value for the target pixel using at least one of the reference pixels in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode. Reference pixels may include adjacent pixels and virtual adjacent pixels.

前述权重的描述也可被应用于虚拟邻近像素。当双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的参考像素中的至少一个被使用时,可将权重分别应用于作为参考像素的邻近像素和虚拟邻近像素。The foregoing description of weights may also be applied to virtual neighboring pixels. When at least one of the reference pixels in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode is used, weights may be applied to neighboring pixels and virtual neighboring pixels that are reference pixels, respectively.

下面,将描述用于生成虚拟邻近像素的示例性方法。Below, an exemplary method for generating virtual neighboring pixels will be described.

目标块的左上坐标可以是(Cx,Cy)。W可以是目标块的水平尺寸。H可以是目标块的高度或垂直尺寸。The upper left coordinate of the target block may be (Cx,Cy). W can be the horizontal size of the target block. H can be the height or vertical dimension of the target block.

在下文中,“像素(α,β)”可表示具有坐标(α,β)的像素。Hereinafter, "pixel (α, β)" may refer to a pixel having coordinates (α, β).

1)处理单元可基于重建邻近块中的像素来生成虚拟邻近像素。1) The processing unit may generate virtual neighboring pixels based on pixels in the reconstructed neighboring blocks.

虚拟邻近像素可包括与目标块相邻并且在目标块右侧的右虚拟邻近像素以及与目标块相邻并且在目标块下方的下虚拟邻近像素。The virtual neighbor pixels may include a right virtual neighbor pixel adjacent to and to the right of the target block and a lower virtual neighbor pixel adjacent to and below the target block.

右虚拟邻近像素的位置可由以下方程式2给出:The position of the right virtual neighbor pixel can be given by Equation 2 below:

[方程式2][Equation 2]

N(Cx+W,y),其中(y∈{Cy,Cy+1,Cy+2,…,Cy+H})N(Cx+W,y), where (y∈{Cy,Cy+1,Cy+2,…,Cy+H})

下虚拟邻近像素的位置可由以下方程式3给出:The position of the lower virtual neighbor pixel can be given by Equation 3 below:

[方程式3][Equation 3]

N(x,Cy+H),其中(x∈{Cx,Cx+1,Cx+2,…,Cx+W})N(x,Cy+H), where (x∈{Cx,Cx+1,Cx+2,…,Cx+W})

2)处理单元可基于与目标块相邻并且在目标块上方的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个重建邻近像素来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)。2) The processing unit may generate virtual neighboring pixels (Cx+W, Cy) based on one or more of the reconstructed neighboring pixels adjacent to and above the target block.

例如,在图23中,可使用与目标块相邻并且在目标块上方的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个重建邻近像素来生成虚拟邻近像素R。虚拟邻近像素R可以是右虚拟邻近像素中的最上方的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 23 , virtual neighboring pixels R may be generated using one or more of the reconstructed neighboring pixels adjacent to and above the target block. The virtual neighboring pixel R may be the uppermost virtual neighboring pixel among the right virtual neighboring pixels.

3)处理单元可基于邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy-1)生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)。3) The processing unit may generate a virtual adjacent pixel (Cx+W, Cy) based on the adjacent pixel (Cx+W, Cy-1).

例如,在图23中,可基于邻近像素b生成虚拟邻近像素R。虚拟邻近像素R可以是右虚拟邻近像素中的最上方的虚拟邻近像素。邻近像素b可以是与虚拟邻近像素R相邻并且在虚拟邻近像素R上方的像素。For example, in FIG. 23, a virtual neighboring pixel R may be generated based on the neighboring pixel b. The virtual neighboring pixel R may be the uppermost virtual neighboring pixel among the right virtual neighboring pixels. The adjacent pixel b may be a pixel adjacent to and above the virtual adjacent pixel R.

例如,虚拟邻近像素R与邻近像素b之间的关系可由以下方程式4表示:For example, the relationship between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the neighboring pixel b can be represented by the following Equation 4:

[方程式4][Equation 4]

R=bR=b

4)处理单元可基于邻近像素(Cx+W-1,Cy-1)、邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy-1)和邻近像素(Cx+W+1,Cy-1)中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)。4) The processing unit may be based on one or more of neighboring pixels (Cx+W-1, Cy-1), neighboring pixels (Cx+W, Cy-1), and neighboring pixels (Cx+W+1, Cy-1). multiple to generate virtual adjacent pixels (Cx+W,Cy).

例如,在图23中,可使用邻近像素a、邻近像素b和邻近像素c来生成虚拟邻近像素R。虚拟邻近像素R可以是右虚拟邻近像素中的最上方的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 23, the virtual neighboring pixel R may be generated using the neighboring pixel a, the neighboring pixel b, and the neighboring pixel c. The virtual neighboring pixel R may be the uppermost virtual neighboring pixel among the right virtual neighboring pixels.

邻近像素a、邻近像素b和邻近像素c的坐标可由以下方程式5、方程式6和方程式7给出:The coordinates of neighboring pixel a, neighboring pixel b, and neighboring pixel c are given by Equation 5, Equation 6, and Equation 7 below:

[方程式5][Equation 5]

(Cx+W-1,Cy-1)(Cx+W-1,Cy-1)

[方程式6][Equation 6]

(Cx+W,Cy-1)(Cx+W,Cy-1)

[方程式7][Equation 7]

(Cx+W+1,Cy-1)(Cx+W+1,Cy-1)

换句话说,邻近像素b可以是与虚拟邻近像素R相邻并且在虚拟邻近像素R上方的像素。邻近像素a可以是与邻近像素b相邻并且在邻近像素b左侧的像素。邻近像素c可以是与邻近像素b相邻并且在邻近像素b右侧的像素。In other words, the adjacent pixel b may be a pixel adjacent to and above the virtual adjacent pixel R. The adjacent pixel a may be a pixel adjacent to the adjacent pixel b and to the left of the adjacent pixel b. The adjacent pixel c may be a pixel adjacent to and to the right of the adjacent pixel b.

例如,在图23中,虚拟邻近像素R可以是邻近像素a、邻近像素b和邻近像素c的加权和。当生成虚拟邻近像素R时,可将权重分别分配给邻近像素a、邻近像素b和邻近像素c。For example, in FIG. 23, the virtual neighboring pixel R may be a weighted sum of the neighboring pixel a, the neighboring pixel b, and the neighboring pixel c. When the virtual neighboring pixel R is generated, weights may be assigned to the neighboring pixel a, the neighboring pixel b, and the neighboring pixel c, respectively.

例如,虚拟邻近像素R、邻近像素a、邻近像素b和邻近像素c之间的关系可由以下方程式8表示:For example, the relationship between the virtual neighboring pixel R, the neighboring pixel a, the neighboring pixel b, and the neighboring pixel c can be represented by the following Equation 8:

[方程式8][Equation 8]

R=1/4*a+2/4*b+1/4*c=1/4*a+1/2*b+1/4*c=(a+b<<1+c)>>2R=1/4*a+2/4*b+1/4*c=1/4*a+1/2*b+1/4*c=(a+b<<1+c)>> 2

这里,“<<”可以是左移运算符。“>>”可以是右移运算符。Here, "<<" can be a left shift operator. ">>" can be a right shift operator.

5)类似于上述需求2)至4),处理单元可基于与目标块相邻并且在目标块左侧的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)。5) Similar to requirements 2) to 4) above, the processing unit may generate virtual adjacent pixels (Cx, Cy+H) based on one or more of the reconstructed adjacent pixels adjacent to and to the left of the target block .

例如,在图23中,可使用与目标块相邻并且在目标块左侧的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素L。虚拟邻近像素L可以是下虚拟邻近像素中的最左侧的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 23, a virtual neighboring pixel L may be generated using one or more of the reconstructed neighboring pixels adjacent to and to the left of the target block. The virtual neighboring pixel L may be the leftmost virtual neighboring pixel among the lower virtual neighboring pixels.

6)处理单元可基于邻近像素(Cx-1,Cy+H)生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)。6) The processing unit may generate virtual neighboring pixels (Cx, Cy+H) based on neighboring pixels (Cx-1, Cy+H).

例如,在图23中,可使用邻近像素q来生成虚拟邻近像素L。虚拟邻近像素L可以是下虚拟邻近像素中的最左侧的虚拟邻近像素。邻近像素q可以是与虚拟邻近像素L相邻并且在虚拟邻近像素L左侧的像素。For example, in FIG. 23, a virtual neighboring pixel L may be generated using the neighboring pixel q. The virtual neighboring pixel L may be the leftmost virtual neighboring pixel among the lower virtual neighboring pixels. The adjacent pixel q may be a pixel adjacent to and to the left of the virtual adjacent pixel L.

例如,虚拟邻近像素L与邻近像素q之间的关系可由以下方程式9表示:For example, the relationship between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the neighboring pixel q can be represented by the following Equation 9:

[方程式9][Equation 9]

L=qL=q

7)处理单元可基于邻近像素(Cx-1,Cy+H-1)、邻近像素(Cx-1,Cy+H)和邻近像素(Cx-1,Cy+H+1)中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)。7) The processing unit may be based on one or more of neighboring pixels (Cx-1, Cy+H-1), neighboring pixels (Cx-1, Cy+H), and neighboring pixels (Cx-1, Cy+H+1). multiple to generate virtual adjacent pixels (Cx, Cy+H).

例如,在图23中,可使用邻近像素p、邻近像素q和邻近像素r来生成虚拟邻近像素L。虚拟邻近像素L可以是下虚拟邻近像素中的最左侧的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 23, a virtual neighboring pixel L may be generated using the neighboring pixel p, the neighboring pixel q, and the neighboring pixel r. The virtual neighboring pixel L may be the leftmost virtual neighboring pixel among the lower virtual neighboring pixels.

邻近像素p、邻近像素q和邻近像素r的坐标可由以下方程式10、方程式11和方程式12给出。The coordinates of the neighboring pixel p, the neighboring pixel q, and the neighboring pixel r can be given by Equation 10, Equation 11, and Equation 12 below.

[方程式10][Equation 10]

(Cx-1,Cy+H-1)(Cx-1,Cy+H-1)

[方程式11][Equation 11]

(Cx-1,Cy+H)(Cx-1,Cy+H)

[方程式12][Equation 12]

(Cx-1,Cy+H+1)(Cx-1,Cy+H+1)

换句话说,邻近像素q可以是与虚拟邻近像素L相邻并且在虚拟邻近像素L左侧的像素。邻近像素p可以是与邻近像素q相邻并且在邻近像素q上方的像素。邻近像素r可以是与邻近像素q相邻并且在邻近像素q下方的像素。In other words, the adjacent pixel q may be a pixel adjacent to and to the left of the virtual adjacent pixel L. The adjacent pixel p may be a pixel adjacent to and above the adjacent pixel q. The adjacent pixel r may be a pixel adjacent to and below the adjacent pixel q.

例如,在图23中,虚拟邻近像素L可以是邻近像素p、邻近像素q和邻近像素r的加权和。当生成虚拟邻近像素L时,可将各个权重分配给邻近像素p、邻近像素q和邻近像素r。For example, in FIG. 23, the virtual neighboring pixel L may be a weighted sum of the neighboring pixel p, the neighboring pixel q, and the neighboring pixel r. When the virtual neighboring pixel L is generated, respective weights may be assigned to the neighboring pixel p, the neighboring pixel q, and the neighboring pixel r.

例如,虚拟邻近像素L、邻近像素p、邻近像素q和邻近像素r之间的关系可由以下方程式13表示:For example, the relationship between the virtual neighboring pixel L, the neighboring pixel p, the neighboring pixel q, and the neighboring pixel r can be represented by the following Equation 13:

[方程式13][Equation 13]

L=1/4*p+2/4*q+1/4*r=1/4*p+1/2*q+1/4*r=(p+q<<1+r)>>2L=1/4*p+2/4*q+1/4*r=1/4*p+1/2*q+1/4*r=(p+q<<1+r)>> 2

8)处理单元可基于使用邻近像素生成的多个虚拟邻近像素来生成附加虚拟邻近像素。8) The processing unit may generate additional virtual neighboring pixels based on the plurality of virtual neighboring pixels generated using neighboring pixels.

例如,在图23中,可基于虚拟邻近像素R和虚拟邻近像素L生成虚拟邻近像素Ni。虚拟邻近像素Ni可以是虚拟邻近像素R与虚拟邻近像素L之间的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 23 , the virtual neighboring pixel N i may be generated based on the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel L. The virtual neighboring pixel N i may be a virtual neighboring pixel between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel L.

图24示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素生成附加虚拟邻近像素。24 illustrates the use of virtual neighboring pixels to generate additional virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example.

如图24中所示,针对目标块的虚拟邻近像素可根据距虚拟邻近像素L的距离和距虚拟邻近像素R的距离被排列成一行。As shown in FIG. 24 , the virtual neighboring pixels for the target block may be arranged in a row according to the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel L and the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel R.

特定虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素L之间的距离可由以下方程式14表示:The distance between a specific virtual neighboring pixel N i and a virtual neighboring pixel L can be represented by the following Equation 14:

[方程式14][Equation 14]

(Ni的x坐标与L的x坐标之间的差的绝对值)+(Ni的y坐标与L的y坐标之间的差的绝对值)(absolute value of the difference between the x-coordinate of Ni and the x-coordinate of L)+(absolute value of the difference between the y-coordinate of Ni and the y-coordinate of L)

特定虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素R之间的距离可由以下方程式15表示:The distance between a specific virtual neighboring pixel N i and a virtual neighboring pixel R can be represented by the following equation 15:

[方程式15][Equation 15]

(Ni的x坐标与R的x坐标之间的差的绝对值)+(Ni的y坐标与R的y坐标之间的差的绝对值)(absolute value of the difference between the x-coordinate of Ni and the x-coordinate of R)+(absolute value of the difference between the y-coordinate of Ni and the y-coordinate of R)

换句话说,像素之间的距离可以是像素的x坐标之间的差的绝对值与像素的y坐标之间的差的绝对值之和。In other words, the distance between pixels may be the sum of the absolute value of the difference between the x-coordinates of the pixels and the absolute value of the difference between the y-coordinates of the pixels.

9)处理单元可基于重建邻近块中的邻近像素来生成虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素R,并且可基于虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素R来生成虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素R之间的虚拟邻近像素Ni9) The processing unit may generate a virtual neighboring pixel L and a virtual neighboring pixel R based on neighboring pixels in the reconstructed neighboring block, and may generate a virtual neighboring pixel L and a virtual neighboring pixel R based on the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel R. of virtual neighboring pixels N i .

当生成虚拟邻近像素Ni时,可使用针对距离的权重。针对距离的权重可包括根据虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素L之间的距离的权重以及根据虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素R之间的距离的权重。A weight for distance may be used when generating virtual neighboring pixels Ni . The weight for the distance may include a weight according to the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel N i and the virtual neighboring pixel L and a weight according to the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel N i and the virtual neighboring pixel R.

例如,虚拟邻近像素Ni、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素R之间的关系可由以下方程式16表示:For example, the relationship between virtual neighbor N i , virtual neighbor L, and virtual neighbor R can be represented by Equation 16 below:

[方程式16][Equation 16]

Figure BDA0002589119230000731
Figure BDA0002589119230000731

dR可以是虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素R之间的距离。d R may be the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel N i and the virtual neighboring pixel R .

dL可以是虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素L之间的距离。d L may be the distance between the virtual neighbor pixel N i and the virtual neighbor pixel L .

图25示出根据示例的右下虚拟邻近像素和中间虚拟邻近像素的生成。FIG. 25 illustrates the generation of lower right virtual neighbor pixels and middle virtual neighbor pixels, according to an example.

目标块的左上坐标可以是(Cx,Cy)。W可以是目标块的水平尺寸。H可以是目标块的高度或垂直尺寸。The upper left coordinate of the target block may be (Cx,Cy). W can be the horizontal size of the target block. H can be the height or vertical dimension of the target block.

10)处理单元可基于与目标块相邻并且在目标块上方的重建邻近像素以及与目标块相邻并且在目标块左侧的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)。10) The processing unit may generate virtual neighboring pixels (Cx) based on one or more of reconstructed neighboring pixels adjacent to and above the target block and reconstructed neighboring pixels adjacent to and to the left of the target block. +W,Cy+H).

例如,在图25中,可使用与目标块相邻并且在目标块上方的重建邻近像素以及与目标块相邻并且在目标块左侧的重建邻近像素中的一个或更多个来生成虚拟邻近像素G。虚拟邻近像素G可以是右下虚拟邻近像素。换句话说,虚拟邻近像素G可以是与下虚拟邻近像素相邻并且在下虚拟邻近像素右侧的像素,并且可以是与右虚拟邻近像素相邻并且在右虚拟邻近像素下方的像素。For example, in FIG. 25, virtual neighbors may be generated using one or more of reconstructed neighbor pixels adjacent to and above the target block and reconstructed neighbor pixels adjacent to and to the left of the target block pixel G. The virtual neighboring pixel G may be the lower right virtual neighboring pixel. In other words, the virtual neighbor G may be a pixel adjacent to and to the right of the lower virtual neighbor, and may be a pixel adjacent to and below the right virtual neighbor.

11)处理单元可基于邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy-1)和邻近像素(Cx-1,Cy+H)来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)。11) The processing unit may generate a virtual adjacent pixel (Cx+W, Cy+H) based on the adjacent pixel (Cx+W, Cy-1) and the adjacent pixel (Cx-1, Cy+H).

例如,在图25中,可基于邻近像素b和邻近像素q生成虚拟邻近像素G。虚拟邻近像素G可以是右下虚拟邻近像素。邻近像素b可以是与目标块的右上部分相邻的像素。邻近像素q可以是与目标块的左下部分相邻的像素。For example, in FIG. 25, a virtual adjacent pixel G may be generated based on the adjacent pixel b and the adjacent pixel q. The virtual neighboring pixel G may be the lower right virtual neighboring pixel. The adjacent pixel b may be a pixel adjacent to the upper right portion of the target block. The adjacent pixel q may be a pixel adjacent to the lower left portion of the target block.

例如,虚拟邻近像素G、邻近像素b和邻近像素q之间的关系可由以下方程式17表示:For example, the relationship between the virtual neighboring pixel G, the neighboring pixel b, and the neighboring pixel q can be represented by the following Equation 17:

[方程式17][Equation 17]

G=1/2*(b+q)=(b+q)>>1G=1/2*(b+q)=(b+q)>>1

12)处理单元可基于虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)和虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)。12) The processing unit may generate a virtual neighbor pixel (Cx+W, Cy+H) based on the virtual neighbor pixel (Cx+W, Cy) and the virtual neighbor pixel (Cx, Cy+H).

例如,在图25中,可使用虚拟邻近像素R和虚拟邻近像素L来生成虚拟邻近像素G。虚拟邻近像素G可以是右下虚拟邻近像素。虚拟邻近像素R可以是右虚拟邻近像素中的最上方的虚拟邻近像素。虚拟邻近像素L可以是下虚拟邻近像素中的最左侧的虚拟邻近像素。For example, in FIG. 25, a virtual neighboring pixel R and a virtual neighboring pixel L may be used to generate a virtual neighboring pixel G. The virtual neighboring pixel G may be the lower right virtual neighboring pixel. The virtual neighboring pixel R may be the uppermost virtual neighboring pixel among the right virtual neighboring pixels. The virtual neighboring pixel L may be the leftmost virtual neighboring pixel among the lower virtual neighboring pixels.

例如,虚拟邻近像素G、虚拟邻近像素R和虚拟邻近像素L之间的关系可由以下方程式18表示:For example, the relationship between virtual neighbor G, virtual neighbor R, and virtual neighbor L can be represented by the following Equation 18:

[方程式18][Equation 18]

G=1/2*(R+L)=(R+L)>>1G=1/2*(R+L)=(R+L)>>1

12)处理单元可基于第一虚拟邻近像素和第二虚拟邻近像素生成第三虚拟邻近像素,并且可基于第一虚拟邻近像素和第三虚拟邻近像素生成第四虚拟邻近像素。12) The processing unit may generate a third virtual neighboring pixel based on the first virtual neighboring pixel and the second virtual neighboring pixel, and may generate a fourth virtual neighboring pixel based on the first virtual neighboring pixel and the third virtual neighboring pixel.

处理单元可基于虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)、虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)和虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)与虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)之间的虚拟邻近像素。此外,处理单元可根据虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy)、虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)和虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)来生成虚拟邻近像素(Cx,Cy+H)与虚拟邻近像素(Cx+W,Cy+H)之间的虚拟邻近像素。The processing unit may generate a virtual neighbor (Cx+W,Cy) based on the virtual neighbor (Cx+W,Cy), the virtual neighbor (Cx,Cy+H), and the virtual neighbor (Cx+W,Cy+H) The virtual neighbors between the virtual neighbors (Cx+W, Cy+H). Additionally, the processing unit may generate a virtual neighbor (Cx,Cy+) from the virtual neighbor (Cx+W,Cy), the virtual neighbor (Cx,Cy+H), and the virtual neighbor (Cx+W,Cy+H) H) and virtual neighbors (Cx+W, Cy+H) between virtual neighbors.

例如,在图25中,可基于虚拟邻近像素R、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素G来生成虚拟邻近像素Mi。虚拟邻近像素Mi可以是虚拟邻近像素R与虚拟邻近像素G之间的像素。For example, in FIG. 25 , virtual neighboring pixels M i may be generated based on virtual neighboring pixels R, virtual neighboring pixels L, and virtual neighboring pixels G. The virtual neighboring pixel M i may be a pixel between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel G.

例如,在图25中,可使用虚拟邻近像素R、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素G来生成虚拟邻近像素Ni。虚拟邻近像素Ni可以是虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素G之间的像素。For example, in FIG. 25 , virtual neighboring pixels R, virtual neighboring pixels L, and virtual neighboring pixels G may be used to generate virtual neighboring pixels N i . The virtual neighboring pixel N i may be a pixel between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel G.

13)处理单元可基于第一虚拟邻近像素和第二虚拟邻近像素生成第三虚拟邻近像素,并且可基于第一虚拟邻近像素和第三虚拟邻近像素生成第四虚拟邻近像素。这里,当生成第四虚拟邻近像素时,处理单元可使用针对附加虚拟邻近像素的权重。附加虚拟邻近像素可包括第一虚拟邻近像素和第三虚拟邻近像素。可基于第四虚拟邻近像素与附加虚拟邻近像素之间的距离来设置针对附加虚拟邻近像素的权重。13) The processing unit may generate a third virtual neighboring pixel based on the first virtual neighboring pixel and the second virtual neighboring pixel, and may generate a fourth virtual neighboring pixel based on the first virtual neighboring pixel and the third virtual neighboring pixel. Here, when generating the fourth virtual neighboring pixel, the processing unit may use the weight for the additional virtual neighboring pixel. The additional virtual neighboring pixels may include a first virtual neighboring pixel and a third virtual neighboring pixel. The weight for the additional virtual neighboring pixel may be set based on the distance between the fourth virtual neighboring pixel and the additional virtual neighboring pixel.

例如,在图25中,可基于虚拟邻近像素R、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素G来生成虚拟邻近像素Mi。虚拟邻近像素Mi可以是虚拟邻近像素R与虚拟邻近像素G之间的像素。For example, in FIG. 25 , virtual neighboring pixels M i may be generated based on virtual neighboring pixels R, virtual neighboring pixels L, and virtual neighboring pixels G. The virtual neighboring pixel M i may be a pixel between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel G.

当生成虚拟邻近像素Mi时,可使用针对虚拟邻近像素R的权重、针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重和针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重中的一个或更多个。When generating the virtual neighboring pixel Mi , one or more of the weight for the virtual neighboring pixel R, the weight for the virtual neighboring pixel L, and the weight for the virtual neighboring pixel G may be used.

可基于虚拟邻近像素R与虚拟邻近像素Mi之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素R的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel R may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel Mi.

可基于虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素Mi之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel L may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel Mi.

可基于虚拟邻近像素G与虚拟邻近像素Mi之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel G may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel G and the virtual neighboring pixel Mi.

例如,在图25中,可使用虚拟邻近像素R、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素G来生成虚拟邻近像素Ni。虚拟邻近像素Ni可以是虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素G之间的像素。For example, in FIG. 25 , virtual neighboring pixels R, virtual neighboring pixels L, and virtual neighboring pixels G may be used to generate virtual neighboring pixels N i . The virtual neighboring pixel N i may be a pixel between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel G.

当生成虚拟邻近像素Ni时,可使用针对虚拟邻近像素R的权重、针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重和针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重中的一个或更多个。When generating the virtual neighbor pixel Ni , one or more of the weight for the virtual neighbor pixel R, the weight for the virtual neighbor pixel L, and the weight for the virtual neighbor pixel G may be used.

可基于虚拟邻近像素R与虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素R的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel R may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel R and the virtual neighboring pixel Ni .

可基于虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel L may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel Ni .

可基于虚拟邻近像素G与虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel G may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel G and the virtual neighboring pixel Ni.

可基于虚拟邻近像素G与虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重。针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重可与虚拟邻近像素G和虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离成正比。针对虚拟邻近像素L的权重可与从虚拟邻近像素Ni到虚拟邻近像素L的距离和从虚拟邻近像素Ni到虚拟邻近像素G的距离之和成反比。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel L may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel G and the virtual neighboring pixel Ni. The weight for the virtual neighbor L may be proportional to the distance between the virtual neighbor G and the virtual neighbor Ni . The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel L may be inversely proportional to the sum of the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel Ni to the virtual neighboring pixel L and the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel Ni to the virtual neighboring pixel G.

可基于虚拟邻近像素L与虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离来设置针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重。针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重可与虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素Ni之间的距离成正比。针对虚拟邻近像素G的权重可与从虚拟邻近像素Ni到虚拟邻近像素L的距离和从虚拟邻近像素Ni到虚拟邻近像素G的距离之和成反比。The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel G may be set based on the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel L and the virtual neighboring pixel Ni . The weight for the virtual neighbor G may be proportional to the distance between the virtual neighbor L and the virtual neighbor Ni . The weight for the virtual neighboring pixel G may be inversely proportional to the sum of the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel Ni to the virtual neighboring pixel L and the distance from the virtual neighboring pixel Ni to the virtual neighboring pixel G.

例如,虚拟邻近像素Ni、虚拟邻近像素L和虚拟邻近像素G之间的关系可由以下方程式19表示:For example, the relationship between virtual neighbor N i , virtual neighbor L, and virtual neighbor G can be represented by the following Equation 19:

[方程式19][Equation 19]

Figure BDA0002589119230000761
Figure BDA0002589119230000761

dG可以是虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素G之间的距离。d G may be the distance between the virtual neighbor pixel N i and the virtual neighbor pixel G .

dL可以是虚拟邻近像素Ni与虚拟邻近像素L之间的距离。d L may be the distance between the virtual neighbor pixel N i and the virtual neighbor pixel L .

例如,虚拟邻近像素Mi、虚拟邻近像素R和虚拟邻近像素G之间的关系可由以下方程式20表示。For example, the relationship among the virtual neighboring pixels M i , the virtual neighboring pixels R, and the virtual neighboring pixels G can be represented by Equation 20 below.

[方程式20][Equation 20]

Figure BDA0002589119230000762
Figure BDA0002589119230000762

dG可以是虚拟邻近像素Mi与虚拟邻近像素G之间的距离。d G may be the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel Mi and the virtual neighboring pixel G.

dR可以是虚拟邻近像素Mi与虚拟邻近像素R之间的距离。d R may be the distance between the virtual neighboring pixel Mi and the virtual neighboring pixel R.

图26示出根据示例的双向帧内预测。FIG. 26 shows bidirectional intra prediction according to an example.

处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的重建邻近像素和虚拟邻近像素中的至少一个来推导针对目标像素的预测值。The processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel using at least one of reconstructed neighbor pixels and virtual neighbor pixels in both prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素X的预测值。The processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel X using one or more of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

两个参考像素可包括参考像素Ref_A和参考像素Ref_B。The two reference pixels may include reference pixel Ref_A and reference pixel Ref_B.

Ref_A和Ref_B可以是分别位于经由目标像素的双向帧内预测推导出和选择的两个预测方向上的像素。Ref_A and Ref_B may be pixels located in two prediction directions respectively derived and selected via bidirectional intra prediction of the target pixel.

两个参考像素可以是重建邻近像素。例如,如图26中所示,Ref_A和Ref_B都可以是邻近像素。The two reference pixels may be reconstructed adjacent pixels. For example, as shown in FIG. 26, both Ref_A and Ref_B may be adjacent pixels.

图27示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素的双向帧内预测。27 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using virtual neighboring pixels, according to an example.

处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素X的预测值。The processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel X using one or more of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode.

两个参考像素可包括参考像素Ref_A和参考像素Ref_B。The two reference pixels may include reference pixel Ref_A and reference pixel Ref_B.

Ref_A和Ref_B可以是分别位于经由目标像素的双向帧内预测推导出和选择的两个预测方向上的像素。Ref_A and Ref_B may be pixels located in two prediction directions respectively derived and selected via bidirectional intra prediction of the target pixel.

两个参考像素中的至少一个可以是虚拟邻近像素。例如,如图27中所示,Ref_A可以是邻近像素,Ref_B可以是虚拟邻近像素。At least one of the two reference pixels may be a virtual adjacent pixel. For example, as shown in FIG. 27, Ref_A may be a neighboring pixel, and Ref_B may be a virtual neighboring pixel.

这样的参考像素可以是双向帧内预测的两个预测方向中的每一个上的特定位置处的像素。处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。Such a reference pixel may be a pixel at a specific position in each of the two prediction directions of bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may obtain reference pixels by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near a particular location.

例如,当特定位置不由整数坐标指示时,处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。For example, when the particular location is not indicated by integer coordinates, the processing unit may obtain reference pixels by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near the particular location.

例如,当特定位置处的像素不可用时,处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。For example, when a pixel at a particular location is unavailable, the processing unit may obtain a reference pixel by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near the particular location.

特定位置附近的邻近像素可以是与特定位置相邻的邻近像素。特定位置附近的虚拟邻近像素可以是与特定位置相邻的虚拟邻近像素。Neighboring pixels near the specific location may be neighboring pixels adjacent to the specific location. The virtual neighboring pixels near the specific location may be virtual neighboring pixels adjacent to the specific location.

针对目标像素推导出的预测值Pred_X可以是与Ref_A和Ref_B中的一个或更多个相关的统计值,并且可基于所述统计值推导预测值Pred_X。在下文中,实施例中的统计值可以是平均值、加权平均值、最大值、最小值、众数、中值和内插值中的至少一个。The predicted value Pred_X derived for the target pixel may be a statistical value associated with one or more of Ref_A and Ref_B, and the predicted value Pred_X may be derived based on the statistical value. Hereinafter, the statistical value in the embodiment may be at least one of an average value, a weighted average value, a maximum value, a minimum value, a mode, a median value, and an interpolated value.

如以下方程式21中所例示,可使用Ref_A和Ref_b来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 21 below, Ref_A and Ref_b may be used to derive the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel.

[方程式21][Equation 21]

Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Ref_B)Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Ref_B)

F()可以是特定函数。F() can be a specific function.

如上所述,处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素X的预测值。这里,当推导出针对目标像素X的预测值时,处理单元可分别将权重应用于位于两个预测方向上的两个参考像素。As described above, the processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel X using one or more of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode. Here, when deriving the prediction value for the target pixel X, the processing unit may apply weights to the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions, respectively.

例如,权重之和可以是1。For example, the sum of the weights can be 1.

两个参考像素可包括参考像素Ref_A和参考像素Ref_B。The two reference pixels may include reference pixel Ref_A and reference pixel Ref_B.

Ref_A和Ref_B可以是分别位于经由目标像素的双向帧内预测推导出和选择的两个预测方向上的像素。Ref_A and Ref_B may be pixels located in two prediction directions respectively derived and selected via bidirectional intra prediction of the target pixel.

例如,如图26中所示,Ref_A和Ref_B都可以是重建邻近像素。For example, as shown in FIG. 26, both Ref_A and Ref_B may be reconstructed neighboring pixels.

可选地,在示例中,如图27中所示,Ref_A可以是重建邻近像素,并且Ref_B可以是虚拟邻近像素。Alternatively, in an example, as shown in FIG. 27, Ref_A may be a reconstructed neighboring pixel, and Ref_B may be a virtual neighboring pixel.

如以下方程式22中所例示,可使用针对Ref_A的权重和针对Ref_B的权重来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 22 below, the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel may be derived using the weights for Ref_A and the weights for Ref_B.

[方程式22][Equation 22]

Pred_X=Dir_A*Ref_A+Dir_B*Ref_BPred_X=Dir_A*Ref_A+Dir_B*Ref_B

Dir_A可以是针对Ref_A的权重。Dir_B可以是针对Ref_B的权重。Dir_A may be a weight for Ref_A. Dir_B may be a weight for Ref_B.

Dir_A和Dir_B之和可以是1。The sum of Dir_A and Dir_B may be 1.

当生成针对目标块的推导出的预测值Pred_X时,处理单元可使用上述滤波以一起获取参照像素和针对所述参照像素的权重。When generating the derived prediction value Pred_X for the target block, the processing unit may use the filtering described above to obtain reference pixels and weights for the reference pixels together.

这样的参考像素可以是双向帧内预测的两个预测方向中的每一个上的特定位置处的像素。处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。此外,处理单元可将对应权重应用于所生成的参考像素。Such a reference pixel may be a pixel at a specific position in each of the two prediction directions of bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may obtain reference pixels by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near a particular location. Additionally, the processing unit may apply corresponding weights to the generated reference pixels.

图28示出根据示例的使用邻近像素与目标像素之间的距离的双向帧内预测。28 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using distances between neighboring pixels and target pixels, according to an example.

图29示出根据示例的使用虚拟邻近像素与目标像素之间的距离的双向帧内预测。29 illustrates bidirectional intra prediction using distances between virtual neighboring pixels and target pixels, according to an example.

如上所述,处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素X的预测值。这里,处理单元可针对位于两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的每一个使用根据对应参考像素与目标像素之间的距离的权重。As described above, the processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel X using one or more of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode. Here, the processing unit may use a weight according to the distance between the corresponding reference pixel and the target pixel for each of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions.

两个参考像素可包括参考像素Ref_A和参考像素Ref_B。The two reference pixels may include reference pixel Ref_A and reference pixel Ref_B.

Ref_A和Ref_B可以是分别位于经由目标像素的双向帧内预测推导出和选择的两个预测方向上的像素。Ref_A and Ref_B may be pixels located in two prediction directions respectively derived and selected via bidirectional intra prediction of the target pixel.

例如,如图28中所示,Ref_A和Ref_B都可以是重建邻近像素。For example, as shown in FIG. 28, both Ref_A and Ref_B may be reconstructed neighboring pixels.

可选地,在示例中,如图29中所示,Ref_A可以是重建邻近像素,并且Ref_B可以是虚拟邻近像素。Alternatively, in an example, as shown in FIG. 29, Ref_A may be a reconstructed neighboring pixel, and Ref_B may be a virtual neighboring pixel.

当生成针对目标块的推导出的预测值Pred_X时,处理单元可使用上述滤波以一起获取参考像素以及根据参考像素与目标像素之间的距离的权重。When generating the derived prediction value Pred_X for the target block, the processing unit may use the filtering described above to obtain the reference pixels together with the weights according to the distance between the reference pixels and the target pixels.

这样的参考像素可以是双向帧内预测的两个预测方向中的每一个上的特定位置处的像素。处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。此外,处理单元可将对应权重应用于所生成的参考像素。Such a reference pixel may be a pixel at a specific position in each of the two prediction directions of bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may obtain reference pixels by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near a particular location. Additionally, the processing unit may apply corresponding weights to the generated reference pixels.

如以下方程式23中所例示,可使用Ref_A、Dis_A、Ref_B和Dis_B中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 23 below, one or more of Ref_A, Dis_A, Ref_B, and Dis_B may be used to derive the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel.

[方程式23][Equation 23]

Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Dis_A,Ref_B,Dis_B)Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Dis_A,Ref_B,Dis_B)

F()可以是特定函数。F() can be a specific function.

Dis_A可以是目标像素与Ref_A之间的距离。Dis_B可以是目标像素与Ref_B之间的距离。Dis_A can be the distance between the target pixel and Ref_A. Dis_B can be the distance between the target pixel and Ref_B.

针对目标像素的推导出的预测值Pred_X可以是与Ref_A、Dis_A、Ref_B和Dis_B中的一个或更多个相关的统计值,并且可基于所述统计值来推导预测值Pred_X。The derived predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel may be a statistical value associated with one or more of Ref_A, Dis_A, Ref_B, and Dis_B, and the predicted value Pred_X may be derived based on the statistical value.

如以下方程式24中所例示,可基于根据目标像素与对应参考像素之间的距离的权重来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 24 below, the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel may be derived based on a weight according to the distance between the target pixel and the corresponding reference pixel.

[方程式24][Equation 24]

Figure BDA0002589119230000801
Figure BDA0002589119230000801

针对两个参考像素中的一个参考像素的权重可与两个参考像素中的另一个参考像素和目标像素之间的距离成正比。The weight for one of the two reference pixels may be proportional to the distance between the other of the two reference pixels and the target pixel.

针对两个参考像素中的一个参考像素的权重可与从目标像素到两个参考像素的距离之和成反比。The weight for one of the two reference pixels may be inversely proportional to the sum of the distances from the target pixel to the two reference pixels.

例如,针对Ref_B的权重可由以下方程式25给出:For example, the weight for Ref_B can be given by Equation 25 below:

[方程式25][Equation 25]

Figure BDA0002589119230000802
Figure BDA0002589119230000802

例如,针对Ref_A的权重可由以下方程式26给出。For example, the weight for Ref_A may be given by Equation 26 below.

[方程式26][Equation 26]

Figure BDA0002589119230000803
Figure BDA0002589119230000803

如上所述,处理单元可使用位于双向帧内预测模式的两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素X的预测值。这里,处理单元可针对两个预测方向上的两个参考像素中的每一个使用距离权重和方向权重中的一个或更多个。As described above, the processing unit may derive a prediction value for the target pixel X using one or more of the two reference pixels located in the two prediction directions of the bidirectional intra prediction mode. Here, the processing unit may use one or more of a distance weight and a direction weight for each of the two reference pixels in the two prediction directions.

距离权重可以是根据对应参考像素与目标像素之间的距离的权重。方向权重可以是根据从目标像素到对应参考像素的方向的权重。The distance weight may be a weight according to the distance between the corresponding reference pixel and the target pixel. The direction weight may be a weight according to the direction from the target pixel to the corresponding reference pixel.

当生成针对目标块的推导出的预测值Pred_X时,处理单元可使用上述滤波以一起获取参考像素、距离权重和方向权重。When generating the derived prediction value Pred_X for the target block, the processing unit may use the filtering described above to obtain reference pixels, distance weights, and direction weights together.

这样的参考像素可以是双向帧内预测的两个预测方向中的每一个上的特定位置处的像素。处理单元可通过对特定位置附近的邻近像素和/或虚拟邻近像素中的一个或更多个执行滤波来获取参考像素。此外,处理单元可将距离权重和方向权重中的一个或更多个应用于所生成的参考像素。Such a reference pixel may be a pixel at a specific position in each of the two prediction directions of bidirectional intra prediction. The processing unit may obtain reference pixels by performing filtering on one or more of neighboring pixels and/or virtual neighboring pixels near a particular location. Additionally, the processing unit may apply one or more of distance weights and direction weights to the generated reference pixels.

如以下方程式27中所例示,可使用Ref_A、Dis_A、Dir_A、Ref_B、Dis_B和Dir_B中的一个或更多个来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 27 below, one or more of Ref_A, Dis_A, Dir_A, Ref_B, Dis_B, and Dir_B may be used to derive the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel.

[方程式27][Equation 27]

Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Dis_A,Dir_A,Ref_B,Dis_B,Dir_B)Pred_X=F(Ref_A,Dis_A,Dir_A,Ref_B,Dis_B,Dir_B)

F()可以是特定函数。F() can be a specific function.

Dis_A可以是目标像素与Ref_A之间的距离。Dir_A可以是Ref_A的方向。Dir_A可以是从目标像素到Ref_A的方向。Dis_B可以是目标像素与Ref_B之间的距离。Dir_B可以是Ref_B的方向。Dir_B可以是从目标像素到Ref_B的方向。Dis_A can be the distance between the target pixel and Ref_A. Dir_A can be the direction of Ref_A. Dir_A can be the direction from the target pixel to Ref_A. Dis_B can be the distance between the target pixel and Ref_B. Dir_B can be the direction of Ref_B. Dir_B can be the direction from the target pixel to Ref_B.

针对目标像素的推导出的预测值Pred_X可以是与Ref_A、Dis_A、Dir_A、Ref_B、Dis_B和Dir_B中的一个或更多个相关的统计值,并且可基于所述统计值来推导预测值Pred_X。The derived predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel may be a statistical value associated with one or more of Ref_A, Dis_A, Dir_A, Ref_B, Dis_B, and Dir_B, and the predicted value Pred_X may be derived based on the statistical value.

如以下方程式28中所例示,可基于从目标像素到参考像素的距离和针对参考像素的方向权重来推导针对目标像素的预测值Pred_X。As illustrated in Equation 28 below, the predicted value Pred_X for the target pixel may be derived based on the distance from the target pixel to the reference pixel and the directional weight for the reference pixel.

[方程式28][Equation 28]

Figure BDA0002589119230000811
Figure BDA0002589119230000811

针对两个参考像素中的一个参考像素的权重可与两个参考像素中的另一个参考像素和目标像素之间的距离成正比。The weight for one of the two reference pixels may be proportional to the distance between the other of the two reference pixels and the target pixel.

此外,针对两个参考像素中的一个参考像素的权重可与针对所述一个参考像素的方向权重成正比。Furthermore, the weight for one of the two reference pixels may be proportional to the directional weight for the one reference pixel.

针对两个参考像素中的一个参考像素的权重可与从目标像素到两个参考像素的距离之和成反比。The weight for one of the two reference pixels may be inversely proportional to the sum of the distances from the target pixel to the two reference pixels.

例如,针对Ref_B的权重可由以下方程式29给出:For example, the weight for Ref_B can be given by Equation 29 below:

[方程式29][Equation 29]

Figure BDA0002589119230000812
Figure BDA0002589119230000812

例如,针对Ref_A的权重可由以下方程式30给出:For example, the weight for Ref_A can be given by the following equation 30:

[方程式30][Equation 30]

Figure BDA0002589119230000813
Figure BDA0002589119230000813

使用MPM来推导帧内预测模式Use MPM to derive intra prediction mode

当目标块的帧内预测模式被确定时,根据与目标块相关的编码参数,特定帧内预测模式将被用于目标块的帧内预测的可能性可以是高或低。考虑到这种可能性,可使用MPM列表。When the intra prediction mode of the target block is determined, the possibility that a specific intra prediction mode will be used for the intra prediction of the target block may be high or low according to encoding parameters related to the target block. Considering this possibility, MPM lists can be used.

剩余模式可以是除了MPM列表中的MPM之外的剩余帧内预测模式。换句话说,剩余模式可以是将MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM从所有帧内预测模式排除之后的剩余帧内预测模式。The remaining modes may be remaining intra prediction modes other than the MPMs in the MPM list. In other words, the remaining modes may be remaining intra prediction modes after excluding one or more MPMs in the MPM list from all intra prediction modes.

根据剩余模式将被用于目标块的帧内预测的概率,可将剩余模式分类为第一剩余模式集和第二剩余模式集。According to the probability that the remaining modes will be used for intra prediction of the target block, the remaining modes may be classified into a first remaining mode set and a second remaining mode set.

高概率被用于目标块的帧内预测的剩余模式可被定义为第一剩余模式集。第一剩余模式集可被称为“可能剩余模式”。换句话说,可能剩余模式可指示剩余帧内预测模式中的(即,除了MPM之外的所有帧内预测模式中的)高概率被用作目标块的帧内预测模式的帧内预测模式。A residual mode with a high probability of being used for intra prediction of the target block may be defined as a first residual mode set. The first set of remaining modes may be referred to as "possible remaining modes". In other words, the possible remaining mode may indicate an intra prediction mode of the remaining intra prediction modes (ie, of all intra prediction modes except MPM) that is used as the intra prediction mode of the target block with a high probability.

所有剩余模式中的未被包括在第一剩余模式集中的剩余模式可被定义为第二剩余模式集。第二剩余模式集可被称为“纯(真正的)剩余模式”。The remaining modes that are not included in the first remaining mode set among all remaining modes may be defined as the second remaining mode set. The second set of residual modes may be referred to as "pure (true) residual modes".

剩余模式指示符可指示剩余模式中的将被用于目标块的帧内预测的剩余模式。可选的,剩余模式指示符可指示作为可能剩余模式的剩余模式中的将被用于目标块的帧内预测的剩余模式。The remaining mode indicator may indicate a remaining mode to be used for intra prediction of the target block among the remaining modes. Optionally, the remaining mode indicator may indicate a remaining mode to be used for intra prediction of the target block among remaining modes as possible remaining modes.

图30示出根据实施例的使用剩余模式的帧内预测模式的确定。FIG. 30 illustrates determination of intra prediction mode using residual mode, according to an embodiment.

在步骤3010,处理单元可推导针对目标块的一个或更多个MPM。At step 3010, the processing unit may derive one or more MPMs for the target block.

处理单元可推导针对目标块的MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM。The processing unit may derive one or more MPMs in the list of MPMs for the target block.

在步骤3020,处理单元可确定目标块的帧内预测模式是否为MPM中的一个MPM。In step 3020, the processing unit may determine whether the intra-prediction mode of the target block is one of the MPMs.

处理单元可使用MPM使用指示符来确定目标块的帧内预测模式是否为MPM中的一个MPM。处理单元可从比特流获取MPM使用指示符。The processing unit may use the MPM usage indicator to determine whether the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the MPMs. The processing unit may obtain the MPM usage indicator from the bitstream.

例如,MPM使用指示符可具有诸如“prev_intra_pred_mode标志”的名称。For example, the MPM usage indicator may have a name such as "prev_intra_pred_mode flag".

当MPM使用指示符的值是第一值(例如,“1”)时,处理单元可确定目标块的帧内预测模式是MPM中的一个MPM。When the value of the MPM usage indicator is a first value (eg, "1"), the processing unit may determine that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the MPMs.

当MPM使用指示符的值是第二值(例如,“0”)时,处理单元可确定目标块的帧内预测模式不是MPM中的一个MPM。When the value of the MPM usage indicator is the second value (eg, "0"), the processing unit may determine that the intra prediction mode of the target block is not one of the MPMs.

如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式是MPM中的一个MPM,则可执行步骤3030。If it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the MPMs, step 3030 may be performed.

如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式不是MPM中的一个MPM,则可执行步骤3040。If it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is not one of the MPMs, step 3040 may be performed.

在步骤3030,处理单元可使用MPM指示符来确定目标块的帧内预测模式。At step 3030, the processing unit may use the MPM indicator to determine an intra prediction mode for the target block.

处理单元可从比特流获取MPM指示符。The processing unit may obtain the MPM indicator from the bitstream.

处理单元可将MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM之中的由MPM指示符指示的MPM确定为目标块的帧内预测模式。The processing unit may determine the MPM indicated by the MPM indicator among the one or more MPMs in the MPM list as the intra prediction mode of the target block.

例如,MPM指示符可以是针对MPM列表的索引。For example, the MPM indicator may be an index to the MPM list.

在步骤3040,处理单元可推导针对目标块的一个或更多个可能剩余模式。At step 3040, the processing unit may derive one or more possible remaining modes for the target block.

处理单元可推导针对目标块的可能剩余模式列表中的一个或更多个可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive one or more possible remaining modes in the list of possible remaining modes for the target block.

在步骤3050,处理单元可使用剩余模式指示符来确定目标块的帧内预测模式。At step 3050, the processing unit may use the remaining mode indicator to determine an intra-prediction mode for the target block.

处理单元可从比特流获取剩余模式指示符。The processing unit may obtain the remaining mode indicator from the bitstream.

处理单元可将可能剩余模式列表中的一个或更多个可能剩余模式之中的由剩余模式指示符指示的可能剩余模式确定为目标块的帧内预测模式。The processing unit may determine the possible remaining mode indicated by the remaining mode indicator among the one or more possible remaining modes in the list of possible remaining modes as the intra prediction mode of the target block.

例如,剩余模式指示符可以是可能剩余模式列表的索引。For example, the remaining mode indicator may be an index into a list of possible remaining modes.

如上所述,可基于与MPM列表和可能剩余模式列表对应的多个不同列表来确定目标块的帧内预测模式。As described above, the intra prediction mode of the target block may be determined based on a number of different lists corresponding to the MPM list and the list of possible remaining modes.

图31示出根据实施例的在确定是否使用MPM之后的MPM的推导以及使用剩余模式的帧内预测模式的确定。31 illustrates derivation of MPM after determining whether to use MPM and determination of intra prediction mode using residual mode, according to an embodiment.

上面参照图30描述的步骤3010和步骤3020的顺序可被改变。The order of steps 3010 and 3020 described above with reference to FIG. 30 may be changed.

在步骤3110,处理单元可确定MPM是否被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。At step 3110, the processing unit may determine whether MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

这里,MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测的事实可表示:1)目标块的帧内预测模式是MPM中的一个MPM的情况,以及2)目标块的帧内预测模式是剩余模式中的一个并且MPM列表被用于剩余模式的情况。Here, the fact that the MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block may represent: 1) the case where the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the MPMs, and 2) the intra prediction mode of the target block is the residual mode one of and the MPM list is used for the remaining modes.

处理单元可使用MPM使用指示符来确定MPM是否被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。处理单元可从比特流获取MPM使用指示符。The processing unit may use the MPM usage indicator to determine whether MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block. The processing unit may obtain the MPM usage indicator from the bitstream.

例如,MPM使用指示符可具有诸如“prev_intra_pred_mode标志”的名称。For example, the MPM usage indicator may have a name such as "prev_intra_pred_mode flag".

当MPM使用指示符的值为第一值(例如,“1”)时,处理单元可确定MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。When the value of the MPM usage indicator is a first value (eg, "1"), the processing unit may determine that MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

当MPM使用指示符的值为第二值(例如,“0”)时,处理单元可确定MPM不被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。When the value of the MPM usage indicator is a second value (eg, "0"), the processing unit may determine that MPM is not used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

处理单元可使用MPM指示符来确定MPM是否被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。如果确定MPM指示符指示MPM和可能剩余模式中的一个,则处理单元可确定MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。如果确定MPM指示符不指示MPM和可能剩余模式中的一个,则处理单元可确定MPM不被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。The processing unit may use the MPM indicator to determine whether MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block. If it is determined that the MPM indicator indicates one of MPM and possible remaining modes, the processing unit may determine that MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block. If it is determined that the MPM indicator does not indicate one of MPM and possible remaining modes, the processing unit may determine that MPM is not used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

如果确定MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测,则可执行步骤3120。If it is determined that MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block, step 3120 may be performed.

如果确定MPM不被用于执行目标块的帧内预测,则可终止所述处理,并且可执行基于附加方案的帧内预测。If it is determined that MPM is not used to perform intra prediction of the target block, the process may be terminated and intra prediction based on the additional scheme may be performed.

在步骤3120,处理单元可推导针对目标块的一个或更多个MPM。At step 3120, the processing unit may derive one or more MPMs for the target block.

处理单元可推导针对目标块的MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM。The processing unit may derive one or more MPMs in the list of MPMs for the target block.

在步骤3130,处理单元可确定可能剩余模式是否被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。At step 3130, the processing unit may determine whether the possible remaining mode is used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

可选地,处理单元可确定MPM和可能剩余模式中的哪一个被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。Alternatively, the processing unit may determine which of the MPM and possible remaining modes is used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

在示例中,如果确定MPM指示符指示可能剩余模式中的一个,则处理单元可确定可能剩余模式被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。In an example, if it is determined that the MPM indicator indicates one of the possible remaining modes, the processing unit may determine that the possible remaining modes are used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

在示例中,如果确定MPM指示符不指示可能剩余模式中的一个,则处理单元可确定可能剩余模式不被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。In an example, if it is determined that the MPM indicator does not indicate one of the possible remaining modes, the processing unit may determine that the possible remaining modes are not used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

在示例中,如果确定MPM指示符指示MPM中的一个,则处理单元可确定MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测。In an example, if it is determined that the MPM indicator indicates one of the MPMs, the processing unit may determine that the MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block.

在示例中,如果确定可能剩余模式被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测,则可执行步骤3150。In an example, if it is determined that the possible remaining mode is used to perform intra prediction for the target block, step 3150 may be performed.

在示例中,如果确定MPM被用于执行针对目标块的帧内预测,则可执行步骤3140。In an example, if it is determined that MPM is used to perform intra prediction for the target block, step 3140 may be performed.

在示例中,如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式是MPM中的一个,则可执行步骤3140。In an example, if it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of MPM, step 3140 may be performed.

在示例中,如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式是可能剩余模式中的一个,则可执行步骤3150。In an example, if it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the possible remaining modes, step 3150 may be performed.

步骤3140可与步骤3030对应。这里将省略重复的描述Step 3140 may correspond to step 3030 . Duplicate description will be omitted here

步骤3150可与步骤3040对应。这里将省略重复的描述Step 3150 may correspond to step 3040 . Duplicate description will be omitted here

可基于在步骤3120推导出的MPM来推导可能剩余模式。下面将详细描述MPM与可能剩余模式之间的关系以及在所述关系下的可能剩余模式的推导。The possible remaining modes may be derived based on the MPM derived at step 3120. The relationship between the MPM and the possible remaining modes and the derivation of the possible remaining modes under the relationship will be described in detail below.

步骤3160可与步骤3050对应。这里将省略重复的描述Step 3160 may correspond to step 3050. Duplicate description will be omitted here

可选择性地执行步骤3040和步骤3150。在示例中,处理单元可使用剩余模式使用指示符来确定目标块的帧内预测模式是否是可能剩余模式中的一个。处理单元可从比特流获取剩余模式使用指示符。当剩余模式使用指示符的值为第一值(例如,“1”)时,处理单元可确定目标块的帧内预测模式是可能剩余模式中的一个。当剩余模式使用指示符的值为第二值(例如,“0”)时,处理单元可确定目标块的帧内预测模式不是可能剩余模式中的一个。如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式是可能剩余模式中的一个,则可执行步骤3040或3150。如果确定目标块的帧内预测模式不是可能剩余模式中的一个,则可终止所述处理,并且可对既不使用MPM也不使用可能剩余模式的附加帧内预测进行处理。Steps 3040 and 3150 can be optionally performed. In an example, the processing unit may use the remaining mode usage indicator to determine whether the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the possible remaining modes. The processing unit may obtain the remaining mode usage indicator from the bitstream. When the value of the remaining mode usage indicator is a first value (eg, "1"), the processing unit may determine that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the possible remaining modes. When the value of the remaining mode usage indicator is a second value (eg, "0"), the processing unit may determine that the intra prediction mode of the target block is not one of the possible remaining modes. If it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is one of the possible remaining modes, step 3040 or 3150 may be performed. If it is determined that the intra prediction mode of the target block is not one of the possible remaining modes, the process may be terminated, and additional intra prediction using neither MPM nor the possible remaining modes may be processed.

可能剩余模式的推导Derivation of possible residual modes

图32示出根据示例的用于推导MPM候选的块。Figure 32 shows blocks for deriving MPM candidates, according to an example.

处理单元可将所有帧内预测模式中的除了MPM之外的剩余帧内预测模式中的一个或更多个推导为可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive one or more of the remaining intra-prediction modes other than MPM among all intra-prediction modes as possible remaining modes.

可能剩余模式的数量可被预先定义。例如,可能剩余模式的数量可以是2或3。The number of possible remaining modes can be predefined. For example, the number of possible remaining modes may be 2 or 3.

例如,假设帧内预测模式的总数是67并且MPM的数量是6,则可能剩余模式的数量可以是2。For example, assuming that the total number of intra prediction modes is 67 and the number of MPMs is 6, the number of possible remaining modes may be 2.

例如,假设帧内预测模式的总数是67并且MPM的数量是6,则可能剩余模式的数量可以是3。For example, assuming that the total number of intra prediction modes is 67 and the number of MPMs is 6, the number of possible remaining modes may be 3.

六个MPM候选(即,candModeList[0]到candModeList[5])可将如下所述被推导。The six MPM candidates (ie, candModeList[0] to candModeList[5]) may be derived as described below.

1)当目标块的邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA和目标块的邻近块B的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeB彼此相同,并且邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA大于INTRA_DC时,可如以下代码1中所示推导六个MPM候选。1) When the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeA of the adjacent block A of the target block and the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeB of the adjacent block B of the target block are the same as each other, and the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeA of the adjacent block A is greater than INTRA_DC, the following code 1 The six MPM candidates are derived as shown in .

[代码1][Code 1]

candModeList[0]=邻近块A的帧内预测模式(candIntraPredModeA)candModeList[0] = Intra prediction mode of adjacent block A (candIntraPredModeA)

candModeList[1]=INTRA_PLANARcandModeList[1]=INTRA_PLANAR

candModeList[2]=INTRA_DCcandModeList[2]=INTRA_DC

candModeList[3]=2+((candIntraPredModeA+61)%64)candModeList[3]=2+((candIntraPredModeA+61)%64)

candModeList[4]=2+((candIntraPredModeA-1)%64)candModeList[4]=2+((candIntraPredModeA-1)%64)

candModeList[5]=2+((candIntraPredModeA+60)%64)candModeList[5]=2+((candIntraPredModeA+60)%64)

2)当不满足1)中的上述条件时(即,当邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA和邻近块B的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeB彼此不相同并且邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA或邻近块B的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeB大于INTRA_DC时),可如以下代码2至代码7中所示推导MPM候选:2) When the above conditions in 1) are not satisfied (that is, when the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeA of the adjacent block A and the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeB of the adjacent block B are different from each other and the intra prediction mode of the adjacent block A candIntraPredModeA or adjacent When the intra prediction mode of block B candIntraPredModeB is greater than INTRA_DC), MPM candidates can be derived as shown in the following code 2 to code 7:

[代码2][Code 2]

minAB=candModeList[(candModeList[0]>candModeList[1])?1:0]minAB=candModeList[(candModeList[0]>candModeList[1])? 1:0]

maxAB=candModeList[(candModeList[0]>candModeList[1])?0:1]maxAB=candModeList[(candModeList[0]>candModeList[1])? 0:1]

2-1)当邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA和邻近块B的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeB都大于INTRA_DC时,可如以下代码3中所示推导MPM候选:2-1) When both the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeA of the adjacent block A and the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeB of the adjacent block B are greater than INTRA_DC, the MPM candidate can be derived as shown in the following code 3:

[代码3][Code 3]

candModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeAcandModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeA

candModeList[1]=candIntraPredModeBcandModeList[1]=candIntraPredModeB

candModeList[2]=INTRA_PLANARcandModeList[2]=INTRA_PLANAR

candModeList[3]=INTRA_DCcandModeList[3]=INTRA_DC

当推导出的MaxAB与MinAB之间的差落入从2到62的范围内时,可如以下代码4中所示推导第五MPM候选和第六MPM候选:When the difference between the derived MaxAB and MinAB falls within the range from 2 to 62, the fifth and sixth MPM candidates can be derived as shown in Code 4 below:

[代码4][Code 4]

candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB+61)%64)candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB+61)%64)

candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB-1)%64)candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB-1)%64)

当推导出的MaxAB与MinAB之间的差不落入从2到62的范围内时,可如以下代码5中所示推导第五MPM候选和第六MPM候选:When the difference between the derived MaxAB and MinAB does not fall within the range from 2 to 62, the fifth and sixth MPM candidates can be derived as shown in Code 5 below:

[代码5][Code 5]

candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB+60)%64)candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB+60)%64)

candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB)%64)candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB)%64)

2-2)当不满足2-1)中的条件时(即,当邻近块A的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeA和邻近块B的帧内预测模式candIntraPredModeB中的至少一个大于INTRA_DC时),可如以下代码6中所示推导六个MPM候选:2-2) When the condition in 2-1) is not satisfied (that is, when at least one of the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeA of the adjacent block A and the intra prediction mode candIntraPredModeB of the adjacent block B is greater than INTRA_DC), it may be as follows Six MPM candidates are derived as shown in Listing 6:

[代码6][Code 6]

candModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeAcandModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeA

candModeList[1]=candIntraPredModeBcandModeList[1]=candIntraPredModeB

candModeList[2]=1-minABcandModeList[2]=1-minAB

candModeList[3]=2+((maxAB+61)%64)candModeList[3]=2+((maxAB+61)%64)

candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB-1)%64)candModeList[4]=2+((maxAB-1)%64)

candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB+60)%64)candModeList[5]=2+((maxAB+60)%64)

3)当不满足1)和2)中的上述条件时,可如以下代码7中所示推导六个MPM候选:3) When the above conditions in 1) and 2) are not satisfied, six MPM candidates can be derived as shown in the following code 7:

[代码7][Code 7]

candModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeAcandModeList[0]=candIntraPredModeA

candModeList[1]=(candModeList[0]==INTRA_PLANAR)?INTRA_DC:INTRA_PLANARcandModeList[1]=(candModeList[0]==INTRA_PLANAR)? INTRA_DC:INTRA_PLANAR

candModeList[2]=INTRA_ANGULAR50candModeList[2]=INTRA_ANGULAR50

candModeList[3]=INTRA_ANGULAR18candModeList[3]=INTRA_ANGULAR18

candModeList[4]=INTRA_ANGULAR46candModeList[4]=INTRA_ANGULAR46

candModeList[5]=INTRA_ANGULAR54candModeList[5]=INTRA_ANGULAR54

处理单元可基于目标块的空间邻近块和时间邻近块推导可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive possible remaining modes based on spatially and temporally neighboring blocks of the target block.

处理单元可将目标块的空间邻近块的帧内预测模式和目标块的时间邻近块的帧内预测模式中的不属于MPM的至少一个帧内预测模式推导为可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive at least one intra prediction mode not belonging to the MPM among the intra prediction modes of the spatially adjacent blocks of the target block and the intra prediction modes of the temporally adjacent blocks of the target block as possible remaining modes.

例如,当目标块的邻近块中的一个的帧内预测模式的编号是30并且另一帧内预测模式的编号是40时,并且当第30号帧内预测模式属于MPM并且第40号帧内预测模式不属于MPM时,第40号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when the number of the intra prediction mode of one of the adjacent blocks of the target block is 30 and the number of the other intra prediction mode is 40, and when the intra prediction mode No. 30 belongs to MPM and the intra prediction mode No. 40 When the prediction mode does not belong to the MPM, the intra prediction mode No. 40 may be derived as a possible remaining mode.

处理单元可基于从所有MPM中选择的MPM来推导可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive possible remaining modes based on the MPM selected from all MPMs.

所选择的MPM可以是按顺序在前的预定义数量的MPM。这里,按顺序在前的MPM可表示由较小数量的二进制位定义的帧内预测模式。可选地,按顺序在前的MPM可以是在MPM列表中具有最低索引的MPM。The selected MPM may be a predefined number of MPMs preceding in order. Here, the preceding MPM may represent an intra prediction mode defined by a smaller number of bins. Alternatively, the first MPM in order may be the MPM with the lowest index in the MPM list.

在实施例中,所选择的MPM的预定义数量可以是“1”。In an embodiment, the predefined number of selected MPMs may be "1".

推导出的可能剩余模式的编号可以是第一MPM的编号和偏移之和。例如,当第一MPM的编号是30时,编号“30”和偏移“1”之和是31,并且因此第31号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。The derived number of possible remaining modes may be the sum of the number of the first MPM and the offset. For example, when the number of the first MPM is 30, the sum of the number "30" and the offset "1" is 31, and thus the intra prediction mode No. 31 can be derived as a possible remaining mode.

推导出的可能剩余模式的编号可以是第一MPM的编号与偏移之间的差。例如,当第一MPM的编号为30时,编号“30”与偏移“1”之间的差为29,并且因此第29号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。The derived number of possible remaining modes may be the difference between the number of the first MPM and the offset. For example, when the number of the first MPM is 30, the difference between the number "30" and the offset "1" is 29, and thus the No. 29 intra prediction mode can be derived as a possible remaining mode.

推导出的可能剩余模式的编号可以是:1)第一MPM的编号和偏移之和、以及2)第一MPM的编号与偏移之间的差。在示例中,当第一MPM的编号为30时,第29号帧内预测模式和第31号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。The derived number of possible remaining modes may be: 1) the sum of the number and offset of the first MPM, and 2) the difference between the number and offset of the first MPM. In an example, when the number of the first MPM is 30, the intra prediction mode No. 29 and the intra prediction mode No. 31 may be derived as possible remaining modes.

推导出的可能剩余模式的编号可以是:1)第一MPM的编号和第一偏移之和、以及2)第一MPM的编号与第一偏移之间的差。例如,第一偏移可以是1。The derived number of possible remaining modes may be: 1) the sum of the number of the first MPM and the first offset, and 2) the difference between the number of the first MPM and the first offset. For example, the first offset may be one.

当1)具有与第一MPM的编号和第一偏移之和对应的编号的帧内预测模式或者2)具有与第一MPM的编号与第一偏移之间的差对应的编号的帧内预测模式是现有MPM中的一个MPM时,1)具有与第一MPM的编号和第二偏移之和对应的编号的帧内预测模式或者2)具有与第一MPM的编号与第二偏移之间的差对应的编号的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。例如,第二偏移可以是2。可选地,第二偏移可与第一偏移不同。可选地,第二偏移可以是通过将“1”与第一偏移相加或者通过将预定义编号与第一偏移相加而获得的值。When 1) an intra prediction mode with a number corresponding to the sum of the number of the first MPM and the first offset or 2) an intra prediction mode with a number corresponding to the difference between the number of the first MPM and the first offset When the prediction mode is one of the existing MPMs, 1) an intra prediction mode with a number corresponding to the sum of the number of the first MPM and the second offset, or 2) an intra prediction mode with a number corresponding to the number of the first MPM and the second offset. The numbered intra prediction mode corresponding to the difference between the shifts may be derived as possible remaining modes. For example, the second offset may be 2. Optionally, the second offset may be different from the first offset. Alternatively, the second offset may be a value obtained by adding "1" to the first offset or by adding a predefined number to the first offset.

例如,当具有与第一MPM的编号和第一偏移之和对应的编号的帧内预测模式是现有MPM中的一个MPM时,具有与第一MPM的编号和第二偏移之和对应的编号的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when the intra prediction mode having the number corresponding to the sum of the number of the first MPM and the first offset is one of the existing MPMs, the intra prediction mode having the number corresponding to the sum of the number of the first MPM and the second offset The numbered intra prediction modes of can be derived as possible remaining modes.

例如,当具有与第一MPM的编号和第一偏移之间的差对应的编号的帧内预测模式是现有MPM中的一个MPM时,具有与第一MPM的编号与第二偏移之间的差对应的编号的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when the intra prediction mode having the number corresponding to the difference between the number of the first MPM and the first offset is one of the existing MPMs, the intra prediction mode having the number corresponding to the difference between the number of the first MPM and the second offset The numbered intra prediction modes corresponding to the difference between can be derived as possible remaining modes.

在实施例中,所选择的MPM的预定义数量可以是‘3’。In an embodiment, the predefined number of selected MPMs may be '3'.

例如,处理单元可通过将偏移与MPM列表中的一个或更多个MPM之中的第一MPM、第二MPM和第三MPM的编号相加或者通过从第一MPM、第二MPM和第三MPM的编号减去所述偏移来确定可能剩余模式的编号。For example, the processing unit may add the offset to the number of the first MPM, the second MPM and the third MPM among the one or more MPMs in the MPM list or by adding the offset from the first MPM, the second MPM and the third MPM The offset is subtracted from the number of the three MPMs to determine the number of possible remaining modes.

例如,当第一MPM、第二MPM和第三MPM的编号分别是30、40和50时,推导出的可能剩余模式的编号可分别是31、41和51。For example, when the numbers of the first MPM, the second MPM, and the third MPM are 30, 40, and 50, respectively, the numbers of possible remaining modes that are derived may be 31, 41, and 51, respectively.

当特定模式未被包括在MPM中时,处理单元可将特定模式推导为可能剩余模式。例如,特定模式可以是非方向模式。非方向模式可以是DC模式和/或平面模式。When the particular mode is not included in the MPM, the processing unit may derive the particular mode as possible remaining modes. For example, the specific mode may be a non-directional mode. The non-directional mode may be a DC mode and/or a planar mode.

例如,当DC模式未被包括在MPM中时,DC模式可变为第一可能剩余模式或第二可能剩余模式。For example, when the DC mode is not included in the MPM, the DC mode may become the first possible residual mode or the second possible residual mode.

例如,当平面模式未被包括在MPM中时,平面模式可变为第一可能剩余模式或第二可能剩余模式。For example, when the planar mode is not included in the MPM, the planar mode may be the first possible residual mode or the second possible residual mode.

处理单元可基于MPM的方向来推导可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive possible remaining modes based on the direction of the MPM.

例如,处理单元可基于MPM的方向将针对指定方向的帧内预测模式推导为可能剩余模式。For example, the processing unit may derive an intra-prediction mode for a specified direction as a possible remaining mode based on the direction of the MPM.

例如,处理单元可基于MPM的方向将具有不属于指定方向上的MPM的方向的方向的帧内预测模式推导为可能剩余模式。For example, the processing unit may derive an intra-prediction mode having a direction that does not belong to the direction of the MPM in the specified direction as a possible remaining mode based on the direction of the MPM.

例如,当所有MPM都是具有水平方向性的帧内预测模式时,具有垂直方向性的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。具有水平方向性的帧内预测模式可以是具有水平分量的改变大于垂直分量的改变的斜率的帧内预测模式。具有垂直方向性的帧内预测模式可以是具有垂直分量的改变大于水平分量的改变的斜率的帧内预测模式。For example, when all MPMs are intra prediction modes with horizontal directionality, intra prediction modes with vertical directionality may be derived as possible remaining modes. The intra prediction mode with horizontal directionality may be an intra prediction mode having a slope in which the change of the horizontal component is larger than that of the vertical component. The intra prediction mode having vertical directivity may be an intra prediction mode having a slope in which the change of the vertical component is larger than that of the horizontal component.

例如,当所有MPM都是具有垂直方向性的帧内预测模式时,具有水平方向性的帧内预测模式或水平帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when all MPMs are intra prediction modes with vertical directionality, intra prediction modes with horizontal directionality or horizontal intra prediction modes may be derived as possible remaining modes.

例如,当所有MPM都是具有水平方向性的帧内预测模式时,具有垂直方向性的帧内预测模式或垂直帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when all MPMs are intra prediction modes with horizontal directionality, intra prediction modes with vertical directionality or vertical intra prediction modes may be derived as possible remaining modes.

处理单元可基于所选择的MPM的统计值来推导可能剩余模式。所选择的MPM可以是按顺序在前的预定义数量的MPM。The processing unit may derive possible remaining modes based on the statistics of the selected MPM. The selected MPM may be a predefined number of MPMs preceding in order.

换句话说,具有与所述统计值对应的编号的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。In other words, the intra prediction mode with the number corresponding to the statistic value can be derived as the possible remaining mode.

例如,编号为第一MPM的编号和第二MPM的编号的平均值的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。当第一MPM的编号为30并且第二MPM的编号为40时,第35号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, the intra prediction mode numbered as the average of the number of the first MPM and the number of the second MPM may be derived as the possible remaining modes. When the number of the first MPM is 30 and the number of the second MPM is 40, the intra prediction mode No. 35 may be derived as a possible remaining mode.

当基于所选择的MPM的统计值推导可能剩余模式时,处理单元可排除作为非方向模式的DC模式和平面模式。可选地,当从所有MPM中选择按顺序在前的预定义数量的MPM时,如果在按顺序在前的预定义数量的MPM中存在作为非方向模式的MPM,则处理单元可不选择作为非方向模式的对应MPM,而可选择作为方向模式的后续MPM。When deriving possible remaining modes based on the statistics of the selected MPM, the processing unit may exclude the DC mode and the planar mode as non-directional modes. Optionally, when selecting a pre-defined number of MPMs in sequence from all MPMs, the processing unit may not select an MPM that is a non-directional mode among the pre-defined number of MPMs in sequence. The corresponding MPM for the directional mode, and the subsequent MPM for the directional mode can be selected.

例如,处理单元可计算总共六个MPM中的按顺序在前的两个MPM的平均值,并且可将具有与所述平均值对应的编号的帧内预测模式推导为可能剩余模式。当六个MPM分别指示DC模式、第30号模式、平面模式、第10号模式、第50号模式和第52号模式时,可从选择中排除作为DC模式的MPM和作为平面模式的MPM。作为按顺序在前的两个MPM的第30号MPM和第10号MPM可由于这样的排除而被选择,并且30和10的平均值是20,因此第20号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, the processing unit may calculate an average of the first two MPMs in order out of a total of six MPMs, and may derive an intra-prediction mode with a number corresponding to the average as a possible remaining mode. When the six MPMs respectively indicate the DC mode, the 30th mode, the plane mode, the 10th mode, the 50th mode and the 52nd mode, the MPM as the DC mode and the MPM as the plane mode may be excluded from selection. MPM No. 30 and MPM No. 10, which are the first two MPMs in order, can be selected due to such exclusion, and the average value of 30 and 10 is 20, so the intra prediction mode No. 20 can be derived as possible remaining modes.

处理单元可基于所有MPM的统计值来推导可能剩余模式。被推导为可能剩余模式的帧内预测模式的编号可以是该统计值。例如,MPM的总数可以是6,并且该统计值可以是其平均值。The processing unit may derive possible remaining modes based on the statistics of all MPMs. The number of intra prediction modes derived as possible remaining modes may be this statistic. For example, the total number of MPMs may be 6, and the statistic may be its average.

当基于所选择的MPM的统计值推导可能剩余模式时,处理单元可排除作为非方向模式的DC模式和平面模式。When deriving possible remaining modes based on the statistics of the selected MPM, the processing unit may exclude the DC mode and the planar mode as non-directional modes.

例如,处理单元可从所有MPM排除DC模式和平面模式,并且可基于剩余MPM的统计值来推导可能剩余模式。具有与该统计值对应的编号的帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, the processing unit may exclude DC mode and planar mode from all MPMs, and may derive possible remaining modes based on statistics of the remaining MPMs. Intra prediction modes with numbers corresponding to the statistic can be derived as possible remaining modes.

处理单元可使用可能剩余模式候选列表来推导可能剩余模式。The processing unit may use the list of possible remaining mode candidates to derive the possible remaining modes.

可能剩余模式候选列表可包括一个或更多个可能剩余模式候选。可能剩余模式候选列表可由编码设备1600和解码设备1700等同地定义。The list of possible remaining mode candidates may include one or more possible remaining mode candidates. The list of possible remaining mode candidates may be equally defined by the encoding apparatus 1600 and the decoding apparatus 1700 .

处理单元可顺序地搜索在可能剩余模式候选列表中存在的可能剩余模式候选,并且可将不属于MPM的可能剩余模式候选推导为可能剩余模式。The processing unit may sequentially search for possible remaining mode candidates present in the list of possible remaining mode candidates, and may derive possible remaining mode candidates that do not belong to the MPM as possible remaining modes.

顺序地搜索可能剩余模式候选可表示在可能剩余模式候选列表中具有较小索引的可能剩余模式候选比具有较大索引的可能剩余模式候选更早地被搜索。Searching for possible remaining mode candidates sequentially may mean that possible remaining mode candidates with smaller indexes in the list of possible remaining mode candidates are searched earlier than possible remaining mode candidates with larger indexes.

可预先定义可能剩余模式候选列表中的可能剩余模式候选之中的被推导为可能剩余模式的可能剩余模式候选的数量。The number of possible remaining mode candidates derived as possible remaining modes among the possible remaining mode candidates in the possible remaining mode candidate list may be predefined.

例如,当可能剩余模式候选按照第30号帧内预测模式、第40号帧内预测模式、第50号帧内预测模式、第20号帧内预测模式和第10号帧内预测模式的顺序被定义,并且第30号帧内预测模式和第40号帧内预测模式属于MPM时,如果被推导为可能剩余模式的可能剩余模式候选的数量是1,则第50号帧内预测模式可被推导为可能剩余模式。For example, when the possible remaining mode candidates are selected in the order of intra prediction mode No. 30, intra prediction mode No. 40, intra prediction mode No. 50, intra prediction mode No. 20, and intra prediction mode No. 10 defined, and intra prediction mode No. 30 and intra prediction mode No. 40 belong to MPM, if the number of possible residual mode candidates that are derived as possible residual modes is 1, then intra prediction mode No. 50 can be derived for possible remaining modes.

可选地,如上所述,当可能剩余模式候选被定义,并且第30号帧内预测模式和第40号帧内预测模式属于MPM时,如果被推导为可能剩余模式的可能剩余模式候选的数量是3,则第50号帧内预测模式、第20号帧内预测模式和第10号帧内预测模式可分别被推导为第一可能剩余模式、第二可能剩余模式和第三可能剩余模式。Optionally, as described above, when possible remaining mode candidates are defined, and intra prediction mode No. 30 and intra prediction mode No. 40 belong to MPM, if the number of possible remaining mode candidates that are derived as possible remaining modes is 3, then the intra prediction mode No. 50, the intra prediction mode No. 20 and the intra prediction mode No. 10 can be derived as the first possible residual mode, the second possible residual mode and the third possible residual mode, respectively.

处理单元可基于剩余模式候选中的帧内预测模式的数量来将至少一个帧内预测模式推导为可能剩余模式。The processing unit may derive at least one intra-prediction mode as a possible remaining mode based on the number of intra-prediction modes in the remaining mode candidates.

在示例中,在通过从总共67个帧内预测模式排除六个MPM候选模式而获得的61个剩余模式候选之中,可按照升序从具有最小帧内预测模式编号的模式单独推导第一可能剩余模式、第二可能剩余模式和第三可能剩余模式。在示例中,在帧内预测模式的数量是67并且MPM的数量是6(即,20、30、0、1、31、32)的情况下,第一剩余模式可被定义为剩余模式(2、3、4、……、19、21、22、……、29、33、34、……、66)中的具有最小帧内预测模式编号的三个剩余模式,即,剩余模式(2、3、4)。In an example, among 61 remaining mode candidates obtained by excluding six MPM candidate modes from a total of 67 intra-prediction modes, the first possible remaining mode may be derived individually from the mode with the smallest intra-prediction mode number in ascending order mode, the second possible remaining mode and the third possible remaining mode. In an example, where the number of intra prediction modes is 67 and the number of MPMs is 6 (ie, 20, 30, 0, 1, 31, 32), the first remaining mode may be defined as the remaining mode (2 , 3, 4, . . . , 19, 21, 22, . . , 29, 33, 34, . 3, 4).

在示例中,在通过从总共67个帧内预测模式排除六个MPM候选模式而获得的61个剩余模式候选中,可按照降序从具有最大帧内预测模式编号的模式单独推导第一可能剩余模式、第二可能剩余模式和第三可能剩余模式。In an example, among 61 remaining mode candidates obtained by excluding six MPM candidate modes from a total of 67 intra-prediction modes, the first possible remaining mode may be derived individually from the mode with the largest intra-prediction mode number in descending order , the second possible residual mode and the third possible residual mode.

使用剩余模式指示符来确定帧内预测模式Use the remaining mode indicator to determine the intra prediction mode

图33示出根据示例的剩余模式指示符的二值化。33 illustrates binarization of residual mode indicators according to an example.

在图33中,描绘了剩余模式指示符的符号和截断二进制码,并且描绘了由符号和截断二进制码指示的剩余模式。In FIG. 33, the sign and truncated binary code of the remaining mode indicator are depicted, and the remaining mode indicated by the sign and the truncated binary code is depicted.

处理单元可使用剩余模式指示符来确定目标块的帧内预测模式。The processing unit may use the remaining mode indicator to determine the intra-prediction mode of the target block.

由剩余模式指示符指示的帧内预测模式可包括可能剩余模式和纯剩余模式两者。换句话说,剩余模式指示符可将可能剩余模式和纯剩余模式中的一个指示为目标块的帧内预测模式。The intra prediction mode indicated by the remaining mode indicator may include both a possible remaining mode and a pure remaining mode. In other words, the residual mode indicator may indicate one of the possible residual mode and the pure residual mode as the intra prediction mode of the target block.

剩余模式指示符可以是使用截断二进制编码方法被二值化的值。The remaining mode indicator may be a value binarized using a truncated binary encoding method.

如图33中所示,可能剩余模式中的二进制位的数量和纯剩余模式中的二进制位的数量可彼此不同。As shown in FIG. 33, the number of bins in the possible residual mode and the number of bins in the pure residual mode may be different from each other.

例如,可能剩余模式的数量可以是2。For example, the number of possible remaining modes may be two.

例如,假设帧内预测模式的总数是67并且MPM的数量是6,则可能剩余模式的数量可以是2,并且纯剩余模式的数量可以是59。换句话说,所有帧内预测模式中的不属于MPM的帧内预测模式可被分类为两个可能剩余模式和59个纯剩余模式。For example, assuming that the total number of intra prediction modes is 67 and the number of MPMs is 6, the number of possible remaining modes may be 2 and the number of pure remaining modes may be 59. In other words, intra prediction modes that do not belong to MPM among all intra prediction modes can be classified into two possible residual modes and 59 pure residual modes.

可能剩余模式可具有五个二进制位,并且纯剩余模式可具有六个二进制位。The possible residual mode may have five bins, and the pure residual mode may have six bins.

在实施例中,针对两个可能剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为“00000”和“00001”。“00000”可指示第一可能剩余模式。“00001”可指示第二可能剩余模式。In an embodiment, the bins for the two possible remaining modes may be defined as "00000" and "00001". "00000" may indicate the first possible remaining mode. "00001" may indicate the second possible remaining mode.

针对59个纯剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为除了“000000”、“000001”、“000010”和“000011”之外的六个二进制位。例如,针对纯剩余模式的二进制位可包括“000100”、“000101”等。The bins for the 59 pure residual modes may be defined as six bins other than "000000", "000001", "000010" and "000011". For example, the bins for pure residual mode may include "000100", "000101", etc.

如上所述,处理单元可使用二值化值来对剩余模式指示符进行编码和/或解码。As described above, the processing unit may use the binarized values to encode and/or decode the remaining mode indicators.

在另一实施例中,针对两个可能剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为“11110”和“11111”。“11110”可指示第一可能剩余模式。“11111”可指示第二可能剩余模式。In another embodiment, the bins for the two possible remaining modes may be defined as "11110" and "11111". "11110" may indicate the first possible remaining mode. "11111" may indicate the second possible remaining mode.

针对59个纯剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为除了“111100”、“111101”、“111110”和“111111”之外的六个二进制位。例如,针对纯剩余模式的二进制位可包括“111000”、“111001”等。The bins for the 59 pure residual modes may be defined as six bins other than "111100", "111101", "111110" and "111111". For example, the bins for pure residual mode may include "111000", "111001", etc.

如上所述,处理单元可使用二值化值来对剩余模式指示符进行编码和/或解码。As described above, the processing unit may use the binarized values to encode and/or decode the remaining mode indicators.

当帧内预测模式的总数是67并且MPM的数量是6时,可能剩余模式的数量可以是3并且纯剩余模式的数量可以是58。换句话说,所有帧内预测模式中的不属于MPM的帧内预测模式可被分类为三个可能剩余模式和58个纯剩余模式。When the total number of intra prediction modes is 67 and the number of MPMs is 6, the number of possible remaining modes may be 3 and the number of pure remaining modes may be 58. In other words, intra prediction modes that do not belong to MPM among all intra prediction modes can be classified into three possible residual modes and 58 pure residual modes.

可能剩余模式可具有五个二进制位,并且纯剩余模式可具有六个二进制位。The possible residual mode may have five bins, and the pure residual mode may have six bins.

在实施例中,针对三个可能剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为“00000”、“00001”和“00010”。“00000”可指示第一可能剩余模式。“00001”可指示第二可能剩余模式。“00010”可指示第三可能剩余模式。In an embodiment, the bins for the three possible remaining modes may be defined as "00000", "00001" and "00010". "00000" may indicate the first possible remaining mode. "00001" may indicate the second possible remaining mode. "00010" may indicate the third possible remaining mode.

针对58个纯剩余模式的二进制位可被定义为二值化值和偏移3之和。例如,针对纯剩余模式的二进制位可包括“000110”(=“000011”+“000011”)、“000111”(=“000100”+“000011”)、“001000”、“001001”等。The bins for the 58 pure residual modes can be defined as the sum of the binarization value and offset 3. For example, the bins for pure residual mode may include "000110" (="000011" + "000011"), "000111" (="000100" + "000011"), "001000", "001001", and the like.

如上所述,处理单元可使用二值化值来对剩余模式指示符进行编码和/或解码。As described above, the processing unit may use the binarized values to encode and/or decode the remaining mode indicators.

图34是根据实施例的目标块预测方法和比特流生成方法的流程图。FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a target block prediction method and a bitstream generation method according to an embodiment.

根据本实施例的目标块预测方法和比特流生成方法可由编码设备1600执行。本实施例可以是目标块编码方法或视频编码方法的一部分。The target block prediction method and the bitstream generation method according to the present embodiment may be performed by the encoding apparatus 1600 . This embodiment may be part of a target block coding method or a video coding method.

在步骤3410,处理单元1610可确定将被应用于目标块的编码的帧内预测模式。At step 3410, processing unit 1610 may determine an intra-prediction mode to be applied to the encoding of the target block.

步骤3410可与上面参照图18描述的步骤1810对应。此外,步骤3410可与上面参照图30描述的步骤3010、步骤3020、步骤3030、步骤3040和步骤3050对应。此外,步骤3410可与上面参照图31描述的步骤3110、步骤3120、步骤3130、步骤3140和步骤3150对应。Step 3410 may correspond to step 1810 described above with reference to FIG. 18 . Also, step 3410 may correspond to step 3010 , step 3020 , step 3030 , step 3040 , and step 3050 described above with reference to FIG. 30 . Also, step 3410 may correspond to step 3110 , step 3120 , step 3130 , step 3140 , and step 3150 described above with reference to FIG. 31 .

所确定的帧内预测模式可以是1)双向帧内预测模式和/或2)使用剩余模式的帧内预测模式。The determined intra prediction mode may be 1) a bidirectional intra prediction mode and/or 2) an intra prediction mode using the remaining modes.

帧内预测可以是1)双向帧内预测和/或2)使用剩余模式的帧内预测。Intra prediction may be 1) bidirectional intra prediction and/or 2) intra prediction using residual mode.

在可用于目标块的帧内预测模式中,处理单元1610可考虑帧内预测模式的率失真代价来确定针对目标块的帧内预测模式。Among the intra-prediction modes available for the target block, the processing unit 1610 may determine the intra-prediction mode for the target block considering the rate-distortion cost of the intra-prediction mode.

在步骤3420,处理单元1610可执行使用所确定的帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测。In step 3420, the processing unit 1610 may perform intra prediction for the target block using the determined intra prediction mode.

步骤3420可与上面参照图18描述的步骤1820对应。Step 3420 may correspond to step 1820 described above with reference to FIG. 18 .

可通过执行使用帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测来生成关于经过编码的目标块的信息。The information on the encoded target block may be generated by performing intra prediction on the target block using an intra prediction mode.

可经由使用帧内预测模式的目标块的帧内预测来生成预测块,并且可生成作为目标块与预测块之间的差的残差块。可通过将变换和量化应用于残差块来生成关于经过编码的目标块的信息。The prediction block may be generated through intra prediction of the target block using the intra prediction mode, and a residual block which is a difference between the target block and the prediction block may be generated. Information about the encoded target block may be generated by applying transform and quantization to the residual block.

关于经过编码的目标块的信息可包括目标块的变换和量化系数。关于经过编码的目标块的信息可包括目标块的编码参数。The information about the encoded target block may include transform and quantization coefficients of the target block. The information about the encoded target block may include encoding parameters of the target block.

在步骤3430,处理单元1610可生成比特流。At step 3430, the processing unit 1610 may generate a bitstream.

比特流可包括关于经过编码的目标块的信息。The bitstream may include information about the encoded target block.

比特流可包括预测信息。预测信息可以是用于双向帧内预测和/或使用剩余模式的帧内预测的信息。换句话说,预测信息可包括如实施例中所述的帧内预测所需的与目标块相关的编码参数。The bitstream may include prediction information. The prediction information may be information for bidirectional intra prediction and/or intra prediction using residual mode. In other words, the prediction information may include coding parameters related to the target block required for intra prediction as described in the embodiments.

例如,预测信息可包括用于双向帧内预测的1)单向/双向分类指示符、2)帧内预测模式指示符、3)针对参考像素的权重、4)MPM使用指示符、5)MPM指示符、6)预定义角度α等。For example, prediction information may include 1) unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator, 2) intra prediction mode indicator, 3) weight for reference pixels, 4) MPM usage indicator, 5) MPM for bidirectional intra prediction indicator, 6) predefined angle α, etc.

例如,预测信息可包括用于使用剩余模式的帧内预测的1)MPM使用指示符、2)MPM指示符、3)剩余模式指示符、4)剩余模式使用指示符等。For example, the prediction information may include 1) MPM usage indicator, 2) MPM indicator, 3) remaining mode indicator, 4) remaining mode usage indicator, etc. for intra prediction using remaining mode.

可在步骤3430生成预测信息,或者可至少部分地在步骤3410和步骤3420生成预测信息。Predictive information may be generated at step 3430 , or may be generated, at least in part, at steps 3410 and 3420 .

处理单元1610可将所生成的比特流存储在存储器1640中。可选地,通信单元1620可将比特流发送到解码设备1700。The processing unit 1610 may store the generated bitstream in the memory 1640 . Alternatively, the communication unit 1620 may transmit the bitstream to the decoding apparatus 1700 .

处理单元1610可对预测信息执行熵编码,并且可生成包括经过熵编码的预测信息的比特流。The processing unit 1610 may perform entropy encoding on the prediction information, and may generate a bitstream including the entropy-encoded prediction information.

所述实施例可与上面参照图1描述的编码设备100的操作进行组合。例如,在步骤3410和步骤3420的操作可由帧内预测单元120执行。在步骤3430的操作可由熵编码单元150执行。此外,在执行步骤3410、步骤3420和步骤3430之前、之后和同时,可执行由编码设备100的其他组件进行的操作。The embodiments may be combined with the operations of the encoding apparatus 100 described above with reference to FIG. 1 . For example, the operations at step 3410 and step 3420 may be performed by intra prediction unit 120 . The operations at step 3430 may be performed by the entropy encoding unit 150 . Furthermore, operations performed by other components of the encoding device 100 may be performed before, after, and while steps 3410, 3420, and 3430 are performed.

图35是根据实施例的使用比特流的目标块预测方法的流程图。FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a target block prediction method using a bitstream according to an embodiment.

根据本实施例的使用比特流的目标块预测方法可由解码设备1700执行。所述实施例可以是目标块解码方法或视频解码方法的一部分。The target block prediction method using the bitstream according to the present embodiment may be performed by the decoding apparatus 1700 . The embodiments may be part of a target block decoding method or a video decoding method.

在步骤3510,通信单元1720可获取比特流。通信单元1720可从编码设备1600接收比特流。At step 3510, the communication unit 1720 may obtain the bitstream. The communication unit 1720 may receive the bitstream from the encoding apparatus 1600 .

比特流可包括关于经过编码的目标块的信息。The bitstream may include information about the encoded target block.

关于经过编码的目标块的信息可包括目标块的变换和量化系数。关于经过编码的目标块的信息可包括目标块的编码参数。The information about the encoded target block may include transform and quantization coefficients of the target block. The information about the encoded target block may include encoding parameters of the target block.

比特流可包括预测信息。预测信息可以是用于双向帧内预测和/或使用剩余模式的帧内预测的信息。换句话说,预测信息可包括如实施例中所述的帧内预测所需的与目标块相关的编码参数。The bitstream may include prediction information. The prediction information may be information for bidirectional intra prediction and/or intra prediction using residual mode. In other words, the prediction information may include coding parameters related to the target block required for intra prediction as described in the embodiments.

例如,预测信息可包括用于双向帧内预测的1)单向/双向分类指示符、2)帧内预测模式指示符、3)针对参考像素的权重、4)MPM使用指示符、5)MPM指示符、6)预定义角度α等。For example, prediction information may include 1) unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator, 2) intra prediction mode indicator, 3) weight for reference pixels, 4) MPM usage indicator, 5) MPM for bidirectional intra prediction indicator, 6) predefined angle α, etc.

例如,预测信息可包括用于使用剩余模式的帧内预测的1)MPM使用指示符、2)MPM指示符、3)剩余模式指示符、4)剩余模式使用指示符等。For example, the prediction information may include 1) MPM usage indicator, 2) MPM indicator, 3) remaining mode indicator, 4) remaining mode usage indicator, etc. for intra prediction using remaining mode.

处理单元1710可将所获取的比特流存储在存储器1740中。The processing unit 1710 may store the acquired bitstream in the memory 1740 .

处理单元1710可从比特流获取预测信息。处理单元1710可通过对比特流的经过熵编码的预测信息执行熵解码来获取预测信息。The processing unit 1710 may obtain prediction information from the bitstream. The processing unit 1710 may obtain prediction information by performing entropy decoding on the entropy-encoded prediction information of the bitstream.

在步骤3520,处理单元1710可确定将被应用于目标块的解码的帧内预测模式。At step 3520, processing unit 1710 may determine an intra-prediction mode to be applied to decoding of the target block.

步骤3520可与上面参照图18描述的步骤1810对应。此外,步骤3520可与上面参照图30描述的步骤3010、步骤3020、步骤3030、步骤3040和步骤3050对应。此外,步骤3520可与上面参照图31描述的步骤3110、步骤3120、步骤3130、步骤3140和步骤3150对应。Step 3520 may correspond to step 1810 described above with reference to FIG. 18 . Also, step 3520 may correspond to step 3010 , step 3020 , step 3030 , step 3040 , and step 3050 described above with reference to FIG. 30 . Further, step 3520 may correspond to step 3110, step 3120, step 3130, step 3140, and step 3150 described above with reference to FIG. 31 .

所确定的帧内预测模式可以是1)双向帧内预测模式和/或2)使用剩余模式的帧内预测模式。The determined intra prediction mode may be 1) a bidirectional intra prediction mode and/or 2) an intra prediction mode using the remaining modes.

帧内预测可以是1)双向帧内预测和/或2)使用剩余模式的帧内预测。Intra prediction may be 1) bidirectional intra prediction and/or 2) intra prediction using residual mode.

处理单元1710可基于预测信息确定目标块的帧内预测模式。The processing unit 1710 may determine an intra prediction mode of the target block based on the prediction information.

在步骤3530,处理单元1710可执行使用关于经过编码的目标块的信息和所确定的帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测。At step 3530, the processing unit 1710 may perform intra prediction for the target block using the information about the encoded target block and the determined intra prediction mode.

步骤3530可与上面参照图18描述的步骤1820对应。此外,步骤3530,可通过执行使用帧内预测模式的针对目标块的帧内预测来生成预测块,并且可生成作为预测块和重建残差块之和的重建块。Step 3530 may correspond to step 1820 described above with reference to FIG. 18 . Also, in step 3530, a prediction block may be generated by performing intra prediction on the target block using the intra prediction mode, and a reconstructed block which is the sum of the prediction block and the reconstructed residual block may be generated.

所述实施例可与上面参照图2描述的解码设备200的操作进行组合。例如,在步骤3510的操作可由熵解码单元210执行。在步骤3520和步骤3530的操作可由帧内预测单元240执行。此外,在执行步骤3510、步骤3520和步骤3530之前、之后和同时,可执行由解码设备200的其他组件进行的操作。The embodiments may be combined with the operations of the decoding apparatus 200 described above with reference to FIG. 2 . For example, the operations at step 3510 may be performed by entropy decoding unit 210. The operations at steps 3520 and 3530 may be performed by the intra prediction unit 240 . Furthermore, operations performed by other components of the decoding apparatus 200 may be performed before, after, and while steps 3510, 3520, and 3530 are performed.

在以上描述的实施例中,虽然已基于作为一系列步骤或单元的流程图描述了方法,但是本公开不限于所述步骤的顺序,并且一些步骤可以按照与已描述的步骤的顺序不同的顺序来执行或者与其它步骤同时执行。此外,本领域技术人员将理解:在流程图中示出的步骤不是排他性的,并且还可包括其它步骤,或者,可在不脱离本公开的范围的情况下删除流程图中的一个或更多个步骤。In the above-described embodiments, although the method has been described based on the flowchart as a series of steps or units, the present disclosure is not limited to the order of the steps, and some steps may be in a different order than the described order of steps to be performed or concurrently with other steps. Furthermore, those skilled in the art will understand that the steps shown in the flowcharts are not exclusive and may include other steps, or that one or more of the flowcharts may be deleted without departing from the scope of the present disclosure steps.

以上描述的根据本公开的实施例可被实现为能够由各种计算机装置运行的程序,并且可被记录在计算机可读存储介质上。计算机可读存储介质可单独地或者组合地包括程序指令、数据文件和数据结构。在存储介质上记录的程序指令可被专门设计或配置用于本公开,或者对于计算机软件领域的普通技术人员而言可以是已知的或者可用的。The above-described embodiments according to the present disclosure can be implemented as programs that can be executed by various computer devices, and can be recorded on a computer-readable storage medium. Computer-readable storage media may include program instructions, data files, and data structures, alone or in combination. The program instructions recorded on the storage medium may be specially designed or configured for the present disclosure, or may be known or available to those of ordinary skill in the computer software arts.

计算机可读存储介质可包括本公开的实施例中使用的信息。例如,计算机可读存储介质可包括比特流,并且比特流可包含上面在本发明的实施例中描述的信息。Computer-readable storage media may include information used in embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, a computer-readable storage medium may include a bitstream, and the bitstream may contain the information described above in the embodiments of the present invention.

计算机可读存储介质可包括非暂时性计算机可读介质。Computer-readable storage media may include non-transitory computer-readable media.

计算机可读存储介质的示例可包括被专门配置用于记录和运行程序指令的所有类型的硬件装置,诸如,磁介质(诸如硬盘、软盘和磁带)、光学介质(诸如致密盘(CD)-ROM和数字多功能盘(DVD))、磁光介质(诸如软光盘、ROM、RAM和闪存)。程序指令的示例包括机器代码(诸如由编译器创建的代码)和能够由计算机使用解释器执行的高级语言代码。硬件装置可被配置为作为一个或更多个软件模块进行操作以执行本公开的操作,反之亦可。Examples of computer-readable storage media may include all types of hardware devices specially configured to record and execute program instructions, such as magnetic media (such as hard disks, floppy disks, and magnetic tapes), optical media (such as compact disk (CD)-ROMs) and Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)), magneto-optical media such as floppy disk, ROM, RAM and flash memory. Examples of program instructions include machine code, such as code created by a compiler, and high-level language code that can be executed by a computer using an interpreter. A hardware device may be configured to operate as one or more software modules to perform the operations of the present disclosure, and vice versa.

如上所述,虽然已基于特定细节(诸如详细组件和有限数量的实施例和附图)描述了本公开,但是所述特定细节仅被提供用于容易理解本公开,本公开不限于这些实施例,本领域技术人员将根据以上描述实践各种改变和修改。As described above, although the present disclosure has been described based on specific details, such as detailed components and a limited number of embodiments and drawings, the specific details are provided only to facilitate understanding of the present disclosure and the present disclosure is not limited to these embodiments , those skilled in the art will practice various changes and modifications based on the above description.

因此,应理解的是,本实施例的精神不受限于上述实施例,并且所附权利要求及其等同物和对它们的修改落入本公开的范围内。Therefore, it should be understood that the spirit of the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment and that the appended claims and their equivalents and modifications thereto fall within the scope of the present disclosure.

Claims (20)

1. A decoding method, comprising:
determining a decoded intra prediction mode to be applied to the target block; and is
Performing intra prediction for a target block using the determined intra prediction mode,
wherein the intra prediction mode is a bi-directional intra prediction mode, and
wherein the intra prediction is bi-directional intra prediction.
2. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein the bidirectional intra prediction mode is determined based on availability of pixels in a neighboring block located in a specified direction of a target block.
3. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein the bidirectional intra prediction mode is determined based on prediction modes of neighboring blocks of a target block.
4. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein the two directions of the bi-directional intra prediction are two opposite linear directions.
5. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein:
generating virtual neighboring pixels in a specified direction of a target block and performing the bidirectional intra prediction for the target block using the virtual neighboring pixels, and
the specified direction is one or more of a right direction and a down direction.
6. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein a prediction value for a target pixel in a target block is derived using pixels in neighboring blocks located in both directions of the bi-directional intra prediction.
7. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein a prediction value for a target pixel is derived using weights according to distances between respective pixels located in neighboring blocks in both directions of the bi-directional intra prediction and the target pixel in the target block.
8. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein weights for two directions of the bi-directional intra prediction are used to derive a prediction value for a target pixel in a target block.
9. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein a unidirectional/bidirectional classification indicator and an intra prediction mode indicator are used to determine whether the bidirectional intra prediction mode for a target block is to be used.
10. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein the two directions of the bi-directional intra prediction are determined based on two directions indicated by two intra prediction mode indicators.
11. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein a single intra prediction mode indicator indicates one of a direction of unidirectional intra prediction and a direction of the bidirectional intra prediction.
12. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein one of the unidirectional intra prediction and the bidirectional intra prediction is selected according to availability of reference pixels in a direction corresponding to a direction indicated by an intra prediction mode indicator.
13. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein it is determined which one of unidirectional intra prediction and the bidirectional intra prediction is to be used for the entire target block.
14. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein it is determined which one of unidirectional intra prediction and the bidirectional intra prediction is to be used for each of the pixels in the target block.
15. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein for the first direction and the second direction of the bi-directional intra prediction, when a reference pixel in the first direction or a reference pixel in the second direction is unavailable, a value of the unavailable reference pixel is generated using padding.
16. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein:
determining a prediction value for a target pixel in a target block using at least one of reference pixels located in two prediction directions of the bi-directional intra prediction mode, and
applying a weight to each of the reference pixels.
17. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein:
the residual mode indicator indicates a residual mode to be used for intra prediction of the target block among the plurality of residual modes, and
the plurality of remaining modes are remaining intra prediction modes other than MPMs existing in a most probable mode MPM list.
18. The decoding method of claim 1, wherein the intra prediction mode is determined based on a plurality of different lists.
19. An encoding method, comprising:
determining a decoded intra prediction mode to be applied to the target block; and is
Performing intra prediction for a target block using the determined intra prediction mode,
wherein the intra prediction mode is a bi-directional intra prediction mode, and
wherein the intra prediction is bi-directional intra prediction.
20. A computer-readable storage medium storing a bitstream for image decoding, the bitstream comprising:
Information on the target block that is encoded,
wherein an intra prediction mode to be applied to decoding of the target block is determined, and
wherein the intra prediction for the target block using the information on the encoded target block and the determined intra prediction mode is performed.
CN201880086865.0A 2017-11-28 2018-11-28 Bidirectional intra prediction method and device Pending CN111684801A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR10-2017-0160466 2017-11-28
KR20170160466 2017-11-28
KR10-2018-0076503 2018-07-02
KR20180076503 2018-07-02
KR10-2018-0080865 2018-07-12
KR20180080865 2018-07-12
PCT/KR2018/014847 WO2019107927A1 (en) 2017-11-28 2018-11-28 Bidirectional intra prediction method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN111684801A true CN111684801A (en) 2020-09-18

Family

ID=66845645

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201880086865.0A Pending CN111684801A (en) 2017-11-28 2018-11-28 Bidirectional intra prediction method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (2) KR102402539B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111684801A (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019107927A1 (en) * 2017-11-28 2019-06-06 한국전자통신연구원 Bidirectional intra prediction method and apparatus
CN119420908A (en) * 2019-07-08 2025-02-11 现代自动车株式会社 Method and apparatus for intra prediction encoding of video data
WO2022260339A1 (en) * 2021-06-08 2022-12-15 현대자동차주식회사 Video encoding/decoding method and device
WO2023101524A1 (en) * 2021-12-02 2023-06-08 현대자동차주식회사 Video encoding/decoding method and device using bi-directional intra prediction mode
WO2023171912A1 (en) * 2022-03-07 2023-09-14 현대자동차주식회사 Prediction block generation at video frame boundary
WO2024177434A1 (en) * 2023-02-23 2024-08-29 현대자동차주식회사 Image encoding/decoding method and device, and recording medium storing bitstream
WO2025009747A1 (en) * 2023-07-04 2025-01-09 삼성전자 주식회사 Encoding method, encoding apparatus, decoding method, and decoding apparatus for image

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012087034A2 (en) * 2010-12-22 2012-06-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Intra prediction method and apparatus using the method
US20130016774A1 (en) * 2010-07-31 2013-01-17 Soo-Mi Oh Intra prediction decoding apparatus
WO2013062389A1 (en) * 2011-10-28 2013-05-02 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and device for intra prediction of video
KR20140008503A (en) * 2012-07-10 2014-01-21 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for image encoding/decoding
KR20150070849A (en) * 2013-12-17 2015-06-25 세종대학교산학협력단 Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video
US20150271514A1 (en) * 2014-03-18 2015-09-24 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. Prediction image generation method, image coding method, image decoding method, and prediction image generation apparatus
WO2016195460A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-08 한양대학교 산학협력단 Method and device for encoding and decoding intra-frame prediction

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101444667B1 (en) * 2011-01-15 2014-09-30 에스케이 텔레콤주식회사 Video Coding Method and Apparatus Using Bi-Direction Intra Prediction

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130016774A1 (en) * 2010-07-31 2013-01-17 Soo-Mi Oh Intra prediction decoding apparatus
WO2012087034A2 (en) * 2010-12-22 2012-06-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Intra prediction method and apparatus using the method
WO2013062389A1 (en) * 2011-10-28 2013-05-02 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and device for intra prediction of video
KR20140008503A (en) * 2012-07-10 2014-01-21 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for image encoding/decoding
KR20150070849A (en) * 2013-12-17 2015-06-25 세종대학교산학협력단 Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video
US20150271514A1 (en) * 2014-03-18 2015-09-24 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. Prediction image generation method, image coding method, image decoding method, and prediction image generation apparatus
WO2016195460A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-08 한양대학교 산학협력단 Method and device for encoding and decoding intra-frame prediction

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102402539B1 (en) 2022-05-27
KR20240063850A (en) 2024-05-10
KR20190062300A (en) 2019-06-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110463201B (en) Prediction method and device using reference block
CN110121884B (en) Method and apparatus for filtering
US12244853B2 (en) Bidirectional intra prediction method and apparatus
CN110476425B (en) Prediction method and device based on block form
CN109314785B (en) Method and apparatus for deriving motion prediction information
CN109792515B (en) Image encoding/decoding method and apparatus, and recording medium storing bit stream
CN111567045A (en) Method and apparatus for using inter prediction information
CN111699682A (en) Method and apparatus for encoding and decoding using selective information sharing between channels
US11985325B2 (en) Method, apparatus, and recording medium for encoding/decoding image by using geometric partitioning
CN111684801A (en) Bidirectional intra prediction method and device
CN114450946A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for encoding/decoding images by using geometric partitions
KR20190107581A (en) Method and apparatus for derivation of intra prediction mode
CN111919448A (en) Method and apparatus for image encoding and image decoding using temporal motion information
CN116325730A (en) Method, device and recording medium for encoding/decoding images by using geometric partitioning
CN114270828A (en) Method and apparatus for image encoding and image decoding using block type-based prediction
CN119013993A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for image encoding/decoding
CN118355663A (en) Method, device and recording medium for encoding/decoding an image
CN119234422A (en) Video encoding or decoding method, apparatus and recording medium storing bit stream
CN118216141A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for encoding/decoding image by using geometric partition
CN119234419A (en) Video encoding or decoding method, apparatus and recording medium storing bit stream
CN119318146A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for image encoding/decoding
CN115066895A (en) Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding image by using palette mode, and recording medium
CN118592028A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for image encoding/decoding
CN118556398A (en) Method, apparatus and recording medium for image encoding/decoding
CN114788288A (en) Transform information encoding/decoding method and apparatus, and bit stream storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination